You are on page 1of 1262

Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

9500 Microwave Packet Radio


Release 8.0.0

Hardware Installation and Replacement


Manual

3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA

Issue 1

Nokia — Proprietary and confidential.


Use pursuant to applicable agreements.
Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

Nokia is a registered trademark of Nokia Corporation. Other products and company


names mentioned herein may be trademarks or tradenames of their respective
owners.

The information presented is subject to change without notice. No responsibility is


assumed for inaccuracies contained herein.

© 2017 Nokia.

Contains proprietary/trade secret information which is the property of Nokia and must
not be made available to, or copied or used by anyone outside Nokia without its
written authorization. Not to be used or disclosed except in accordance with
applicable agreements.

2 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

Table of Contents
Preface ........................................................................................................41
9500 MPR documentation ...................................................................................................41
Related documentation .......................................................................................................43
Naming conventions in the documentation .........................................................................45
Audience ...................................................................................................................47
Information symbols ............................................................................................................47
Contact information .............................................................................................................48
Technical support ................................................................................................................48
Documentation feedback.....................................................................................................48

1 About this document....................................................................49


1.1 Purpose .....................................................................................................49
1.2 What’s new ................................................................................................49
1.3 Intended audience .....................................................................................50
1.4 Safety information......................................................................................50

2 Safety awareness..........................................................................51
2.1 Safety EMC-EMF-ESD norms and equipment labeling ............................51
2.2 Safety rules................................................................................................51
2.2.1 General rules .............................................................................................51
2.2.1.1 Observe safety rules..................................................................................51
2.3 Labels indicating Danger, Forbidding, Command .....................................52
2.3.1 Dangerous electrical voltages ...................................................................53
2.3.1.1 Labeling: ...................................................................................................53
2.3.1.2 Safety instructions: ...................................................................................54
2.3.2 Risks of explosions....................................................................................54
2.3.2.1 Labeling: ...................................................................................................54
2.3.2.2 Safety instructions: ...................................................................................54
2.3.3 Moving mechanical parts...........................................................................55
2.3.3.1 Labeling: ...................................................................................................55
2.3.3.2 Safety instructions: ...................................................................................55
2.3.4 Equipment connection to earth..................................................................56
2.3.4.1 Labeling: ...................................................................................................56
2.3.4.2 Safety instructions: ...................................................................................56
2.3.5 Heat-radiating mechanical parts................................................................56
2.3.5.1 Labeling: ...................................................................................................56
2.3.5.2 Safety instructions: ...................................................................................57
2.3.6 Microwave radiations (EMF norms)...........................................................57
2.3.6.1 Safety instructions: ...................................................................................57
2.4 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC norms)..............................................58
2.4.1 Cables: .....................................................................................................60
2.5 Equipment protection against electrostatic discharges .............................60
2.6 Cautions to avoid equipment damage .......................................................61
2.6.1 Electrostatic-sensitivity ..............................................................................61
2.6.1.1 Handling cards...........................................................................................62

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 3


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

2.6.2 Screw fixing ...............................................................................................63


2.6.2.1 MSS-ODU cable disconnection / connection.............................................63
2.7 Fan, equipment rack, and equipment cabinet precautions........................63
2.8 Electrical precautions ................................................................................64
2.9 Harmful optical signals ..............................................................................65
2.9.1 Laser precautions ......................................................................................65

Hardware installation .............................................................................. 67

3 High-level procedure to install a 9500 MPR system ..................69


3.1 Purpose .....................................................................................................69
3.2 Procedures ................................................................................................69

4 Unpack and inspect equipment...................................................79


4.1 Purpose .....................................................................................................79
4.2 General......................................................................................................79
4.3 Recommended tools..................................................................................79
4.4 Procedure ..................................................................................................80

5 Prepare floor .................................................................................83


5.1 Purpose .....................................................................................................83
5.2 General......................................................................................................83
5.3 Prerequisite ...............................................................................................83
5.4 Recommended tools..................................................................................83
5.5 Procedure ..................................................................................................85

6 Rack installation ...........................................................................97


6.1 Purpose .....................................................................................................97
6.2 General......................................................................................................97
6.2.1 Rack descriptions ......................................................................................97
6.2.1.1 Standard rack or Laborack (19”) ...............................................................97
6.2.1.2 Seismic 19” rack .......................................................................................98
6.2.1.3 ETSI (21”) rack ..........................................................................................98
6.2.1.4 Outdoor cabinet ........................................................................................98
6.3 Prerequisite ...............................................................................................98
6.4 Recommended tools..................................................................................98
6.5 Procedure ..................................................................................................99

7 PDU installation (ANSI market) .................................................113


7.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................113
7.2 General....................................................................................................113
7.3 Prerequisite .............................................................................................113
7.4 Recommended tools................................................................................113
7.5 Procedure ................................................................................................114

8 TRU installation (ETSI market) ..................................................117


8.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................117
8.2 General....................................................................................................117

4 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

8.2.1 Breakers for the MPT-HLS TRU..............................................................120


8.3 Prerequisite .............................................................................................121
8.4 Procedures ..............................................................................................122
8.4.1 Installation of the 20-slot TRU ................................................................122
8.4.2 Power cabling to rack components..........................................................125
8.4.3 -48 Vdc Power Supply connection...........................................................125
8.4.4 +24 Vdc Power Supply connection..........................................................127

9 Route and terminate station ground and office battery


power cables ...............................................................................129
9.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................129
9.2 General....................................................................................................129
9.3 Prerequisite .............................................................................................130
9.4 Recommended tools................................................................................130
9.5 Procedure ................................................................................................130

10 Hardware installation for the MPR-e solution ..........................137


10.1 MPR-e standalone: Installation & interconnection overview....................137
10.2 MPR-e in Single NE mode with 7705 SAR: installation &
interconnection overview .........................................................................144
10.3 MSS-1c installation & interconnection overview......................................147
10.4 Hardware installation ...............................................................................149
10.4.1 Rack installation for MSS-1c ...................................................................150
10.4.1.1 General....................................................................................................150
10.4.2 MSS-1c installation..................................................................................151
10.4.2.1 MSS-1c grounding...................................................................................152
10.4.2.2 Power supply cable .................................................................................153
10.4.2.3 Installation of more than one MSS-1c in one rack...................................154
10.4.2.4 E1 external connections (ETSI market)...................................................155
10.4.2.5 T1 external connections (ANSI market)...................................................159

11 MSS-O installation ......................................................................163


11.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................163
11.2 General....................................................................................................163
11.2.1 Equipment powering................................................................................164
11.2.1.1 MSS-O AC version ..................................................................................164
11.2.1.2 MSS-O DC version ..................................................................................164
11.3 Prerequisite .............................................................................................165
11.4 Recommended tools................................................................................165
11.5 Procedure ................................................................................................165

12 MSS-1 shelf installation .............................................................177


12.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................177
12.2 General....................................................................................................177
12.2.1 Space requirements ................................................................................177
12.2.1.1 Multiple MSS-1 units................................................................................178
12.2.2 MSS-1 unit ..............................................................................................178
12.2.3 Wall Mounting Installation........................................................................178

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 5


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

12.3 Procedure ................................................................................................180


12.3.1 Prerequisites............................................................................................180
12.3.2 Required Equipment and Tools ...............................................................180
12.3.3 To horizontally install an MSS-1 ..............................................................181
12.3.4 Manage E1 external connections for the ETSI market ............................182

13 MSS-4/8 and MPT-HL/HLC shelf installation ............................185


13.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................185
13.2 General....................................................................................................185
13.2.1 Space requirements and mount options (MSS-4/8) ................................185
13.2.2 Space requirements and mount options (MPT-HL) .................................186
13.2.3 MSS subracks ........................................................................................186
13.2.4 Wall Mounting Installation........................................................................187
13.3 Procedure ................................................................................................188
13.3.1 Prerequisites............................................................................................188
13.3.2 Required Equipment and Tools ...............................................................188
13.3.3 To horizontally install an MSS-4/8 shelf .................................................190
13.3.4 To install an MPT-HL shelf .....................................................................191

14 Power interfaces installation .....................................................193


14.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................193
14.2 General....................................................................................................193
14.2.1 Power injector box ...................................................................................194
14.2.2 MPT Power Unit ......................................................................................194
14.2.3 MPT Extended Power Unit ......................................................................194
14.2.4 AC Power Converter for the ETSI market ...............................................195
14.2.4.1 Connection to MSS-4/8: SubD pigtail ......................................................196
14.2.4.2 Connection to MSS-1, MSS-1c, power injector box, power unit,
and extended power unit: O-ring pigtail...................................................196
14.2.5 Power Injector card..................................................................................197
14.3 Power interface procedures.....................................................................198
14.3.1 Prerequisites............................................................................................198
14.3.2 Recommended Tools ..............................................................................198
14.3.3 To install a power injector box ................................................................199
14.3.4 To install an MPT power unit or MPT extended power unit ....................200
14.3.5 To connect direct office power to MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/9558HC .............200
14.3.6 To prepare and connect the O-Ring Cable to connect AC power
converter via the PIB (MSS-1/1c) ............................................................201
14.3.7 To connect AC power converter to the MSS-4/8 using the D Sub
cable ........................................................................................................202

15 Install MPT-HLS standard in an ETSI rack (ETSI market) .......203


15.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................203
15.2 Prerequisite .............................................................................................203
15.3 Procedures ..............................................................................................204
15.3.1 Preparing power cabling for MPT-HLS standard components ................204
15.3.1.1 Connecting and routing power supply cables for the fan module ...........206
15.3.1.2 Connecting and routing power supply cables for the MSS-8...................208

6 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

15.3.1.3 Connecting and routing power supply cables for the 9500 MPR
long haul subrack ....................................................................................209
15.3.2 MPT-HLS standard fan assembly............................................................210
15.3.2.1 Fan supports ...........................................................................................211
15.3.2.2 Fan support positions ..............................................................................211
15.3.2.3 Fan installation procedures .....................................................................212
15.3.2.4 Supply connections for the fans ..............................................................214
15.3.2.5 Single fan substitution into a fan module.................................................218
15.3.2.6 Connecting power cables to the fan unit ................................................220
15.3.3 MSS-8 and E1 distribution patch panel ..................................................221
15.3.3.1 MSS-8 and E1 distribution patch panel components ..............................221
15.3.3.2 MSS-8 and distribution patch panel positions ........................................222
15.3.3.3 Power supply connections for the MSS-8 ...............................................222
15.3.4 9500 MPR long haul subrack .................................................................227
15.3.4.1 9500 MPR long haul subrack installation ...............................................227
15.3.4.2 Factory configuration ..............................................................................227
15.3.4.3 Power supply connections for the 9500 MPR long haul subrack ...........227
15.3.4.4 Connecting the power leads to the subrack battery connectors .............229
15.3.5 MPT-HLS standard module installation ...................................................231
15.3.6 MPT-HLS standard module connections to 9500 MPR long haul
components .............................................................................................233
15.3.6.1 MPT-HLS standard module RF connections ..........................................234
15.3.6.2 Data and RPS connectors ......................................................................237
15.3.6.3 Fan management ...................................................................................242
15.3.6.4 XPIC .......................................................................................................246

16 Install MPT-HLS standard in an LSY rack (ETSI market) ........249


16.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................249
16.2 General....................................................................................................249
16.2.1 LSY existing installations.........................................................................249
16.2.2 Upgrade use cases..................................................................................251
16.2.2.1 Case a: Addition of MPT-HLS transceivers or partial replacement
of LSY transceivers in a system without ADM.........................................252
16.2.2.2 Case b: Addition of MPT-HLS transceivers or partial replacement
of LSY transceivers in a system with ADM..............................................253
16.2.2.3 Case c: Full replacement of LSY transceivers with MPT-HLS
standard in a system without ADM ..........................................................255
16.2.2.4 Case d: Full replacement of LSY transceivers with MPT-HLS
standard in a system with ADM ...............................................................256
16.2.3 Common operation description................................................................258
16.2.3.1 Existing TRU upgrading or replacement..................................................258
16.3 Prerequisite .............................................................................................262
16.4 Procedures ..............................................................................................262
16.4.1 Cooling system (fan module) replacement ..............................................263
16.4.1.1 Fan unit for transceiver sub-shelf replacement .......................................264
16.4.1.2 Fan unit for ADM sub-shelf replacement .................................................267
16.4.1.3 Powering of new fan units .......................................................................268
16.4.1.4 CAN-BUS reconfiguration after fan unit replacement..............................268
16.4.1.5 Alarm management for replaced fan units...............................................270

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 7


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

16.4.2 Upgrading of the transceivers sub-shelf ..................................................270


16.4.2.1 Preparation of the slots............................................................................270
16.4.2.2 Preparation of the MPT-HLS transceiver and insertion into the sub-
shelf .........................................................................................................271
16.4.2.3 RF connections of the MPT-HLS transceiver in a LSY sub-shelf
and branching cover placement ..............................................................273
16.4.3 Branching section expansion...................................................................277
16.4.4 Positioning and powering of the MSS-8 sub-shelf...................................278
16.4.4.1 Placement of MSS-8 in systems without ADM that will maintain
the Base Band sub-shelf (case a) ...........................................................278
16.4.4.2 Placement of MSS-8 in systems where Base Band is removed
(case c and d)..........................................................................................279
16.4.4.3 Powering of MSS-8 sub-shelf ..................................................................279

17 Install MPT-HLS standard in an LSY-LHRC sub-shelf


(ETSI market)...............................................................................281
17.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................281
17.2 General....................................................................................................281
17.2.1 LSY-LHRC existing installations..............................................................281
17.2.2 9600 LSY – LHRC upgrading with MPT HLS (generalities) ....................283
17.3 Procedure for 9600 LSY – LHRC upgrading with MPT HLS ...................283
17.4 LSY-LHRC system configurations and their upgrading with MPT
HLS..........................................................................................................288
17.4.1 Systems at 6, 7, and 8 GHz, 2 channels co-polar ...................................288
17.4.2 Systems at 6, 7, and 8 GHz, 2 channels alternate polar .........................289
17.4.3 Systems at 10, 11, and 13 GHz, 2 channels co-polar .............................289
17.4.4 Systems at 10, 11, and 13 GHz, 2 channels alternate polar ...................290
17.4.5 Systems at 10.5 GHz, 2 channels co-polar special configuration ...........291
17.4.6 Systems at 10.5 GHz, 2 channels alternate polar special
configuration ............................................................................................292
17.4.7 Systems at 4 GHz, 2 channels co-polar ..................................................293
17.4.8 Systems at 4 GHz, 2 channels alternate polar ........................................294

18 Install MPT-HLS compact in a 21” ETSI or 19” rack ................297


18.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................297
18.2 Prerequisites............................................................................................297
18.2.1 Customer supplied 19” rack requirements...............................................297
18.2.2 Customer supplied 19” rack - power requirements..................................300
18.3 General....................................................................................................300
18.3.1 Transceivers sub-shelf ............................................................................301
18.3.2 Connections.............................................................................................303
18.3.2.1 Power connections and grounding ..........................................................304
18.3.2.2 Fan unit connections ...............................................................................305
18.3.2.3 Transceivers connections........................................................................305
18.3.3 Branching drawer ....................................................................................306
18.3.3.1 4L and 4U systems..................................................................................307
18.3.3.2 6 to 13 GHz systems ...............................................................................311
18.3.4 Standard branching configurations..........................................................315
18.3.4.1 4L and 4U configurations.........................................................................315

8 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

18.3.4.2 6, 7 and 8 GHz configurations .................................................................326


18.3.4.3 10 and 11GHz system configurations......................................................332
18.4 Procedures ..............................................................................................338
18.4.1 To install the MPT-HLS compact on a 21” rack.......................................338
18.4.2 To install the MPT-HLS compact on a 19” Rack .....................................343
18.4.2.1 Rack and TRU installation (Nokia supplied 19” rack) ..............................343
18.4.2.2 MPT-HLS compact module installation ...................................................344
18.4.2.3 MPT-HLS compact module connections .................................................346

19 Route and terminate power cables ...........................................353


19.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................353
19.2 General....................................................................................................353
19.2.1 MSS-8 shelf .............................................................................................355
19.2.2 MSS-4 shelf .............................................................................................355
19.2.3 MSS-1 unit...............................................................................................355
19.2.4 MSS-O.....................................................................................................356
19.2.5 MPT-HL/HLC shelf ..................................................................................356
19.2.6 +24/-48 Power Converter ........................................................................356
19.2.7 Power Injector Card/Box..........................................................................357
19.2.8 MPT Power Unit ......................................................................................357
19.2.9 MPT Extended Power Unit ......................................................................357
19.3 Prerequisite .............................................................................................358
19.4 Recommended materials.........................................................................359
19.5 Procedures ..............................................................................................360
19.5.1 To install MSS-8 shelf power cable .........................................................360
19.5.2 To install MSS-4 shelf power cable .........................................................361
19.5.3 To install MSS-1 Shelf power cable.........................................................361
19.5.4 To install +24/-48 Power Converter power cable ....................................364
19.5.5 To install MPT-HL/MPT-HLC transceiver power cable ...........................370
19.5.6 To install power injector box power cable................................................372
19.5.7 To install MPT Power Unit/MPT Extended Power Unit cable ..................374

20 Type N adapter bracket installation ..........................................377


20.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................377
20.2 General....................................................................................................377
20.3 Prerequisite .............................................................................................377
20.4 Recommended tools................................................................................378
20.5 Procedure ................................................................................................378

21 Demarcation panel/DDF installation .........................................379


21.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................379
21.2 General....................................................................................................379
21.2.1 Demarcation panels for the ANSI market ................................................379
21.2.2 DDFs for the ETSI market .......................................................................380
21.2.2.1 SCSI68 pin - FW cable ............................................................................382
21.2.2.2 SUB D 37 pin - FW cable ........................................................................384
21.3 Prerequisite .............................................................................................385
21.4 Recommended tools................................................................................386
21.4.1 DS1 RJ-45 demarcation panel ...............................................................386

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 9


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

21.4.2 DS1 37 pin D demarcation panel ............................................................386


21.4.3 DS3 hybrid grooming panel .....................................................................386
21.5 Procedures ..............................................................................................387
21.5.1 DS1 RJ-45 demarcation panel ................................................................387
21.5.2 DS1 37 pin demarcation panel ................................................................390
21.5.3 DS3 hybrid grooming panel .....................................................................391

22 MPT ODU installation .................................................................393


22.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................393
22.2 General....................................................................................................393
22.2.1 Types of MPT ODU .................................................................................394
22.2.2 Radio configurations................................................................................394
22.2.3 Accessories and cables for MPT connections ........................................394
22.2.3.1 RPS cable restrictions for MPT-HC-HQAM/XP-HQAM ...........................395
22.2.4 1+1 RPS configuration ............................................................................395
22.2.5 Labels affixed on the MPT ODU..............................................................396
22.3 Types of pole mounting installation kits...................................................398
22.3.1 Integrated antenna mount .......................................................................398
22.3.2 Pole mounting for remote ODU installation .............................................399
22.3.3 Types of nose adapters ...........................................................................400
22.3.4 Types of RF couplers, OMT and OMT-C.................................................400
22.4 Prerequisite .............................................................................................405
22.5 Recommended materials and tools .........................................................405
22.5.1 MPT ODU ................................................................................................405
22.6 Installation procedures ............................................................................406
22.6.1 To install a 1+0 MPT ODU (integrated antenna) - all frequencies...........406
22.6.2 To install a 1+1 MPT ODU (integrated antenna) - all frequencies...........411
22.6.3 To install a 1+1 MPT ODU (non integrated antenna) - all
frequencies ..............................................................................................416
22.6.4 To install a 1+1 HSB XPIC MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM
configuration ............................................................................................419
22.6.5 To install a 2x(1+0) XPIC MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM
configuration using OMT .........................................................................423
22.6.6 To install a 2x(1+0) XPIC MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM
configuration using OMT-C......................................................................443
22.6.7 To install a 4x(1+0) XPIC MPT-HC (11, 18, and 23 GHz) and MPT
HC-HQAM (18, and 23 GHz) configuration using OMT-C ......................452
22.7 Supporting procedures ............................................................................454
22.7.1 To install loads for unused ports..............................................................455
22.7.2 To set the coupling between transceiver and external diplexer box........456
22.7.3 To install RPS and XPIC+RPS module ...................................................464
22.7.4 To set polarization on the RF coupler......................................................470
22.7.5 To install an MPT ODU onto antenna, coupler, or OMT..........................477
22.7.6 To unmate and disconnect the electrical Ethernet cable from the
MPT ODU ................................................................................................492
22.7.7 To connect optical cable..........................................................................493
22.7.8 To connect power supply cable ...............................................................494
22.7.9 To install the MPT ODU Cable System ...................................................494
22.7.10 To connect cable in 1+1 RPS configuration ............................................494

10 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

22.7.11 To connect cable in XPIC configuration ..................................................495


22.7.12 Notes about antenna alignment...............................................................500
22.7.13 To perform fine tuning for polarization alignment with OMT-C ................501

23 Route and terminate cables between MSS and MPT


ODU..............................................................................................503
23.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................503
23.2 General....................................................................................................504
23.2.1 Radio port options ...................................................................................504
23.2.2 Cable system options ..............................................................................505
23.2.2.1 PFoE interconnection ..............................................................................507
23.2.2.2 Fiber with Cat5e site power interconnection............................................508
23.2.2.3 Fiber with LMR-400 site power interconnection ......................................508
23.3 Recommended materials.........................................................................508
23.3.1 Cable system configuration .....................................................................508
23.3.2 MPT ODU connections............................................................................509
23.3.2.1 PFoE Interconnection .............................................................................509
23.3.2.2 Fiber with Cat5e power cable ..................................................................510
23.3.2.3 Fiber with LMR-400 power cable.............................................................510
23.3.2.4 Components for Telecordia GR-1089 lightning compliance
(optional)..................................................................................................510
23.3.3 Building Entry or MSS-O ........................................................................511
23.3.3.1 PFoE Interconnection ..............................................................................511
23.3.3.2 Fiber with Cat5e power cable ..................................................................511
23.3.3.3 Fiber with LMR-400 power cable.............................................................511
23.3.4 MSS-O/1/4/8............................................................................................511
23.3.5 Cable assemblies ....................................................................................513
23.4 Recommended tools................................................................................513
23.5 Prerequisite .............................................................................................514
23.6 Procedure ................................................................................................514
23.6.1 MPT Access, EASv2, MSS-1, or MSS-O shelf electrical (PFoE)
Ethernet ports 1 or 2 to MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/ 9558HC installation .........516
23.6.2 MPT access card optical Ethernet ports 3 or 4 to MPT-HC/HC-
HQAM/9558HC installation......................................................................517
23.6.3 Core-E or MSS-1 unit port 3 or 4 or MSS-O port 3 electrical
Ethernet port to MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/9558HC installation ......................518
23.6.4 Core-E, EAS, or MSS-1 unit optical Ethernet port to MPT-HC/HC-
HQAM/9558HC installation......................................................................520
23.6.5 MPT Access, Core-E, EASv2, MSS-1, or MSS-O shelf electrical
Ethernet port to MPT-XP/XP-HQAM installation .....................................522
23.6.6 MPT Access, Core-E, EAS, or MSS-1 shelf optical Ethernet port to
MPT-XP/XP-HQAM installation ...............................................................524
23.6.7 Electrical data connection to MSS-O.......................................................525
23.6.8 Optical data connection to MSS-O ..........................................................526
23.6.9 Direct connection of site power to MPT ODU installation........................527

24 MPT Ethernet/power cable system installation .......................529


24.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................529
24.2 General....................................................................................................529

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 11


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

24.2.1 Lightning surge suppressor .....................................................................532


24.2.2 System grounding requirements..............................................................532
24.2.3 Weatherproofing ......................................................................................532
24.3 Prerequisite .............................................................................................533
24.4 Recommended materials.........................................................................533
24.5 Procedure ................................................................................................533

25 MPT ODU electrical Ethernet and power cable system


grounding ....................................................................................537
25.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................537
25.2 General....................................................................................................537
25.2.1 System grounding requirements..............................................................537
25.3 Prerequisite .............................................................................................540
25.4 Recommended tools................................................................................540
25.5 Recommended materials.........................................................................540
25.6 Procedure ................................................................................................541

26 Lightning surge suppressor installation (ANSI market) .........551


26.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................551
26.2 General....................................................................................................551
26.2.1 Lightning surge suppressor for LMR-400 coaxial cable runs ..................551
26.2.2 Lightning surge suppressor for electrical Ethernet Cat5e cable
runs..........................................................................................................552
26.2.2.1 General guidelines...................................................................................552
26.2.3 Suppressor installation at building entry..................................................554
26.3 Prerequisite .............................................................................................555
26.4 Recommended tools................................................................................555
26.5 Procedure ................................................................................................556
26.5.1 Installing a surge suppressor at the MPT ODU with Cat5e cable ...........556
26.5.2 Installing a surge suppressor at the MSS-O with Cat5e cable ................557
26.5.3 Installing a surge suppressor at the MPT ODU with LMR-400
cable ........................................................................................................558
26.5.4 Installing a lightning surge suppressor inside the building ......................559
26.5.5 Installing a lightning surge suppressor outside the building ....................561

27 Weatherproofing outside cable connections ...........................563


27.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................563
27.2 General....................................................................................................563
27.2.1 Weatherproofing ......................................................................................563
27.2.2 Self amalgamating tape...........................................................................564
27.2.3 Example of Type N connector weatherproofing for MPT ODU
coaxial cables .........................................................................................564
27.2.4 Grounding kits and weatherproofing requirements..................................565
27.3 Prerequisite .............................................................................................565
27.4 Recommended materials.........................................................................565
27.4.1 Weatherproofing materials ......................................................................565
27.5 Procedure ................................................................................................566
27.5.1 Weatherproofing using self amalgamating tape ......................................566
27.5.2 Weatherproofing LMR-400 ground kit using butyl mastic tape................568

12 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

27.5.3 Weatherproofing Cat5e ground kit using butyl mastic tape .....................570

28 Route and terminate E1 and DS1 signal cables.......................575


28.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................575
28.2 General....................................................................................................575
28.2.1 E1 cable information for the ETSI market................................................576
28.2.1.1 Cable 8xE1 IDU-DISTRIBUTOR 75 ohm coax. cable pin function..........576
28.2.1.2 RJ45 E1 to wire-wrap cable.....................................................................577
28.2.1.3 Cords to be used with 2xE1 SFP (SFP for port #5 and #6 of Core-
E unit) ......................................................................................................577
28.2.2 Connectors on the front panel of the MSS-1 and 32DS1E1 PDH
(68 Pin SCSI Functions) ..........................................................................578
28.3 Prerequisite .............................................................................................581
28.4 Recommended tools................................................................................582
28.4.1 DS1 RJ-45 patch panel cables ................................................................582
28.4.2 DS1 37 pin D patch panel cables ............................................................583
28.4.3 P32E1DS1 SCSI connector pigtail cables ..............................................583
28.5 Procedures ..............................................................................................584
28.5.1 DS1 RJ-45 patch panel customer signal interconnect.............................584
28.5.2 DS1 37 pin D patch panel customer signal interconnect.........................587
28.5.3 P32E1DS1 or MSS-1 shelf SCSI connector pigtail cables .....................590

29 Route and terminate DS3 signal cables ...................................595


29.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................595
29.2 General....................................................................................................595
29.3 Prerequisite .............................................................................................596
29.4 Recommended tools................................................................................596
29.5 Procedures ..............................................................................................597
29.5.1 Direct connection to P2E3DS3 module ...................................................597
29.5.2 Mini-BNC to BNC adapter cables ............................................................598
29.5.3 DS3 hybrid splitter ...................................................................................599

30 Route and terminate Ethernet signal cables ............................601


30.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................601
30.2 General....................................................................................................601
30.3 Prerequisite .............................................................................................601
30.4 Recommended tools................................................................................602
30.4.1 10/100/1000 10BaseT Ethernet RJ-45 patch panel cables for the
ANSI market ............................................................................................602
30.4.2 SFP GigE Ethernet modules for the ANSI market...................................603
30.4.3 Electrical SFP GigE Ethernet modules for the ANSI market ...................603
30.4.4 Dual LC multi-mode fiber for the ANSI market ........................................604
30.4.5 Dual LC single-mode fiber for the ANSI market ......................................604
30.4.6 Optical 50/50 fiber coupler for the ANSI market ......................................604
30.4.7 Ethernet Electrical Cables for the ETSI market .......................................604
30.4.8 Ethernet Optical Cables for the ETSI market ..........................................605
30.5 Ethernet SFPs for the Core-E card in the ETSI market...........................605
30.5.1 2xE1 SFP pin functions ...........................................................................606
30.5.2 Accessories for SDH SFP .......................................................................606

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 13


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

30.5.3 Accessories for E3 SFP...........................................................................606


30.6 Procedure ................................................................................................607
30.6.1 10/100/1000 BaseT Ethernet on core-E or MSS-1 shelf signal
interconnect .............................................................................................607
30.6.2 GigE SFP Ethernet on Core-E, MSS-1, or MSS-O Signal
interconnect .............................................................................................613
30.6.3 GigE SFP Ethernet on protected Core-E ports 5 and 6 signal
interconnect .............................................................................................614
30.6.4 10GigE SFP Ethernet on CorEvo-10G ports 5 and 6 signal
interconnect .............................................................................................615
30.6.5 10/100/1000 BaseT on EAS Ethernet signal interconnect ......................615
30.6.6 GigE SFP Ethernet on EAS Ethernet signal interconnect .......................618
30.6.7 GigE SFP Ethernet on EAS Ethernet signal to MPT-HL/MPT-HLC
transceiver interconnect ..........................................................................618

31 Route and Terminate STM-1/OC3 Signal Cables .....................621


31.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................621
31.2 General....................................................................................................621
31.3 Prerequisite .............................................................................................622
31.4 Recommended tools................................................................................623
31.4.1 SFP STM-1/OC-3 modules......................................................................623
31.4.2 Dual LC multi-mode fiber.........................................................................623
31.4.3 Dual LC single-mode fiber .......................................................................623
31.4.4 Optical Splitter/Combiner.........................................................................624
31.5 Procedure ................................................................................................624

32 Route and terminate sync signal cables ..................................627


32.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................627
32.2 General....................................................................................................627
32.3 Prerequisite .............................................................................................627
32.4 Recommended tools................................................................................627
32.4.1 External sync inputs/outputs....................................................................628
32.4.2 Stacked MSS-4/MSS-8 shelves, unprotected Core.................................628
32.4.3 Stacked MSS-4/MSS-8 shelves, protected Core.....................................628
32.5 Procedure ................................................................................................629

33 Route and terminate AUX card cables......................................633


33.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................633
33.2 General....................................................................................................633
33.2.1 Connectors on the front panel of the AUX peripheral card......................634
33.2.2 AUX card housekeeping alarm connectors ............................................639
33.2.2.1 Housekeeping cable for alarm management...........................................641
33.3 Prerequisite .............................................................................................642
33.4 Recommended tools................................................................................642
33.5 Procedure ................................................................................................643

14 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

34 Route and terminate MSS-8 shelf Enhanced Fan and


MSS-1 shelf housekeeping alarm cable ...................................645
34.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................645
34.2 General....................................................................................................645
34.2.1 Enhanced Fan housekeeping alarms ......................................................645
34.2.1.1 Enhanced fan alarm connectors..............................................................646
34.2.2 MSS-1 Shelf housekeeping alarms .........................................................647
34.2.2.1 MSS-1 housekeeping alarm connectors..................................................648
34.3 Prerequisite .............................................................................................650
34.4 Recommended tools................................................................................651
34.5 Procedure ................................................................................................651

35 Route and terminate MPT Power Unit Housekeeping


Alarm cable .................................................................................655
35.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................655
35.2 General....................................................................................................655
35.3 Prerequisite .............................................................................................655
35.4 Recommended tools................................................................................656
35.5 Procedure ................................................................................................656

36 Install standoffs and secure cables with cable ties ................659


36.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................659
36.2 General....................................................................................................659
36.3 Prerequisite .............................................................................................659
36.4 Recommended tools................................................................................659
36.5 Procedure ................................................................................................660

37 Assemble a cable to connect to a Core card ...........................663


37.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................663
37.2 General....................................................................................................663
37.2.1 Network Management Systems...............................................................663
37.3 Prerequisite .............................................................................................663
37.4 Procedure ................................................................................................664

38 Antenna alignment .....................................................................665


38.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................665
38.2 General....................................................................................................665
38.2.1 Preparation ..............................................................................................666
38.2.2 Signal measurement................................................................................666
38.2.2.1 Using RSL data for any radio ..................................................................666
38.2.2.2 Using the RSSI voltage for MPT ODU.....................................................667
38.2.2.3 Using the RSSI voltage at the MPT-HLS/HLC ........................................668
38.2.3 RSL measurement guidelines .................................................................671
38.2.4 Main beams and side lobes.....................................................................671
38.2.4.1 Locating the main beam ..........................................................................671
38.2.4.2 Tracking path error ..................................................................................672
38.3 Recommended tools................................................................................674
38.4 Procedure ................................................................................................674

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 15


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

38.4.1 Additional procedure for CCDP XPIC links with MPT-HC/HC-


HQAM/MC/XP/XP-HQAM........................................................................674
38.4.2 Alignment procedure for dual polarized antenna.....................................676

39 Expand an MPT-HLS system (ETSI market) .............................681


39.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................681
39.2 General....................................................................................................681
39.2.1 Available kits and materials for system expansion ..................................682
39.3 Prerequisite .............................................................................................682
39.4 Procedures ..............................................................................................682
39.4.1 Preparation of the system for expansion .................................................682
39.4.2 RT sub-rack operations for system expansion ........................................683
39.4.2.1 Back panel upgrading..............................................................................683
39.4.2.2 Enabling new slots on the RT sub-rack ...................................................686
39.4.3 Branching expansion ...............................................................................693
39.4.3.1 Use cases................................................................................................694
39.4.3.2 Branching upgrade in a system ready for expansion ..............................696
39.4.3.3 Branching upgrade in a system not ready for expansion ........................699
39.4.4 Cooling system upgrading .......................................................................715
39.4.5 TRU upgrading ........................................................................................716

Hardware replacement ........................................................................... 717

40 Mechanical card removal and installation................................719


40.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................719
40.2 General....................................................................................................719
40.3 Procedure ................................................................................................720

41 MPT-HL/MPT-HLC transceiver air filter replacement ..............723


41.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................723
41.2 General....................................................................................................723
41.3 Recommended materials.........................................................................723
41.4 Recommended tools................................................................................724
41.5 Procedure ................................................................................................724

42 SFP replacement.........................................................................725
42.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................725
42.2 General....................................................................................................725
42.3 Recommended materials.........................................................................725
42.4 Procedure ................................................................................................726

43 Core switching module (Core-E or CorEvo) replacement ......729


43.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................729
43.2 Prerequisites............................................................................................729
43.3 General....................................................................................................729
43.4 Procedure ................................................................................................730
43.4.1 To prepare for Core replacement ............................................................731
43.4.2 To replace a Core card with Core protection...........................................732

16 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

43.4.3 To replace a Core card without Core protection......................................735

44 Core switching module (Core-E or CorEvo) flash card


replacement.................................................................................739
44.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................739
44.2 Prerequisites............................................................................................739
44.3 General....................................................................................................739
44.4 Procedures ..............................................................................................743
44.4.1 To prepare for flash card replacement ....................................................744
44.4.2 Flash card replacement on protected Core configuration........................746
44.4.3 Unprotected Core replacement procedure ..............................................749
44.4.4 Re-provision Cross-Connections.............................................................751

45 Ethernet Access Switch replacement (EASv2 and


P8ETH) .........................................................................................755
45.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................755
45.2 Prerequisites............................................................................................755
45.3 General....................................................................................................755
45.4 Procedures ..............................................................................................757
45.4.1 To prepare for EAS replacement.............................................................758
45.4.2 Protected radio directions EAS replacement procedure..........................759
45.4.3 Unprotected EAS radio direction(s) replacement procedure ...................762

46 MSS-4/8 shelf FAN replacement ................................................765


46.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................765
46.2 Prerequisites............................................................................................765
46.3 General....................................................................................................765
46.4 Procedure ................................................................................................766

47 MSS-4/8 shelf FAN component replacement ...........................767


47.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................767
47.2 Prerequisites............................................................................................767
47.3 General....................................................................................................767
47.4 Before you begin .....................................................................................767
47.5 Procedure - Replace FAN 1U components .............................................769
47.6 Procedure - FAN 2U components ...........................................................772
47.7 Procedure - FAN Evo 2U components ....................................................775

48 MPT-HL/MPT-HLC transceiver replacement.............................779


48.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................779
48.2 Prerequisites............................................................................................779
48.3 General....................................................................................................779
48.4 Procedure ................................................................................................780

49 P2E3DS3 (2-Port DS3) replacement ..........................................785


49.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................785
49.2 Prerequisites............................................................................................785
49.3 General....................................................................................................785

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 17


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

49.4 Procedure ................................................................................................786

50 P32E1DS1 (32-Port DS1) replacement ......................................789


50.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................789
50.2 Prerequisites............................................................................................789
50.3 General....................................................................................................789
50.4 Procedure ................................................................................................790

51 System power down and power up...........................................793


51.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................793
51.2 General....................................................................................................793
51.3 Procedure ................................................................................................794
51.3.1 System power down procedure ...............................................................794
51.3.2 System power up procedure....................................................................795

52 MPTACC (MPT Access) replacement........................................797


52.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................797
52.2 Prerequisites............................................................................................797
52.3 General....................................................................................................797
52.4 Procedure ................................................................................................798

53 MPT ODU replacement (MPT-MC, MPT-HC, MPT-XP,


9558HC) .......................................................................................803
53.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................803
53.2 Prerequisites............................................................................................803
53.3 General....................................................................................................804
53.3.1 6 GHz MPT ODUs in 1+1 configuration ..................................................805
53.4 Procedures ..............................................................................................806
53.4.1 Removal and replacement of an MPT-HC/MC with another variant
in 1+1 configuration (ETSI market only) ..................................................809

54 MPT-HC upgrade or replacement to MPT-HC-HQAM ..............811


54.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................811
54.2 Prerequisites............................................................................................812
54.3 General....................................................................................................812
54.4 Procedure ................................................................................................814

55 P8ETH upgrade to EASv2 and MPT-HL upgrade to


MPT-HLC......................................................................................823
55.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................823
55.2 Prerequisites............................................................................................823
55.3 General...................................................................................................824
55.4 Procedures ..............................................................................................825
55.4.1 Important notes........................................................................................825
55.4.2 To prepare for an upgrade operation.......................................................826
55.4.3 To convert a P8ETH to EASv2 ................................................................828
55.4.4 To convert MPT-HL to MPT-HLC ............................................................831

18 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

55.4.5 To convert both P8ETH to EASv2 and MPT-HL to MPT-HLC


simultaneously.........................................................................................834

56 Core-E to CorEvo Upgrade Procedure .....................................839


56.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................839
56.2 Prerequisites............................................................................................839
56.3 Procedure ...............................................................................................840
56.3.1 To prepare for the upgrade .....................................................................840
56.3.2 To perform the upgrade on a system without Core protection ................842
56.3.3 To perform the upgrade on a system with Core protection .....................846

57 Auxiliary (AUX) replacement .....................................................849


57.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................849
57.2 Prerequisites............................................................................................849
57.3 General....................................................................................................849
57.4 Procedure ................................................................................................850

58 Upgrade unlicensed MPT-HL radio to lower 6 GHz radio .......853


58.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................853
58.2 General....................................................................................................853
58.3 Procedure ................................................................................................853

59 +24/-48 volt converter replacement...........................................857


59.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................857
59.2 Prerequisites............................................................................................857
59.3 General....................................................................................................857
59.4 Procedure ................................................................................................858

60 Power injector replacement.......................................................861


60.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................861
60.2 Prerequisites............................................................................................861
60.3 General....................................................................................................861
60.4 Procedure ................................................................................................862

61 RPS/XPIC module replacement .................................................865


61.1 Purpose ..................................................................................................865
61.2 Prerequisites............................................................................................865
61.3 General....................................................................................................865
61.4 Procedure ................................................................................................866

62 MPT Power Unit replacement ....................................................871


62.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................871
62.2 Prerequisites............................................................................................871
62.3 General....................................................................................................871
62.4 Procedure ................................................................................................872

63 SDHACC Replacement ...............................................................875


63.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................875

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 19


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

63.2 Prerequisites............................................................................................875
63.3 General....................................................................................................875
63.4 Procedure ................................................................................................876

64 MSS-1 shelf replacement ...........................................................879


64.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................879
64.2 Prerequisites............................................................................................879
64.3 General....................................................................................................879
64.4 Procedure ................................................................................................880

65 MSS-O shelf replacement ..........................................................883


65.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................883
65.2 Prerequisites............................................................................................883
65.3 General....................................................................................................883
65.4 Procedure ................................................................................................884

66 MSS-1c removal and replacement ............................................887


66.1 MSS-1c replaced by MSS-1c 16PDH......................................................887
66.2 MSS-1c 16PDH replaced by MSS-1c......................................................887

67 Clean fiber-optic connectors .....................................................889


67.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................889
67.2 Prerequisites............................................................................................889
67.3 Recommended Tools ..............................................................................889
67.4 General....................................................................................................889
67.5 Procedure ................................................................................................891

68 Appendix A: Additional cabinet installation instructions .......897


68.1 Cabinet installation details (ANSI only) ...................................................897
68.2 Cabinet installation details (ETSI only)....................................................897

20 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

List of figures
2 Safety awareness..........................................................................51
Figure 1 Dangerous voltage ....................................................................................53
Figure 2 Ground protection warning ........................................................................53
Figure 3 Risk of explosion .......................................................................................54
Figure 4 Openings must be covered........................................................................55
Figure 5 Moving mechanical parts...........................................................................55
Figure 6 Equipment connection to earth..................................................................56
Figure 7 Heat-radiating mechanical parts................................................................56
Figure 8 EMF emission warning ..............................................................................58
Figure 9 Compliance boundaries for 9500 MPR-A transceivers with 1ft (30
cm) antenna...............................................................................................58
Figure 10 EMC norms................................................................................................59
Figure 11 Electrostatic sensitive ................................................................................61
Figure 12 Electrostatic-sensitive sign ........................................................................62
Figure 13 Electrostatic protection kit..........................................................................63
Figure 14 Class 1 laser..............................................................................................65

5 Prepare floor .................................................................................83


Figure 15 Sample floor plan.......................................................................................86
Figure 16 Rack envelope: MSS-4/MSS-8 shelf .........................................................86
Figure 17 Rack envelope: MPT-HL shelf w/diplexer..................................................87
Figure 18 Rack envelope: MPT-HL shelf w/one waveguide bracket .........................87
Figure 19 Rack envelope: MPT-HL shelf w/two waveguide brackets........................88
Figure 20 Floor mounting detail for standard rack bay ..............................................89
Figure 21 Floor mounting detail for unequal flange seismic rack ..............................89
Figure 22 Standard rack (PN 694-9000-006) ............................................................90
Figure 23 Unequal flange seismic rack (PN 1AD014120046) ...................................91
Figure 24 Self-drilling anchor.....................................................................................93
Figure 25 Anchor setting............................................................................................94

6 Rack installation ...........................................................................97


Figure 26 Securing the 19” rack to floor ..................................................................100
Figure 27 Securing the 21” Rack to Floor (1) ..........................................................101
Figure 28 Securing the 21” Rack to Floor (2) ..........................................................102
Figure 29 Example of securing rack assembly to concrete floor ............................103
Figure 30 Floor file drilling template.........................................................................104
Figure 31 Standard rack top support bay ................................................................105
Figure 32 Standard rack top with extension kit........................................................106
Figure 33 Seismic rack top support .........................................................................106
Figure 34 Typical method of bracing top support ....................................................107
Figure 35 Guardrail installation, standard racks ......................................................108
Figure 36 Adjacent rack attachment, standard racks ..............................................109
Figure 37 21” rack grounding...................................................................................110
Figure 38 Photo detail of rack grounding point ........................................................110
Figure 39 19” grounding ..........................................................................................111

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 21


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

7 PDU installation (ANSI market) .................................................113


Figure 40 PDU mounting detail................................................................................114
Figure 41 PDU mounting detail with existing Bay equipment ..................................115

8 TRU installation (ETSI market) ..................................................117


Figure 42 TRU (6 fuse holders) shown without cover..............................................117
Figure 43 TRU (10 breakers slots) shown without cover.........................................118
Figure 44 TRU (20 breakers slots) shown without cover.........................................118
Figure 45 Breaker adding ........................................................................................118
Figure 46 TRU shown with cover.............................................................................119
Figure 47 Breaker distribution schema ....................................................................121
Figure 48 TRU example configuration .....................................................................121
Figure 49 TRU in ETSI 21” rack ..............................................................................122
Figure 50 Fix the battery cables to the GND bar .....................................................123
Figure 51 Remove the plastic protection cap ..........................................................124
Figure 52 Close the lock on the breaker and insert it in the TRU ............................124
Figure 53 Close the breaker lock and tighten the upper screw ...............................125
Figure 54 2W2C Connector and Cable....................................................................126
Figure 55 MSS-8 Battery Access Card on subrack .................................................126
Figure 56 MSS-1 cabling .........................................................................................127
Figure 57 +24 Vdc Power Supply connections........................................................128

9 Route and terminate station ground and office battery


power cables ...............................................................................129
Figure 58 PDU strap detail ......................................................................................131
Figure 59 Station ground standard rack detail.........................................................132
Figure 60 Station ground seismic rack detail...........................................................133
Figure 61 Station ground crimp lug detail ................................................................133
Figure 62 Wire sizing chart ......................................................................................134
Figure 63 PDU battery interconnect detail...............................................................135
Figure 64 PDU office battery routing detail..............................................................135

10 Hardware installation for the MPR-e solution ..........................137


Figure 65 Station interconnections with MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/9558HC/MC
(Power Injector box/MPT Extended Power Unit) .....................................137
Figure 66 Station interconnections with MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/9558HC/MC
(Power Injector card and 7705 SAR).......................................................138
Figure 67 Station interconnections with MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/9558HC (MPT
power unit) ..............................................................................................138
Figure 68 Station interconnections with MPT ODU (MPT Extended Power
Unit) ........................................................................................................139
Figure 69 Station interconnections with MPT-HC/HC-HQAM - 1+0 repeater
configuration ............................................................................................139
Figure 70 Station interconnections with MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/9558HC- 1+0
repeater configuration (MPT Power Unit) ................................................140
Figure 71 Station interconnections with MPT-HC/XP/HC-HQAM/XP-
HQAM/9558HC - 1+0 repeater configuration (MPT Extended Power Unit) .
140

22 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

Figure 72 Station interconnections with MPT-HC/HC-HQAM - co-channel


XPIC (Power Injector box) .......................................................................141
Figure 73 Station interconnections with MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM -
co-channel XPIC (MPT Extended Power Unit)........................................142
Figure 74 Station interconnections with MPT-HC/HC-HQAM - co-channel
XPIC ........................................................................................................143
Figure 75 Station interconnection with MPT-HC/XP/HC-HQAM/XP-
HQAM/9558HC - 1+0 repeater configuration .........................................143
Figure 76 Station interconnections with MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/MC (Power
Injector card)............................................................................................144
Figure 77 Station interconnections with MPT-HC/HC-HQAM (MPT power
unit)..........................................................................................................144
Figure 78 Station interconnections with MPT-HLC..................................................144
Figure 79 Station interconnections with MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM
(MPT Extended Power Unit)....................................................................145
Figure 80 Alternative station interconnections with MPT-HC/HC-
HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM (MPT Extended Power Unit) ................................145
Figure 81 Station interconnections with MPT-HC/HC-HQAM - co-channel
XPIC (7705 SAR) ....................................................................................146
Figure 82 Station interconnections with MPT-HC/HC-HQAM - co-channel
XPIC (Power Injector Card and 7705 SAR).............................................146
Figure 83 Station interconnections with MPT-HC/HC-HQAM – 1+1 Hot
Standby ...................................................................................................146
Figure 84 Station interconnections with MPT-MC/HC/HC-HQAM/9558HC
(one cable)...............................................................................................147
Figure 85 Station interconnections with MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/9558HC
(optical cable + coax. power supply cable to MSS-1c) ............................148
Figure 86 Station interconnections with MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/9558HC
(optical cable + coax. power supply cable to Station battery) .................148
Figure 87 Station interconnections with MPT-XP/XP-HQAM (PFoE) ......................149
Figure 88 Station interconnections with MPT-XP/XP-HQAM (optical cable to
MSS-1c + coax. power supply cable to MPT Extended Power Unit).......149
Figure 89 One MSS-1c, left mounting .....................................................................151
Figure 90 One MSS-1c, right mounting ...................................................................151
Figure 91 Two MSS-1c ............................................................................................152
Figure 92 One MSS-1c and one FAN......................................................................152
Figure 93 Grounding................................................................................................152
Figure 94 Grounding................................................................................................153
Figure 95 Power/return connection..........................................................................153
Figure 96 Installation solution ..................................................................................154
Figure 97 Installation solution ..................................................................................154
Figure 98 Installation solution ..................................................................................155
Figure 99 Interconnections to connector support 1.6/5.6 75 ohm panel 1U ...........156
Figure 100 Interconnections to connector support BNC 75 ohm Panel 1U ..............156
Figure 101 Interconnections to support 19 Inch modules 120 ohm Panel 3U ...........157
Figure 102 Interconnections to the E1 distributor (part 1) .........................................158
Figure 103 Interconnections to the E1 distributor (part 2) .........................................158
Figure 104 Interconnections to T1 connectors 37 position D-Sub cable ..................159

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 23


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

11 MSS-O installation ......................................................................163


Figure 105 3DB19158AAAB installation kit components...........................................166
Figure 106 Pole mounting of MSS-O.........................................................................166
Figure 107 Wall mounting of MSS-O .........................................................................167
Figure 108 MSS-O grounding....................................................................................167
Figure 109 Grounding of data cable through the 1AD040130004 kit ........................168
Figure 110 Termination of ground cables to a ground point ......................................168
Figure 111 Grounding of the data cables using the 3CC50271AA grounding
kit ............................................................................................................169
Figure 112 Installation of the 3CC50271AA grounding kit for compliance with
IEEE 1613 ..............................................................................................170
Figure 113 Installation instructions for the AC power connector ...............................171
Figure 114 Power cable conductors placement on the connector terminal
blocks ......................................................................................................171
Figure 115 Assemble connector 1AB41822003 ........................................................172
Figure 116 Protect the braid with the thermoretractable tube....................................173
Figure 117 Place the insert assembly in the cover housing ......................................174
Figure 118 Data connection on MSS-O.....................................................................175

12 MSS-1 shelf installation .............................................................177


Figure 119 MSS-1 unit...............................................................................................178
Figure 120 Mechanical Support 10U (Two brackets) ...............................................179
Figure 121 Installation kit to fix the mechanical support ..........................................179
Figure 122 MSS-1 Mounting Kit.................................................................................181
Figure 123 MSS-1 installation and constraints ..........................................................181
Figure 124 MSS-1 shelf screw locations ...................................................................182
Figure 125 MSS-1 grounding.....................................................................................182
Figure 126 MSS-1 E1 external connections ..............................................................183

13 MSS-4/8 and MPT-HL/HLC shelf installation ............................185


Figure 127 MSS-8 Subrack .......................................................................................186
Figure 128 MSS-4 Subrack .......................................................................................186
Figure 129 Mechanical Support 10U (Two brackets) ...............................................187
Figure 130 Installation kit to fix the mechanical support ..........................................187
Figure 131 MSS 8 Fixed on wall mounting ...............................................................188
Figure 132 MSS-4/8 shelf mounting detail.................................................................190
Figure 133 9500 MPR MSS-4/8 shelf screw locations ..............................................190
Figure 134 MPT-HL shelf screw locations .................................................................191

14 Power interfaces installation .....................................................193


Figure 135 AC Power Converter................................................................................195
Figure 136 SubD pigtail for AC Converter (MSS-4/8)................................................196
Figure 137 AC Power O-Ring Pigtail ........................................................................197
Figure 138 Power Injector card..................................................................................197
Figure 139 Power injector box/bracket mounting detail.............................................199
Figure 140 Grounding................................................................................................200
Figure 141 Direct office power support bracket mounting detail................................201
Figure 142 Modified AC Power O-Ring Pigtail Cable ................................................202

24 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

15 Install MPT-HLS standard in an ETSI rack (ETSI market) .......203


Figure 143 Right-side cable duct detail .....................................................................207
Figure 144 Routing power cable to the subrack .......................................................210
Figure 145 Fan support rack......................................................................................211
Figure 146 Rubber shock absorber ...........................................................................213
Figure 147 Cover plate ..............................................................................................214
Figure 148 Fan module connector with cable............................................................214
Figure 149 Fan cabling components .........................................................................214
Figure 150 Separate cable and make a loop.............................................................215
Figure 151 Install the ferrite on the wire ....................................................................215
Figure 152 Close the ferrite on the wire.....................................................................215
Figure 153 Pull the wire on both sides.......................................................................215
Figure 154 Second wire.............................................................................................216
Figure 155 Remove the wire jacket ...........................................................................216
Figure 156 Power supply with ferrites on a fan module.............................................216
Figure 157 Terminate the power cord........................................................................217
Figure 158 Insert fan cables in the duct cable ...........................................................217
Figure 159 Remove the faulty fan module.................................................................218
Figure 160 Unscrew the screws from the top cover ..................................................218
Figure 161 Remove screws in the bottom cover .......................................................219
Figure 162 Unwind wires and remove the connector ................................................219
Figure 163 FAN battery terminals..............................................................................220
Figure 164 MPT-HLS standard rack components .....................................................221
Figure 165 MSS distribution patch panel...................................................................222
Figure 166 MSS-8 Battery connector location ...........................................................223
Figure 167 Distribution cable connections.................................................................224
Figure 168 Routing distribution cables from the MSS-8 to the distribution rack ........225
Figure 169 Distribution panel.....................................................................................226
Figure 170 Top view of cables connected to the back of the distribution panel ........226
Figure 171 Cables to connector.................................................................................229
Figure 172 Positive cable ..........................................................................................230
Figure 173 Negative cable.........................................................................................231
Figure 174 9500 MPR long haul subrack back panel ................................................232
Figure 175 Inserting an MPT-HLS standard module .................................................233
Figure 176 RF connectors on the MPT-HLS standard module..................................234
Figure 177 RF connections from the MPT-HLS standard module to the TX and
RX filters ..................................................................................................237
Figure 178 RX filter cover plate .................................................................................237
Figure 179 Data and RPS ports: expanded view.......................................................238
Figure 180 Data and RPS connections in the ETSI rack...........................................241
Figure 181 MPT-HLS standard fan management port...............................................242
Figure 182 FAN Mgmt ports on the fan module.........................................................243
Figure 183 Protected and non-protected fan management ......................................244
Figure 184 Example of routing of Fan management cables ......................................245
Figure 185 XPIC connector port ...............................................................................246
Figure 186 Supported XPIC configurations ...............................................................247

16 Install MPT-HLS standard in an LSY rack (ETSI market) ........249


Figure 187 LSY system without ADM ........................................................................250

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 25


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

Figure 188 LSY system with ADM .............................................................................251


Figure 189 Case a .....................................................................................................253
Figure 190 Case b .....................................................................................................254
Figure 191 Case c .....................................................................................................256
Figure 192 Case d .....................................................................................................257
Figure 193 Front view of LSY TRU............................................................................258
Figure 194 Connection of supply cables to the breaker holder bar for
3DB05602AA TRU ..................................................................................259
Figure 195 Connection of supply cables to the breaker holder bar for
3DB00734AA TRU ..................................................................................260
Figure 196 Breaker for LSY TRU...............................................................................260
Figure 197 Breaker insertion in LSY TRU .................................................................260
Figure 198 Use of tool-screw for breaker extraction..................................................261
Figure 199 Supply cords for fan unit and MSS-8 pre-assembled with crimp
connectors and plug-in to terminals.........................................................262
Figure 200 Two 4x fan modules in the fan support....................................................263
Figure 201 Remove Rx branching cover ...................................................................264
Figure 202 Supply cables and CAN-BUS connectors ...............................................265
Figure 203 Supply cables and CAN-BUS connectors unplugged..............................265
Figure 204 Remove the fan unit ................................................................................265
Figure 205 Bottom side of base band shelf before and after dust removal ...............266
Figure 206 Shock absorbing rubber band .................................................................266
Figure 207 Placement of the 3DB80783AAAA gasket ..............................................267
Figure 208 Routing of supply cables for fans ............................................................268
Figure 209 CAN-BUS connection scheme for LSY systems without ADM................269
Figure 210 CAN-BUS connection scheme for LSY systems with ADM.....................269
Figure 211 CAN-BUS terminator for case a ..............................................................269
Figure 212 CAN-BUS terminator for case b ..............................................................270
Figure 213 Removal of front and top cover to enable a new slot on the sub-
shelf .........................................................................................................271
Figure 214 Placement of MPT-HLS transceiver adapters .........................................272
Figure 215 MPT-HLS transceivers in the LSY sub-shelf with details of the
blocking screws .......................................................................................273
Figure 216 Upper RF connections for new MPT-HL transceivers in a LSY sub-
shelf .........................................................................................................275
Figure 217 Lower RF connections for new MPT-HL transceivers in a LSY sub-
shelf .........................................................................................................276
Figure 218 New RX branching cover placement .......................................................277
Figure 219 Placement of MSS-8 in the ADM reserved empty space ........................278
Figure 220 Placement of MSS-8 in the space left by Base Band removal ................279

17 Install MPT-HLS standard in an LSY-LHRC sub-shelf


(ETSI market)...............................................................................281
Figure 221 LSY-LHRC sub-shelf sections .................................................................282
Figure 222 Module removal before upgrading...........................................................284
Figure 223 MPT HLS Fan module .............................................................................285
Figure 224 Tightening the RF cables of the MPT HLS transceivers..........................286
Figure 225 LHRC system after upgrading with MPT HLS transceivers.....................287
Figure 226 Systems at 6, 7, and 8 GHz, 2 channels co-polar ...................................288

26 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

Figure 227 Systems at 6, 7, and 8 GHz, 2 channels alternate polar .........................289


Figure 228 Systems at 10, 11, and 13 GHz, 2 channels co-polar .............................290
Figure 229 Systems at 10, 11, and 13 GHz, 2 channels alternate polar ...................291
Figure 230 Systems at 10.5 GHz, 2 channels co-polar special configuration ...........292
Figure 231 Systems at 10.5 GHz, 2 channels alternate polar special
configuration ............................................................................................293
Figure 232 Systems at 4 GHz, 2 channels co-polar ..................................................294
Figure 233 Systems at 4 GHz, 2 channels alternate polar ........................................295

18 Install MPT-HLS compact in a 21” ETSI or 19” rack ................297


Figure 234 Customer supplied 19” rack - space requirements..................................298
Figure 235 Required spacing between rack and external objects (19” rack -
customer supplied) ..................................................................................299
Figure 236 Branching drawer - rear access...............................................................299
Figure 237 MPT-HLS compact transceiver sub-shelf with two transceivers..............301
Figure 238 MPT-HLS compact transceiver sub-shelf with one transceiver ...............302
Figure 239 Equipped MPT-HLS compact sub-shelf ..................................................302
Figure 240 Fan unit....................................................................................................303
Figure 241 Transceiver levers with blocking screws .................................................303
Figure 242 Power cords connected to the transceiver sub-shelf...............................304
Figure 243 Grounding point .......................................................................................304
Figure 244 Fan unit connections for alarm management ..........................................305
Figure 245 RF, data and RPS connections on transceivers......................................306
Figure 246 XPIC connections on transceivers...........................................................306
Figure 247 4L/U branching drawer homopolar config (four channels).......................308
Figure 248 4L/U branching drawer in heteropolar config (four channels)..................308
Figure 249 Antenna circulators in a 21" ETSI rack ....................................................310
Figure 250 Antenna circulators on a 19" rack............................................................311
Figure 251 6 to 13 GHz branching drawer for 19” rack .............................................312
Figure 252 6 to 13 GHz branching drawer for 21” rack .............................................313
Figure 253 Homopolar branching ..............................................................................314
Figure 254 Heteropolar branching .............................................................................314
Figure 255 4L/4U:Two channels homopolar without diversity ...................................315
Figure 256 4L/4U:Two channels homopolar with diversity ........................................316
Figure 257 4L/4U: Four channel homopolar without diversity ...................................317
Figure 258 4L/4U: Four channel homopolar with diversity ........................................318
Figure 259 4L/4U: 2 + 2 channels heteropolar without diversity................................319
Figure 260 4L/4U: 2 + 2 channels heteropolar with diversity.....................................320
Figure 261 4L/4U: HSB without diversity ...................................................................321
Figure 262 4L/4U: 2 x HSB without diversity .............................................................322
Figure 263 4L/4U: HSB diversity with combiner ........................................................323
Figure 264 4L/4U: 2 x HSB diversity with combiner ..................................................324
Figure 265 4L/4U: HSB diversity RPS .......................................................................325
Figure 266 4L/4U: 2 xHSB diversity RPS ..................................................................326
Figure 267 6, 7 and 8 GHz two channel homopolar ..................................................327
Figure 268 6, 7 and 8 GHz four channel homopolar..................................................327
Figure 269 6, 7 and 8 GHz 2+2 channel homopolar..................................................328
Figure 270 6, 7 and 8 GHz HSB ................................................................................329
Figure 271 6, 7 and 8 GHz HSB space diversity with combiner ................................330

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 27


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

Figure 272 6, 7 and 8 GHz with RPS, HSB and diversity ..........................................331
Figure 273 10/11 GHz: Two channels homopolar .....................................................332
Figure 274 10/11 GHz: Four channel homopolar ......................................................333
Figure 275 10/11 GHz: 2 + 2 channels heteropolar...................................................334
Figure 276 10/11 GHz: HSB configuration ................................................................335
Figure 277 10/11 GHz: HSB space diversity with combiner configuration ................336
Figure 278 10/11 GHz: System with RPS, HSB and diversity ...................................337
Figure 279 MSS-8 positioning on the 21” ETSI rack .................................................339
Figure 280 Power cords plugged in to the MSS sub-shelf.........................................340
Figure 281 Antenna flanges in homopolar configuration with and without
diversity ...................................................................................................341
Figure 282 Antenna flanges in heteropolar configuration with and without
diversity ...................................................................................................342
Figure 283 Positioning of branching shelf for 4L/4U..................................................345
Figure 284 Transceiver sub-shelf positioning (19” rack)............................................346
Figure 285 Connections to PDU (19” rack)................................................................347
Figure 286 Antenna filters in homopolar systems with/without RX diversity..............349
Figure 287 Antenna filters in heteropolar systems with/without RX diversity
(6/7/8 GHz) ..............................................................................................350
Figure 288 Antenna filters in heteropolar systems with/without RX diversity (10-
13 GHz) ...................................................................................................351
Figure 289 4L/4U ranges the antenna access points ...............................................352

19 Route and terminate power cables ...........................................353


Figure 290 MSS-8 shelf power connection detail ......................................................360
Figure 291 MSS-4 shelf power connection detail ......................................................361
Figure 292 MSS-1 Shelf power cable termination .....................................................362
Figure 293 A & B power/return connection to MSS-1 Shelf.......................................363
Figure 294 Station ground connection to MSS-1 Shelf..............................................364
Figure 295 Station ground connection to MSS-1 Shelf..............................................364
Figure 296 MSS-8 shelf power converter connection detail ......................................365
Figure 297 Power cable connection to MSS-4/MSS-8 shelf......................................366
Figure 298 Power cable routing detail .......................................................................366
Figure 299 B-side power to PDU routing ...................................................................367
Figure 300 A-side power to PDU routing ...................................................................367
Figure 301 MSS-4/MSS-8 shelf power cable detail ...................................................368
Figure 302 MSS-1/MSS-4/MSS-8 shelf power cable termination details ..................369
Figure 303 Power cable connection to MPT-HL/MPT-HLC transceiver ....................370
Figure 304 MPT-HL/MPT-HLC shelf power cable detail............................................371
Figure 305 MPT-HL shelf power cable termination details ........................................372
Figure 306 A & B power/return connection to power injector box..............................373
Figure 307 Station ground connection to power injector box.....................................373
Figure 308 A & B power/return connection to MPT power unit..................................375
Figure 309 Station ground connection to MPT power unit ........................................375

20 Type N adapter bracket installation ..........................................377


Figure 310 Type N jumper cable detail......................................................................378

28 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

21 Demarcation panel/DDF installation .........................................379


Figure 311 Protection Panel 32E1 SCSI 68 - 1.0/2.3 75 ohm (Front/Rear)
(3DB16104AAAA)....................................................................................380
Figure 312 Protection Panel RJ45 120 ohm (Front/Rear) (1AF15245ABAA)............381
Figure 313 Protection Panel 32E1 SCSI 68 - 1.6/5.6 75 ohm (Front)
(1AF15243AAAA) ....................................................................................381
Figure 314 Protection Panel 32E1 BNC 75 ohm (Front) (1AF15244AAAA)..............381
Figure 315 Connector support 1.6/5.6 75 ohm Panel 1U (3CC08061AAAA) ............381
Figure 316 Connector support BNC 75 ohm Panel 1U (3CC08061ABAA) ...............381
Figure 317 Support 19 Inch modules 120 ohm Panel 3U (3CC07810AAAA)............382
Figure 318 E1 Protection SCSI 68/Sub-D 37 (Front/Rear) (3DB16102AAAA)..........382
Figure 319 SCSI 68 male connector..........................................................................382
Figure 320 Sub D 37 pin - FW cable .........................................................................384
Figure 321 DS1 RJ-45 demarcation panel mounting detail .......................................388
Figure 322 DS1 demarcation panel cable routing, front view ....................................389
Figure 323 DS1 demarcation panel cable routing, rear view.....................................389
Figure 324 DS1 37 pin D demarcation panel and rack mount bracket detail ............390
Figure 325 DS1 37 pin D demarcation panel mounting detail ...................................390
Figure 326 DS3 hybrid splitter interconnect detail .....................................................392
Figure 327 P2E3DS3 mini-BNC connector detail ......................................................392

22 MPT ODU installation .................................................................393


Figure 328 MPT-HC/MC/XP ODU label.....................................................................396
Figure 329 Label on MPT-HC-HQAM/XP-HQAM transceiver boxes.........................396
Figure 330 Label affixed inside the MPT ODU external diplexer box ........................397
Figure 331 Example of integrated antenna pole mounting (with antenna and
nose adapter) ..........................................................................................399
Figure 332 Pole mounting for remote MPT ODU installation kit ...............................399
Figure 333 MPT ODU RF coupler views: 6 to 11 GHz ..............................................401
Figure 334 MPT-HC/HC-HQAM RF coupler view: 11 to 38 GHz ..............................401
Figure 335 MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM OMT view: 6 to 11 GHz ..................402
Figure 336 MPT-HC/HC-HQAM OMT view: 11 to 23 GHz / 11 and 25 GHz V-
shape.......................................................................................................402
Figure 337 MPT-HC/HC-HQAM OMT 38 GHz ..........................................................402
Figure 338 MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM integrated OMT-C view: U6
and L6 GHz .............................................................................................403
Figure 339 MPT-HC (11, 13, 15, 18 and 23 GHz) and MPT-HC-HQAM (13,
15, 18 and 23 GHz) OMT-C view ...........................................................404
Figure 340 Loads for unused ports view....................................................................404
Figure 341 Example of antenna polarization (“1+0” MPT ODU integrated
antenna) ..................................................................................................408
Figure 342 Pole mount for remote MPT ODU installation .........................................410
Figure 343 Example of an RF coupler on an integrated antenna (11-38 GHz) .........413
Figure 344 View of MPT-HC 1+1 integrated antenna after installation (11-38
GHz) ........................................................................................................414
Figure 345 Installation of MPT-HC 1+1 (11-38 GHz) ................................................417
Figure 346 Installation of MPT-HC/HC-HQAM 1+1 (11-38 GHz) ..............................420
Figure 347 Upgrade existing SB or SC type antenna................................................424
Figure 348 Upgrade existing SBX or SCX type antenna ...........................................425

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 29


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

Figure 349 OMT antenna interface assembly detail (6 to 11 GHz) ...........................426


Figure 350 Install OMT interface onto antenna w/fine tuning screw (6 to 11
GHz) ........................................................................................................427
Figure 351 Apply silicone grease on O-ring before OMT installation ........................427
Figure 352 OMT installation on the antenna..............................................................428
Figure 353 OMT antenna interface assembly detail (11 to 38 GHz) .........................429
Figure 354 Install OMT interface onto antenna w/angular tuning part (11 to 38
GHz) ........................................................................................................429
Figure 355 Apply silicone grease on O-ring before OMT installation ........................430
Figure 356 OMT fine tuning screw installation (11 to 23 GHz) ..................................431
Figure 357 OMT orientation detail (11 to 23 GHz).....................................................432
Figure 358 Mount the MPT interfaces .......................................................................433
Figure 359 Mount the basic feeder: new installation .................................................433
Figure 360 Remove the antenna flange ....................................................................434
Figure 361 Dismount the basic feeder and tuning plate (if present) ..........................434
Figure 362 Mount the basic feeder and the tuning plate (if present) .........................435
Figure 363 Mount the OMT to the antenna................................................................435
Figure 364 Mount the OMT with the opening toward the bottom...............................436
Figure 365 Mount the antenna interface....................................................................437
Figure 366 Mount the MPT interface .........................................................................438
Figure 367 Mount the basic feeder: new installation .................................................439
Figure 368 Remove the antenna flange ....................................................................439
Figure 369 Dismount the basic feeder and tuning plate (if present) ..........................440
Figure 370 Mount the basic feeder and the tuning plate (if present) .........................440
Figure 371 Mount the OMT to the antenna................................................................441
Figure 372 Apply silicone grease on O-ring before MPT-HC/HC-
HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM installation ............................................................442
Figure 373 MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM installation on OMT (6 to 11
GHz) ........................................................................................................442
Figure 374 OMT installation on the antenna (11 to 23 GHz) .....................................444
Figure 375 L6 GHz lateral noses assembly with the pipe on the left.........................445
Figure 376 L6 GHz OMT-C lateral noses assembly with the pipe on the right..........445
Figure 377 Sway bar kit .............................................................................................446
Figure 378 Sway bar kit mounting .............................................................................446
Figure 379 Sway bar positioning ...............................................................................447
Figure 380 Apply silicone grease on O-ring before MPT-HC/HC-
HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM installation ............................................................448
Figure 381 MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM installation on OMT (11 to 23
GHz) ........................................................................................................448
Figure 382 Angular fine tuning mechanism adjustment (6 to 11 GHz) ......................450
Figure 383 Angular fine tuning mechanism adjustment (11 to 23 GHz) ....................450
Figure 384 View of MPT-HC 2+0 XPIC integrated antenna after installation (11-
38 GHz) ...................................................................................................451
Figure 385 25 GHz polarization adjustment ..............................................................451
Figure 386 38 GHz polarization adjustment ..............................................................452
Figure 387 Load for unused port installation ............................................................455
Figure 388 MPT ODU O-RING gasket shapes - cross-section .................................456
Figure 389 Round MPT ODU O-RING gasket...........................................................457
Figure 390 Spine MPT ODU O-RING gasket (black) ................................................457

30 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

Figure 391 Spine MPT ODU O-RING gasket (red/black) ..........................................458


Figure 392 Example of MPT ODU O-RING gasket installed on ODU .......................459
Figure 393 Round MPT ODU O-RING gasket installed.............................................461
Figure 394 Spine MPT ODU O-RING gasket installed ..............................................462
Figure 395 MPT ODU transceiver and external diplexer boxes coupling
surfaces ...................................................................................................463
Figure 396 MPT-HC/XP external module installation - cover removal ......................464
Figure 397 MPT-HC/XP: external module installation - cover removed ....................465
Figure 398 MPT-HC/XP: RPS module installation - cap removal..............................465
Figure 399 MPT-HC/XP: XPIC + RPS module installation - cap removal .................466
Figure 400 MPT-HC/XP: correct screw position ........................................................467
Figure 401 MPT-HC/XP: external module installed ...................................................467
Figure 402 Embedded diplexer polarization detail, example showing MPT-HC........469
Figure 403 MPT ODU with external diplexer polarization detail ................................470
Figure 404 Coupler polarization change 6-11 GHz (solution A) ................................472
Figure 405 Coupler polarization change 6-11 GHz (solution B) ................................473
Figure 406 Coupler polarization change 6-11 GHz (solution B), continued...............474
Figure 407 Coupler polarization change (11-38 GHz) - 1st step and 2nd step .........475
Figure 408 Coupler polarization change (11-38 GHz) - 1st step execution...............475
Figure 409 Coupler polarization change (11-38 GHz) - 2nd step execution..............476
Figure 410 Coupler polarization change (11-38 GHz) - screw installation ................476
Figure 411 MPT-HC 1+0 installation for integrated antenna (embedded
diplexer)...................................................................................................478
Figure 412 MPT ODU 1+0 installation for integrated antenna (external
diplexer: vertical) .....................................................................................478
Figure 413 MPT ODU 1+0 installation for integrated antenna (external
diplexer: horizontal) .................................................................................479
Figure 414 MPT ODU 1+0 installation for non-integrated antenna (6-38 GHz
with pole mount P/N 3DB 10137 AA) ......................................................479
Figure 415 Installing the RF coupler to the antenna (6-11 GHz) ...............................479
Figure 416 MPT ODUs installed on the RF coupler (11-38 GHz)..............................480
Figure 417 MPT ODUs installed on OMT -C (11-38 GHz) ........................................481
Figure 418 11-38 GHz RF coupler installation (with pole mount
P/N 3DB 10137 AA).................................................................................482
Figure 419 MPT HC/XP/9558HC grounding connector position................................485
Figure 420 MPT HC-HQAM/XP-HQAM grounding connector position......................486
Figure 421 Grounding plate .......................................................................................486
Figure 422 MPT ODU cable connection detail ..........................................................487
Figure 423 Short kit plug R2CT .................................................................................487
Figure 424 Short kit plug R2CT itemized...................................................................488
Figure 425 R2CT mating sequence, steps 1 to 3 ......................................................489
Figure 426 R2CT mating sequence, steps 4 to 6 ......................................................490
Figure 427 R2CT mating sequence, steps 7 to 10 ....................................................491
Figure 428 R2CT mating sequence, steps 11 to 12 ..................................................491
Figure 429 R2CT unmating sequence, steps 1 to 4 ..................................................493
Figure 430 R2CT unmating sequence, steps 5 to 6 ..................................................493
Figure 431 LC/Q-XCO to LC fiber cord......................................................................494
Figure 432 RPS Q-XCO to Q-XCO optical jumper ....................................................495

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 31


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

Figure 433 XPIC connector position (with external XPIC module on MPT-
HC/XP) ....................................................................................................496
Figure 434 XPIC connector position (with embedded XPIC on MPT-HC-
HQAM/XP-HQAM)...................................................................................496
Figure 435 XPIC cable placement for MPT-HC/XP ...................................................497
Figure 436 XPIC cable placement for MPT-HC-HQAMs for 11 to 23 GHz................497
Figure 437 XPIC cable interconnection on MPT-HC/XP and MPT-HC-
HQAM/XP-HQAM for 6 up to 11GHz.......................................................498
Figure 438 XPIC cable interconnection on MPT-HC/XP and MPT-HC-
HQAM/XP-HQAM in case of OMT-C for 6 up to 23GHz .........................499
Figure 439 OMT-C fixing screws ...............................................................................501

23 Route and terminate cables between MSS and MPT


ODU..............................................................................................503
Figure 440 RFE connector for optical data connections............................................526
Figure 441 Direct power to MPT ODU, inside plant detail .........................................527

24 MPT Ethernet/power cable system installation .......................529


Figure 442 Typical tower coaxial/Ethernet cable detail .............................................530

25 MPT ODU electrical Ethernet and power cable system


grounding ....................................................................................537
Figure 443 Typical tower coaxial/electrical Ethernet cable grounding detail .............538
Figure 444 Typical radio coaxial/electrical Ethernet cable grounding outside
building ....................................................................................................538
Figure 445 Radio coaxial/electrical Ethernet cable grounding, surge
suppressor inside building .......................................................................539
Figure 446 Cat5e ground kit ......................................................................................542
Figure 447 Cat5e outer conductor exposed ..............................................................542
Figure 448 Apply NoOx to ground lug and plate........................................................543
Figure 449 Cat5e ground kit assembly #1 .................................................................544
Figure 450 Cat5e ground kit assembly #2 .................................................................545
Figure 451 Cat5e ground kit assembly #3 .................................................................546
Figure 452 Cat5e ground kit assembly #4 .................................................................547
Figure 453 Cat5e ground kit assembled, top view.....................................................548
Figure 454 Cat5e ground kit assembled, side view ...................................................549
Figure 455 Cat5e ground kit, ground bar detail .........................................................550

26 Lightning surge suppressor installation (ANSI market) .........551


Figure 456 Typical tower coaxial cable and lightning surge suppressor
grounding detail .......................................................................................553
Figure 457 Surge suppressor installed inside building ..............................................554
Figure 458 Surge suppressor installed outside building ............................................555

27 Weatherproofing outside cable connections ...........................563


Figure 459 Example of type N connector weatherproofing........................................565
Figure 460 LMR-400 ground kit assembled...............................................................568
Figure 461 LMR-400 ground kit weatherproofed .......................................................569

32 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

Figure 462 Cat5e ground kit assembled, top view.....................................................570


Figure 463 Cat5e ground kit, apply layer of butyl mastic tape as filler ......................571
Figure 464 Cat5e ground kit, apply layer of butyl mastic tape...................................572
Figure 465 Application of three layers of electrical tape ............................................573
Figure 466 Ground kit - tie wraps applied..................................................................573

28 Route and terminate E1 and DS1 signal cables.......................575


Figure 467 Cable 8xE1 IDU-distributor......................................................................576
Figure 468 RJ45 E1 to wire-wrap cable.....................................................................577
Figure 469 2xE1 cord ................................................................................................578
Figure 470 RJ-45 patch panel detail..........................................................................586
Figure 471 DS1 37 pin DSUB customer interconnect detail......................................588
Figure 472 P32E1DS1 68 pin SCSI connector front panel view................................590
Figure 473 MSS-1 shelf 68 pin SCSI connector front panel view..............................591

29 Route and terminate DS3 signal cables ...................................595


Figure 474 P2DS3E front panel connector interconnect detail..................................597
Figure 475 DS3 hybrid splitter interconnect detail .....................................................599

30 Route and terminate Ethernet signal cables ............................601


Figure 476 2xE1 SFP and EoSDH SFP on Ports #5 and #6 of the Core unit in
protected mode with splitter.....................................................................605
Figure 477 Core-E customer interconnect detail .......................................................610
Figure 478 CorEvo customer interconnect detail ......................................................610
Figure 479 MSS-1 shelf customer interconnect detail ...............................................610
Figure 480 MSS-O customer interconnect detail.......................................................611
Figure 481 EAS customer interconnect detail (P8ETH shown) .................................616
Figure 482 MPT-HL transceiver interconnect detail .................................................619

31 Route and Terminate STM-1/OC3 Signal Cables .....................621


Figure 483 SDHACC units.........................................................................................622
Figure 484 SDHACC Front Panel Connector Interconnect Detail .............................624

32 Route and terminate sync signal cables ..................................627


Figure 485 Core-E card sync in and out interconnect detail......................................629
Figure 486 CorEvo card interconnect detail ..............................................................630
Figure 487 Sync connection in stacked MSS-8 configuration with Core-E
protection.................................................................................................631

33 Route and terminate AUX card cables......................................633


Figure 488 DTE-DCE Interface..................................................................................636
Figure 489 Alarm Polarity ..........................................................................................638
Figure 490 Polarity of the alarm.................................................................................639
Figure 491 AUX card interconnect detail ...................................................................643

34 Route and terminate MSS-8 shelf Enhanced Fan and


MSS-1 shelf housekeeping alarm cable ...................................645
Figure 492 FAN housekeeping alarm and control customer interconnect detail .......653

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 33


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

Figure 493 MSS-1 Shelf housekeeping alarm and control customer


interconnect detail ...................................................................................653

36 Install standoffs and secure cables with cable ties ................659


Figure 494 Example cable secured to standoff .........................................................660
Figure 495 MSS-4/MSS-8 shelf left side cable routing ..............................................661
Figure 496 MSS-4/MSS-8 shelf right side cable routing............................................661

38 Antenna alignment .....................................................................665


Figure 497 MPT/AWY service cable..........................................................................668
Figure 498 PRx port on the MPT-HLS.......................................................................669
Figure 499 RSL port on the MPT-HLC .....................................................................669
Figure 500 MPT-HLS/HLC RSSI voltage cable for RSSI voltage reading.................670
Figure 501 Indicative head-on signal pattern for a parabolic antenna.......................672
Figure 502 Example tracking path signals.................................................................673
Figure 503 Example tracking path signals on the first side lobe................................673
Figure 504 XPD measurement ..................................................................................675
Figure 505 Example of antenna feedhead assembly ................................................676

39 Expand an MPT-HLS system (ETSI market) .............................681


Figure 506 Remove RX branching cover...................................................................683
Figure 507 Systems with one or two back panels mounted ......................................683
Figure 508 Yellow protection caps.............................................................................684
Figure 509 Mount the back plane on the support bar ................................................685
Figure 510 Cables inside the rack .............................................................................685
Figure 511 RT subrack with dummy plates ...............................................................686
Figure 512 Front dummy plate removal.....................................................................687
Figure 513 Top dummy plate removal .......................................................................687
Figure 514 Septum plate to be removed ...................................................................688
Figure 515 Bottom support guide placement.............................................................689
Figure 516 Top support guide placement ..................................................................690
Figure 517 Centering pin placement on back panel ..................................................690
Figure 518 Protection cap removal............................................................................691
Figure 519 Remount the septum plate ......................................................................692
Figure 520 RT sub-rack before and after new slot enabled.......................................692
Figure 521 Detail of a branching section in a system ready for expansion ...............694
Figure 522 Detail of a branching section in a system not ready for expansion .........695
Figure 523 Detail of a branching section in a system not ready for expansion -
4 GHz ......................................................................................................695
Figure 524 TX and RX branching sections in a system ready for expansion ............697
Figure 525 Remove the metallic plate .......................................................................698
Figure 526 Repeat on the next circulator...................................................................698
Figure 527 Example of a system branching (TX, RX and RX diversity)
expanded to five channels.......................................................................699
Figure 528 Remove the circulator termination - 4 GHz .............................................700
Figure 529 Connect the new circulator - 4 GHz.........................................................701
Figure 530 Tx circulator and branching filter assembly - 4 GHz................................701
Figure 531 Tx circulator and branching filter assembly - 4 GHz................................701
Figure 532 Remove the circulator termination - 6 to 13 GHz ....................................702

34 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

Figure 533 Assemble the new expansion circulator - 6 to 13 GHz............................702


Figure 534 Assemble the channel filters - 6 to 13 GHz .............................................703
Figure 535 Mount the second branching support bracket - 6 to 13 GHz ...................704
Figure 536 Four channels Tx heteropolar branching.................................................705
Figure 537 Remove the fourth circulator terminations...............................................705
Figure 538 Left circulator ...........................................................................................706
Figure 539 Right circulator.........................................................................................706
Figure 540 Remove the antenna cable input connector ............................................707
Figure 541 Connect the new circulator - 4 GHz.........................................................708
Figure 542 Rx Circulator and Branching filter assembling description ......................709
Figure 543 Final branching expansion representation...............................................709
Figure 544 Replacement of channel cable ................................................................710
Figure 545 Rx branching with two and three channels..............................................711
Figure 546 Screws to be removed.............................................................................711
Figure 547 Expansion of RX and RX div branching from two to three
channels in an homopolar system ...........................................................712
Figure 548 Fifth channel expansion...........................................................................713
Figure 549 Change of position of the bracket fixation points.....................................713
Figure 550 Remove the existing waveguide stub ......................................................714
Figure 551 S-shaped waveguide ...............................................................................714
Figure 552 Assemble the new Rx (Rx div) channel filters .........................................715

44 Core switching module (Core-E or CorEvo) flash card


replacement.................................................................................739
Figure 553 Core-E flash card.....................................................................................740
Figure 554 CorEvo flash card ....................................................................................741

47 MSS-4/8 shelf FAN component replacement ...........................767


Figure 555 FAN 1U - Unscrew components ..............................................................769
Figure 556 FAN 1U - remove FAN components........................................................770
Figure 557 FAN 1U - replace FAN components ........................................................770
Figure 558 FAN 2U - Unscrew the FAN module cover..............................................772
Figure 559 FAN 2U - Remove FAN module cover ....................................................772
Figure 560 FAN 2U - Remove FAN 2U components.................................................773
Figure 561 FAN 2U - Replace and reconnect FAN 2U components .........................773
Figure 562 FAN Evo - Unscrew cover .......................................................................775
Figure 563 FAN Evo - Remove cover........................................................................775
Figure 564 FAN Evo - Disconnect and remove components.....................................776
Figure 565 FAN Evo - Position and connect components .........................................776

53 MPT ODU replacement (MPT-MC, MPT-HC, MPT-XP,


9558HC) .......................................................................................803
Figure 566 Correct protected mounting of 6 GHz MPT-xC with internal and
external diplexers ....................................................................................806

54 MPT-HC upgrade or replacement to MPT-HC-HQAM ..............811


Figure 567 Web interface: MPT/EAS Conversion option...........................................816
Figure 568 Web interface: choosing the main MPT-HC for conversion.....................817

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 35


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

Figure 569 Web interface: choosing the spare MPT-HC for conversion ...................817
Figure 570 Web interface 1+0 conversion .................................................................818
Figure 571 Physical replacement and log in prompt..................................................819
Figure 572 MPT-HC in compatibility mode ................................................................821

55 P8ETH upgrade to EASv2 and MPT-HL upgrade to


MPT-HLC......................................................................................823
Figure 573 Web interface: MPT/EAS Conversion option...........................................829
Figure 574 Web interface: choosing the P8ETH for conversion................................829
Figure 575 Web interface: choosing the MPT-HL for conversion ..............................833
Figure 576 Web interface: choosing the both P8ETH and MPT-HL for
conversion ..............................................................................................837

56 Core-E to CorEvo Upgrade Procedure .....................................839


Figure 577 Core-E to CorEvo Upgrade page ............................................................842
Figure 578 Download Upgrade File ...........................................................................843
Figure 579 Procedure completed ..............................................................................843
Figure 580 JUSM view...............................................................................................844
Figure 581 CorEvo upgrade in WebCT ....................................................................845
Figure 582 CorEvo upgrade in WebCT ....................................................................847

59 +24/-48 volt converter replacement...........................................857


Figure 583 +24/-48 Volt converter cabling diagram...................................................859

67 Clean fiber-optic connectors .....................................................889


Figure 584 Fiber-optic connector inspection..............................................................892
Figure 585 Fiber-optic connector types, illustrations .................................................893
Figure 586 Fiber-optic connector types, photographs ...............................................893

36 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

List of tables
Preface ........................................................................................................41
Table 1 9500 MPR documentation .......................................................................41
Table 2 9500 MPR related documentation ...........................................................44
Table 3 Naming conventions ................................................................................46

1 About this document....................................................................49


Table 4 Reason for reissue ..................................................................................49

3 High-level procedure to install a 9500 MPR system ..................69


Table 5 Procedures to install a 9500 MPR system in split-mount
configuration .............................................................................................71
Table 6 Procedures to install a 9500 MPR system in MPR-e configuration ..........73
Table 7 Procedures to install a 9500 MPR system with MPT-HLS ......................74
Table 8 Procedures to install a 9500 MPR system with MPT-HL/HLC .................76

8 TRU installation (ETSI market) ..................................................117


Table 9 Recommended breaker/fuse values (A) .................................................119

10 Hardware installation for the MPR-e solution ..........................137


Table 10 T1 external interface pinout detail ..........................................................159
Table 11 T1 external interface pinout detail ..........................................................160

14 Power interfaces installation .....................................................193


Table 12 AC Power Converter features .................................................................195
Table 13 AC Power Converter O-Ring Pigtail Cable features ...............................196
Table 14 AC Power Converter O-Ring Pigtail Cable features ...............................197

15 Install MPT-HLS standard in an ETSI rack (ETSI market) .......203


Table 15 Rack positions .......................................................................................222
Table 16 SCSI port to port connections ................................................................225
Table 17 9500 MPR long haul subrack positions .................................................227
Table 18 RF coaxial cable list ................................................................................235
Table 19 Electrical cables .....................................................................................238
Table 20 Optical cables ........................................................................................239
Table 21 SFPs ......................................................................................................240
Table 22 XPIC cables ...........................................................................................246

16 Install MPT-HLS standard in an LSY rack (ETSI market) ........249


Table 23 TRU breaker utilization in 9600 LSY .....................................................258
Table 24 Breakers for TRU ..................................................................................259
Table 25 Supply cords for system upgrading ......................................................261
Table 26 RF cables reference table for MPT-HLS transceivers in an LSY
rack ........................................................................................................274

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 37


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

17 Install MPT-HLS standard in an LSY-LHRC sub-shelf


(ETSI market)...............................................................................281
Table 27 RU type and 2A breaker ........................................................................285

18 Install MPT-HLS compact in a 21” ETSI or 19” rack ................297


Table 28 Customer supplied 19” rack - required units .........................................297
Table 29 MPT-HLS compact breaker values (19” rack - customer
supplied) ................................................................................................300
Table 30 Antenna flanges for MPT-HLS compact ................................................301
Table 31 Branching drawer 19” rack position ......................................................344
Table 32 Power cord routing and grounding ........................................................347

19 Route and terminate power cables ...........................................353


Table 33 MPT Extended Power Unit configurations .............................................357
Table 34 MSS-1/MSS-4/MSS-8 shelf PDU power cable termination details .........368
Table 35 MPT-HL/MPT-HLC transceiver to PDU power cable termination
details .....................................................................................................371

21 Demarcation panel/DDF installation .........................................379


Table 36 SCSI 68 pins FW cable colors ................................................................382
Table 37 SUB D 37 pin - FW cable .......................................................................385

22 MPT ODU installation .................................................................393


Table 38 MPT ODU label details ...........................................................................396
Table 39 Label affixed inside the MPT ODU external diplexer box .......................397
Table 40 MPT ODU output flanges with external antenna ....................................482
Table 41 6-38 GHz Flextwist waveguide ...............................................................483

23 Route and terminate cables between MSS and MPT


ODU..............................................................................................503
Table 42 Components required for MPT ODU connection to MSS .....................512

28 Route and terminate E1 and DS1 signal cables.......................575


Table 43 Cable 8xE1 IDU-DISTRIBUTOR 75 ohm coax Free L = 15m (37
pin) ..........................................................................................................576
Table 44 RJ45 E1 to wire-wrap cable ....................................................................577
Table 45 2 x E1 cord (RJ45 plug to free wire) .......................................................578
Table 46 Pin Function: Tributaries 1-16 (MSS-1 and 32DS1E1 PDH card) ..........578
Table 47 Pin Function: Tributaries 17-32 (32E1 PDH card) ..................................580
Table 48 DS1 RJ-45 patch panel cable pinout TIA/EIA T568B compliant /
3MU00085AA-AM ..................................................................................584
Table 49 DS1 RJ-45 patch panel cable pinout TIA/EIA T568A compliant ............585
Table 50 DS1 RJ-45 patch panel cable pinout for 3EM15052AA-BD Cat5e ........586
Table 51 37 pin D-sub pinout ................................................................................588
Table 52 68 pin SCSI cable output (XMT) pinout ..................................................592
Table 53 68 pin SCSI cable input (RCV) pinout ....................................................593

38 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

30 Route and terminate Ethernet signal cables ............................601


Table 54 2xE1 SFP pin functions ..........................................................................606
Table 55 10/100 BaseT Ethernet RJ-45 cable pinout TIA/EIA T568B
compliant / 3MU00085AA-AM ...............................................................608
Table 56 10/100 BaseT Ethernet RJ-45 cable pinout TIA/EIA T568A
compliant ...............................................................................................608
Table 57 1000 BaseT Ethernet RJ-45 cable pinout TIA/EIA T568B
compliant / 3MU00085AA-AM ...............................................................609
Table 58 1000 BaseT Ethernet RJ-45 cable pinout TIA/EIA T568A
compliant ...............................................................................................609
Table 59 10/100 BaseT Ethernet RJ-45 cable pinout for 3EM15052AA-BD
Cat5e .....................................................................................................612
Table 60 1000 BaseT Ethernet RJ-45 cable pinout for 3EM15052AA-BD
Cat5e ......................................................................................................612

33 Route and terminate AUX card cables......................................633


Table 61 Service channel 1 pin functions ..............................................................634
Table 62 Service channel 2 pin functions ..............................................................635
Table 63 Housekeeping connector pin function ....................................................637
Table 64 AUX card housekeeping alarm connector detail ....................................640
Table 65 Wiring connections for housekeeping alarm cable (3CC52200AA) ........641

34 Route and terminate MSS-8 shelf Enhanced Fan and


MSS-1 shelf housekeeping alarm cable ...................................645
Table 66 Enhanced Fan Housekeeping pin-out details (w/cables
3CC52216AA and 3CC52216AB) ...........................................................646
Table 67 Enhanced Fan Housekeeping input alarm behavior ...............................647
Table 68 MSS-1 Housekeeping pin-out details .....................................................648
Table 69 MSS-1 Housekeeping input alarm behavior ...........................................649
Table 70 Wiring connections for housekeeping alarm cable (3CC52201AA) ........650
Table 71 Enhanced Fan card and MSS-1 shelf housekeeping alarm and
control connector/cable detail .................................................................651

35 Route and terminate MPT Power Unit Housekeeping


Alarm cable .................................................................................655
Table 72 MPT Power Unit electrical connections of housekeeping
interfaces ................................................................................................656
Table 73 Extended power bar electrical connections of housekeeping
interfaces ................................................................................................657

37 Assemble a cable to connect to a Core card ...........................663


Table 74 NMS cable pinout ...................................................................................664

38 Antenna alignment .....................................................................665


Table 75 Typical RSSI voltage levels with RSL for MPT-HC/HC-
HQAM/MC/XP/XP-HQAM .......................................................................667
Table 76 Typical RSSI voltage levels with RSL for MPT-HLS/HLC .....................670
Table 77 Wiring table for PRx cable ......................................................................670

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 39


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

39 Expand an MPT-HLS system (ETSI market) .............................681


Table 78 LSY system upgrading - frequency list for branching expansion ..........693
Table 79 Torque forces for screws used in the branching sections ....................696

40 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Preface

Preface

9500 MPR documentation


Table 1 describes the 9500 MPR documentation. See the current Release Notice for
part numbers.

Table 1 9500 MPR documentation

Document Description

9500 MPR Product Provides a general description of the 9500 MPR product,
Information Manual solutions available, associated components, applications,
and some Engineering specifications
This guide replaces the following from previous releases:
• ANSI Product Information
• Product Information and Planning chapters from the
ETSI MSS-1/4/8 User Manual and the MPR-e and
MSS-1c User Manual
9500 MPR Provides detailed procedures for the initial installation of the
Hardware radio and for replacement of hardware components
Installation and This guide replaces the following from previous releases:
Replacement
• ANSI Installation Practices
Manual
• Hardware sections of the Installation chapters from
the ETSI MSS-O/1/4/8 User Manual and the MPR-e
and MSS-1c User Manual
• Hardware replacement procedures from ANSI
Maintenance and Trouble Clearing
9500 MPR Provides detailed procedures for the initial installation of the
Software 9500 MPR software, software upgrade to the current
Installation and NE release, and software rollback to a previous release
Upgrade Manual This guide replaces the following from previous releases:
• ANSI Software Installation and Upgrade
• Software sections of the Installation chapters from
the ETSI MSS-O/1/4/8 User Manual and the MPR-e
and MSS-1c User Manual

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 41


Preface Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

Table 1 9500 MPR documentation (Continued)

Document Description

9500 MPR WebCT Provides procedures for performing system operations


User Manual using the WebCT interface, including monitoring and
maintenance activities. This guide describes, along with the
WebEML User Guide, how to provision, operate, and
monitor a shelf with a CorEvo card.
9500 MPR Provides procedures for performing system operations
WebEML User using the WebEML interface, including: provisioning,
Manual performance monitoring, protection switching, and
administration activities. This guide describes how to
provision, operate, and monitor a radio in a split-mount
configuration.
This guide replaces the following from previous releases:
• ANSI Operation and Administration
• NE Management by Software Application chapter
from the ETSI MSS-O/1/4/8 User Manual
• Provisioning chapter from the ETSI MSS-1/4/8 User
Manual
9500 MPR MCT Provides procedures for performing system operations
User Manual using the MCT interface, including: provisioning,
performance monitoring, protection switching, and
administration activities. This guide describes how to
provision, operate, and monitor a radio in MPR-e or MSS-1c
configuration.
This guide replaces the following from previous releases:
• NE Management by Software Application chapter
from the MPR-e and MSS-1c User Manual
• Provisioning chapter from the MPR-e and MSS-1c
User Manual
• Maintenance and Trouble Clearing chapter from the
MPR-e and MSS-1c User Manual
9500 MPR Craft Provides procedures for performing system operations
Terminal User using the MCT interface, including: provisioning,
Manual for Single performance monitoring, protection switching, and
NE Mode with administration activities. This guide describes how to
7705 SAR provision, operate, and monitor a radio in Single NE mode
with 7705 SAR.

42 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Preface

Table 1 9500 MPR documentation (Continued)

Document Description

9500 MPR Turn-up Provides procedures for system installation verification,


Manual provisioning, turn-up, and acceptance testing. The guide is
to be used only during initial system turn-up. It is not
intended to be used after equipment has been formally
accepted (that is, for maintenance, system growth, system
upgrade, or provisioning activities).
This guide replaces the following from previous releases:
• ANSI Turn-up
• Lineup and Commissioning chapters from the ETSI
MSS-O/1/4/8 User Manual and the MPR-e and
MSS-1c User Manual
9500 MPR Alarm Provides procedures related to the maintenance of the radio
Clearing User including how to clear alarms and abnormal conditions. This
Manual guide is intended to be used after the equipment has been
installed and tested by the installation and test teams
This guide replaces the following from previous releases:
• ANSI Maintenance and Trouble Clearing
• Maintenance and Trouble Clearing chapter from the
ETSI MSS-O/1/4/8 User Manual
9500 MPR Secure Provides procedures for securing hardware components
Mode User Manual and software in order that the security certification operation
mode can be used on the 9500 MPR.
Note: Only available to customers who have purchased the
Secure Mode feature.

Related documentation
Table 2 describes the 9500 MPR related documentation. See the Release Notice for
part numbers.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 43


Preface Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

Table 2 9500 MPR related documentation

Guide Description

9500 MPR-A Provides engineering drawings for the 9500 MPR-A


Engineering
Support
Documentation
9500 MPR Test Provides space to record measurements, capture screen
Results Data Sheet shots, capture photos, and record other information. TRDS
tabs serve as records of completion of indicated steps in a
Turn-up procedure. Not all procedures require entries in the
TRDS.
9500 MPR Provides information about using the configuration file.
Configuration File
Management
Manual
9500 MPR Provides part number and tuning information for MPT-MC,
Frequency Plan for HC, XP, HC-HQAM and XP-HQAM radios, for modules and
MPT Outdoor for external diplexers.
Transceivers
9500 MPR Provides technical specifications for MPT Outdoor
Technical transceivers, including general specifications such as
Specifications for dimensions, and radio specifications such as system gain or
Split Mount throughput, and transmit power specifications.
Applications
9500 MPR Provides technical specifications for MPT-HLC and HLS.
Technical
Specifications for
Full Indoor
Applications
9500 MPR TMN Describes TMN networking in the 9500 MPR.
Networking Guide
9500 MPR Cross- Provides information about supported cross-connections.
connections
Reference Tables

44 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Preface

Naming conventions in the documentation


The generic terms described in Table 3 are used when the topic applies to all of the
related items listed. If the topic is specific to one or a subset of the items listed, the
specific names will be stated in the guide.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 45


Preface Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

Table 3 Naming conventions

Term Refers to

MPT-HC Always refers to MPT-HC V2


MPT ODU Refers to all of the following:
• MPT-HC
• MPT-XP
• 9558HC*
• MPT-MC
• MPT-HC-HQAM
• MPT-XP-HQAM
*The 9558HC is an MPT-HC using the
5.8 GHz unlicensed band, for the ANSI
market
MPT-HLS Refers to both:
• MPT-HLS standard,
• MPT-HLS compact
MSS Refers to all of the following:
• MSS-1
• MSS-4
• MSS-8
• MSS-O
Note that the term MSS does not include
the MSS-1c.
EAS Refers to both:
• P8ETH card
• EASv2 card
Core Refers to all of the following:
• Core-E card
• CorEvo card
• MSS/CORE ports of MSS-O and
MSS-1
CorEvo Refers to both:
• CorEvo-1G card
• CorEvo-10G card

46 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Preface

Table 3 Naming conventions (Continued)

Term Refers to

PDH Refers to all of the following:


• E1
• DS1
• DS3
SDH Refers to both:
• STM-1
• OC-3

Audience
This guide is intended for network installers and system administrators who are
responsible for installing, configuring, or maintaining networks. This guide assumes
you are familiar with electronic and networking technologies.

Information symbols
Observe the warnings and notes to avoid injury or equipment damage during
installation and maintenance. Follow the safety procedures and guidelines when
working with and near electrical equipment. Warning statements and notes are
provided in each chapter.

The following symbols are contained in the 9500 MPR documentation.

Danger: indicates that the described activity or situation may result in serious
personal injury or death; for example, high voltage or electric shock hazards.

Warning: indicates that the described activity or situation may, or will, cause
equipment damage or serious performance problems.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 47


Preface Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

Caution: indicates that the described activity or situation may, or will, cause
service interruption.

Note: provides information that is, or may be, of special interest.

Contact information

Technical support
If you purchased a service agreement for your 9500 MPR and related products from
a distributor or authorized reseller, contact the technical support staff for that
distributor or reseller for assistance. If you purchased an Nokia service agreement,
check this link for instructions to contact Support personnel:

Web: http://support.alcatel-lucent.com

48 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual About this document

1 About this document

1.1 Purpose
This guide detailed procedures for the initial installation and for replacement of
hardware components for the 9500 MPR product.

1.2 What’s new


The following has changed in this release:

Table 4 Reason for reissue

Impact Location

A second kit (3DB80896AAAA) Chapter - 16.4.2.2 Preparation of the MPT-HLS


added, dedicated to the LHRC transceiver and insertion into the sub-shelf
upgrading.

New chapter for installing MPT- Chapter 17 - Install MPT-HLS standard in an LSY-
HLS standard in an LSY-LHRC LHRC sub-shelf (ETSI market)
sub-shelf (ETSI market)

Updates on OMT, OMT-C Chapter 22 - MPT ODU installation


• Types of RF couplers, OMT and OMT-C
− Section is renamed.
− Figure 336 and Figure 337 are updated.
• To install a 2x(1+0) XPIC MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/
XP/XP-HQAM configuration using OMT
− 25 GHz OMT renamed to 11 and 25 GHz V-
shape.
− Note added for OMT V-shape

Update procedure for check XPD Chapter 38 - Antenna alignment


performance. • Alignment procedure for dual polarized antenna
− Step 4 is updated.

Low pass filter is optional Throughout the document.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 49


About this document Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

1.3 Intended audience


This document is intended for technicians who are responsible for the installation and
replacement of 9500 MPR components.

1.4 Safety information


For your safety, this document contains safety statements. Safety statements are
given at points where risks of damage to personnel, equipment, and operation may
exist. Failure to follow the directions in a safety statement may result in serious
consequences.

50 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Safety awareness

2 Safety awareness

2.1 Safety EMC-EMF-ESD norms and equipment


labeling
This section describes the equipment labeling and the norms mandatory or
suggested that must be considered to avoid injuries on persons and/or damage to
the equipment.

• Safety rules
• Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC norms)
• Equipment protection against electrostatic discharges
• Cautions to avoid equipment damage

2.2 Safety rules

2.2.1 General rules


Before you perform any installation, turn-on, tests or operation and maintenance
operations, carefully read the related sections of this manual, specifically:

• Hardware Installation
• Commissioning
• Maintenance and Upgrade

2.2.1.1 Observe safety rules

When equipment is operating, do not access the inside of the equipment parts which
are protected with Cover Plate Shields removable with tools.

If access is required to the equipment parts when it is operating, only service


personnel, where service personnel or technical assistance is meant:

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 51


Safety awareness Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

• “personnel which has adequate technical knowledge and experience necessary


to be aware of the danger that may occur when performing an operation and of
the necessary measurements to reduce the danger to a minimum for
themselves and for others”.
• The service personnel can only replace the faulty units with spare parts.
• The service personnel is not allowed to repair, and therefore, the access to the
parts that are not specified is not permitted.
• The keys and/or the tools used to open doors, hinged covers to remove parts
which provide access to compartments in which are present high dangerous
voltages must belong exclusively to the service personnel.

For the cleaning of the external parts of the equipment, do not use any inflammable
substance or substances which in some way may alter the markings, inscriptions, or
other labels.

It is recommended to use a slightly wet cleaning cloth.

The Safety Rules stated in the handbook describe the operations and/or precautions
to observe to safeguard service personnel during the working phases and to
guarantee equipment safety; for example, do not expose persons, animals, things to
the risk of being injured/damaged.

When the safety protection features have been impaired, REMOVE POWER.

To cut off power, switch off the power supply units and cut off the power station
upstream (rack or station distribution frame).

The safety rules described in this handbook are distinguished by the following
symbol and statement:

2.3 Labels indicating Danger, Forbidding,


Command
Follow the instructions printed on the labels affixed to the units and assemblies.

• Dangerous electrical voltages


• Risks of explosions
• Moving mechanical parts
• Equipment connection to earth
• Heat-radiating mechanical parts
• Microwave radiations (EMF norms)

52 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Safety awareness

• Harmful optical signals

Pay attention to the information stated in the following, and proceed as instructed.

The symbols presented in following paragraphs are all the possible symbols that
could be present on Nokia equipment, but are not all necessarily present on the
equipment this handbook refers to.

2.3.1 Dangerous electrical voltages

2.3.1.1 Labeling:

The warning label in Figure 1 is affixed next to dangerous voltages (>42.4 Vp; >60
Vdc).

Figure 1 Dangerous voltage

If it is a Class 1 equipment connected to mains, then the label in Figure 2 states that
the equipment must be grounded before you connect it to the power supply voltage;
for example:

Figure 2 Ground protection warning

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 53


Safety awareness Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

2.3.1.2 Safety instructions:

Danger:

Carefully observe the specific procedures for installation / turn-up and commissioning /
maintenance of equipment parts where D.C. power is present, described in the relevant
installation / turn-up and commissioning / maintenance documents and the following
general rules:

•Personal injury can be caused by -48VDC. Avoid touching powered terminals with any
exposed part of your body.
•Short circuiting, low-voltage, low-impedance, DC circuits can cause severe arcing that can
result in burns and/or eye damage. Remove rings, watches, and other metal jewelry before
working with primary circuits. Exercise caution to avoid shorting power input terminals.

2.3.2 Risks of explosions

2.3.2.1 Labeling:

This risk is present when batteries are used, and it is signaled by the label in Figure 3:

Figure 3 Risk of explosion

2.3.2.2 Safety instructions:

Therefore, slits or apertures are made to let air circulate freely and allow dangerous
gases to down flow (battery-emitted hydrogen). A 417-IEC-5641 Norm. compliant
label, as shown in Figure 4, is affixed next to it indicating that the openings must not
be covered up.

54 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Safety awareness

Figure 4 Openings must be covered

2.3.3 Moving mechanical parts

2.3.3.1 Labeling:

The warning label in Figure 5 is affixed next to fans or other moving mechanical
parts:

Figure 5 Moving mechanical parts

2.3.3.2 Safety instructions:

Before carrying out any maintenance operation see that all the moving mechanical
parts have been stopped.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 55


Safety awareness Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

2.3.4 Equipment connection to earth

2.3.4.1 Labeling:

Terminals for equipment connection to earth, to be done according to international


safety standards, are pointed out by the symbol in Figure 6.

Figure 6 Equipment connection to earth

2.3.4.2 Safety instructions:

The position of earth connection terminals is specified in the Hardware Installation


section.

2.3.5 Heat-radiating mechanical parts

2.3.5.1 Labeling:

The presence of heat-radiating mechanical parts is indicated by the warning label in


Figure 7 in compliance with IEC 417 Norm, Fig.5041:

Figure 7 Heat-radiating mechanical parts

56 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Safety awareness

2.3.5.2 Safety instructions:

Carefully observe the specific procedures for installation / turn-up and


commissioning / maintenance of equipment parts where heat-radiating mechanical
parts are present, described in the relevant installation / turn-up and commissioning
/ maintenance documents and the following general rule:

Personal injury can be caused by heat. Avoid touching powered terminals with any
exposed part of your body.

2.3.6 Microwave radiations (EMF norms)


Equipment emitting RF power (Reminder from site preparation procedure):

The site must be compliant with ICNIRP guidelines or local regulation if more
restrictive.

2.3.6.1 Safety instructions:

The following rules should be strictly applied by the customer:

• Non authorized persons should not enter the compliance boundaries, if any, for
the general public.
• Compliance RF boundaries, if any, related to Electro Magnetic Field exposure
must be marked.
• Workers should be allowed to switch-off the power if they have to operate inside
compliance boundaries.
• Assure good cable connection.
• Install the antenna as high as possible from floor or area with public access (if
possible the cylinder delimitating the compliance boundaries, if any, or the
cylinder corresponding to the transmission area directly in front of antenna with
the same diameter as the antenna, more than 2 meters high).
• Install the antenna as far as possible from other existing equipment emitting RF
power.

Remind persons standing in front of the 9500 MPR antenna may cause traffic
shutdown.

Place the warning sticker, as shown in Figure 8, as follows:

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 57


Safety awareness Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

Figure 8 EMF emission warning

• On the site when applicable (when people can cross the compliance boundaries
and/or the transmission area of the antenna; for example, roof top installation):
Warning label “Do not stand on the antenna axis”
• On the mast (front side): EMF emission warning sign (yellow and black) to be
placed at bottom of antenna, visible by someone moving in front of the antenna
(roof top installation)
• On the antenna (rear side): EMF emission warning sign, placed on the antenna

Figure 9 Compliance boundaries for 9500 MPR-A transceivers with 1ft (30
cm) antenna

2.4 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC norms)


The equipment's EMC norms depend on the type of installation being carried out,
such as cable termination or grounding and on the operating conditions (such as
equipment, setting options of the electrical/electronic units, presence of dummy
covers).

Before you perform any installation, turn-on, tests & operation, and maintenance
operations, carefully read the related sections of this manual.

58 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Safety awareness

The norms set down to guarantee EMC compatibility, are distinguished inside this
manual by the symbol and term:

Figure 10 EMC norms

1. EMC general norms - installation


− All connections (towards the external source of the equipment) made with
shielded cables use only cables and connectors suggested in this manual
or in the relevant Plant Documentation, or those specified in the Customer's
“Installation Norms” (or similar documents)
− Shielded cables must be suitably terminated
− Install filters outside the equipment as required
− Ground connect the equipment utilizing a conductor with proper diameter
and impedance
− Mount shields (if utilized), previously positioned during the installation
phase, but not before having cleaned and degrease it.
− Before you insert the shielded unit proceed to clean and degrease all
peripheral surfaces (such as contact springs and connection points).
− Screw fasten the units to the subrack.
− To correctly install EMC compatible equipment follow the instructions given.
2. EMC general norms - turn-on, tests & operation
− Preset the electrical units as required to guarantee EMC compatibility
− Check that the equipment is operating with all the shields properly
positioned (such as dummy covers and ESD connector protections).
− To properly use EMC compatible equipment, follow the provided
information.
3. EMC general norms - maintenance
− Before you insert the shielded unit, which replaces the faulty or modified
unit, clean and degrease all peripheral surfaces (such as contact springs
and connection points).
− Clean the dummy covers of the spare units.
− Screw fasten the units to the subrack.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 59


Safety awareness Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

2.4.1 Cables:
The following safety requirements apply to the cable connections for intra-building
ports:

• To comply with the GR-1089-CORE requirements for electromagnetic


compatibility and safety, all intra-building ports are specified for use with
shielded and grounded at both ends.
• The intra-building ports of the equipment or sub-assembly are suitable for
connection to intra-building or unexposed wiring or cabling only. The
intra-building ports of the equipment or sub-assembly must not be metallically
connected to interfaces that connect to the OSP or its wiring. These interfaces
are designed for use as intra-building interfaces only (Type 2 ports as described
in GR-1089-CORE) and require isolation from the exposed OSP cabling. The
addition of primary protectors is not sufficient protection in order to connect
these interfaces metallically to OSP wiring.

Warning: 9500 MPR equipment must be connected to surge suppressors that meet the
power surge requirements of GR-1089-CORE. Non-compliant surge suppressors may not
have the required secondary surge protection or current limiting function during specific,
valid operating states. Connecting 9500 MPR equipment to non-compliant surge
suppressors could result in damage to 9500 MPR equipment.

2.5 Equipment protection against electrostatic


discharges
Before you remove the ESD protections from the monitors, connectors, or other
equipment, observe the stated precautionary measures. Ensure that the ESD
protections have been replaced and after terminating the maintenance and
monitoring operations.

Most electronic devices are sensitive to electrostatic discharges, therefore, the


warning labels in Figure 11 have been affixed,

60 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Safety awareness

Figure 11 Electrostatic sensitive

Observe the stated precautionary measures when touching the electronic parts
during the installation/maintenance phases.

Workers are supplied with anti-static protection devices consisting of an elasticized


band worn around the wrist and a coiled cord connected to the elasticized band and
to the stud on the subrack. See Figure 13.

2.6 Cautions to avoid equipment damage

2.6.1 Electrostatic-sensitivity
An Electrostatic-Sensitive Device (ESD) can withstand voltage spikes of only 10 to
100 volts and can be damaged or effectively destroyed by a discharge that might go
unnoticed by a technician. Some devices have built-in protection. However, because
this protection is effective only against the lower levels of electrostatic charges, a
false sense of security often prevails.

Warning: Common plastic, white foam, cellophane, and masking adhesive tapes must not
come in contact with ESDs or their packaging.

Common plastics (synthetic insulating materials), clothing, and paper or cardboard


are the most common sources of static charges.

Observe special precautions when the ESD sign is displayed. See Figure 12.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 61


Safety awareness Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

Figure 12 Electrostatic-sensitive sign

The following items are examples of ESDs:

• MOS (Metal Oxide Semiconductor) capacitors, transistors, Integrated Circuits


(ICs)
• CMOS (Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor) transistors, ICs
• JFET (Junction Field Effect Transistors)
• IGFET (Insulated Gate Field Effect Transistors)

2.6.1.1 Handling cards

Although the risk of damage to an ESD is reduced considerably after it is assembled


into a circuit designed to protect sensitive components, take the following
precautions to reduce static charges to harmless levels:

• Handle all cards as ESDs unless they are known not to contain
electrostatic-sensitive parts.
• Wear wrist ground strap, connected to grounded coiled cord before and while
touching or handling cards containing ESS devices. See Figure 13 for an
illustration of the wrist strap with cord. The wrist strap (PN 1AD 01247 0001) is
an elasticized band connected to the coiled cord connected to the rack frame
ground.
• Store (even temporarily), pack, and ship cards in antistatic bags or containers.
• Do not handle printed circuit board or components unnecessarily. Use plastic
handle.
• Do not use synthetic bristled brushes or acid brushes to clean cards.
• Handle failed cards with same precautions as good cards.

ESD components are protected when properly packaged in conductive or antistatic


packaging. Acceptable packaging is marked as either conductive or antistatic.

62 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Safety awareness

Figure 13 Electrostatic protection kit

2.6.2 Screw fixing


In normal operation conditions, all screws (such as for unit box closing and cable
fixing) must be always tightened to avoid item detachment and to ensure the
equipment EMI-EMC performance.

• The screw tightening torque must be:


− 2.8 kg x cm (0.28 Newton x m) ±10%
− 2.4317 in lb. (0.2026 ft lb.) ±10%
• Exceeding this value may result in screw breaking.

2.6.2.1 MSS-ODU cable disconnection / connection

To avoid equipment damage, always unplug the card first before you disconnect the
MSS-ODU cable (at MSS or ODU side).

2.7 Fan, equipment rack, and equipment cabinet


precautions
When installing the equipment observe the following:

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 63


Safety awareness Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

Danger:

•Keep your fingers away from the rotating fan blades. Pull the fan-tray card by the
thumbscrews only and wait for the fan blades to stop spinning before you attempt to
remove the FAN card completely from the MSS-4/8 shelf.
•The 9500 MPR may require two people to support, align, and attach it to an equipment
rack. To prevent equipment damage or personal injury, make sure you have enough help.
•To prevent personal injury and equipment damage due to unbalanced loading of the
equipment rack or cabinet, make sure the equipment rack or cabinet is properly secured to
the floor, ceiling, or other rigid structure before mounting the 9500 MPR in it. For approved
methods of securing the equipment rack, read the equipment-rack installation instructions
or contact the equipment-rack manufacturer.

2.8 Electrical precautions


Take appropriate safety precautions when you perform procedures on electrical
equipment. Hazardous electrical potentials are present when system power is on.

Some procedures in this manual require working with small conductive objects, such
as screwdrivers, fuses, washers, screws, and nuts. When working on a shelf at the
top of an equipment rack, a dropped object that falls into a lower shelf can cause
physical damage and electrical short circuits. To prevent this, place a piece of paper
or other cover over the lower shelf to catch fallen objects. Remove the paper or other
cover when work is complete.

64 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Safety awareness

Danger: Remain aware of the following:

•Install the 9500 MPR in a restricted-access area only. Entrance to a restricted-access area
is intended for qualified or trained personnel and access to it is controlled by a locked
barrier.
•The MSS-8 shelf does not contain main overcurrent protection devices. The user must
provide circuit breakers or fuses and disconnects between the power source and the 9500
MPR. Each power feed from a source (-48 V dc and Return) requires a dc-rated fast-trip
circuit breaker or fuse and disconnect. Circuit breakers or fuses must meet applicable local
and national electrical safety codes and be approved for the intended application. Circuit
breaker or fuse size is dependent upon site configuration. Refer to site engineering
documentation for the correct Circuit breaker or fuse size.
•The MPT-HL shelf does not contain main overcurrent protection devices. The user must
provide circuit breakers or fuses and disconnects between the power source and the 9500
MPR. Each power feed from a source (+ 24 V dc or- 48V dc and Return) requires a dc-
rated fast-trip circuit breaker or fuse and disconnect. Circuit breakers or fuses must meet
applicable local and national electrical safety codes and be approved for the intended
application. Circuit breaker or fuse size is dependent upon site configuration. See the site
engineering documentation for the correct Circuit breaker or fuse size.
•Make sure you connect the node to a + 24 V dc or - 48V dc source that is electrically
isolated from the ac source and is reliably connected to earth ground.
•For personal safety, make sure you connect and secure the installation site’s frame-ground
(earth ground) wire to the frame-ground terminal on the 9500 MPR before you connect any
other wires to the node.
•A dc-power source provides high energy, which can cause serious injury or equipment
damage. Only Nokiaqualified personnel should connect the dc power to the 9500 MPR To
prevent serious injury or equipment damage, make sure the power source cables are de-
energized before you handle or connect them to the node.

2.9 Harmful optical signals

2.9.1 Laser precautions


The label in Figure 14 is applied when the equipment contains Class 1 laser
components according to IEC 60825-1 (par. 5).

Figure 14 Class 1 laser

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 65


Safety awareness Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

The laser source is placed in the optional SFP plug-in, which is installed in the Core-E
card, P8ETH card, and EASv2 card. The laser source is placed in the left side of the
SFP plug-in.

Verify that laser labels on equipment state that the system conforms to all applicable
standards of 21 CFR 1040.10. If there are no danger labels, call the Nokia Technical
Support Center (TSC).

The invisible infrared radiation emitted by the fiber-optic transmitter can cause eye
damage. Observe local office procedures and the following dangers:

Danger:

•The use of controls and/or adjustments, or the performance of procedures other than those
specified herein may result in hazardous infrared radiation exposure.
•Laser infrared radiation is not in the visible spectrum; therefore, it is not visible to the naked
eye or with laser safety glasses. Although it cannot be seen, laser radiation may be present.
•Never look directly into an unterminated fiber-optic connector unless it is absolutely known
that no optical power is being emitted by the connector.
•Never look into a broken optical fiber cable unless it is absolutely known that no laser
radiation is present.
•Never look at an optical fiber splice, cable, or connector unless it is absolutely known that
no laser radiation is present in the fiber. Laser radiation can come from a fiber-optic
transmitter, an Optical Time Domain Reflectometer (OTDR), or other optical test
equipment.
•Never look directly into an unterminated optical connector or cable with a magnifier/
microscope unless it is absolutely known that no laser radiation is being emitted from the
connector or cable. A magnifier or microscope greatly increases the laser radiation hazard
to the eyes.
•This system normally operates as a Class I Laser Product (no hazard). However, during
servicing operations, when optical connectors are being connected, disconnected, or
handled without dust covers, it is possible to be exposed to Class IIIb laser radiation, which
can cause eye damage.
•Everyone within a 10 ft (3 m) radius of an unterminated optical fiber or connector that is
connected to a powered transmitter must wear laser safety goggles or eye shields.

Laser safety goggles or eye shields are not required if the following work rules are
strictly followed:

1. Always remove electrical power from fiber-optic transmitters before


disconnecting fiber-optic connectors in the path between the transmitter and the
receiver.
2. Never connect an unterminated optical cable to a fiber-optic transmitter. Always
connect fiber-optic cables to fiber-optic receivers, test sets, or some other
termination first.

66 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Hardware installation

Hardware installation

• High-level procedure to install a 9500 MPR system


• Unpack and inspect equipment
• Prepare floor
• Rack installation
• PDU installation (ANSI market)
• TRU installation (ETSI market)
• Route and terminate station ground and office battery power cables
• Hardware installation for the MPR-e solution
• MSS-O installation
• MSS-1 shelf installation
• MSS-4/8 and MPT-HL/HLC shelf installation
• Power interfaces installation
• Install MPT-HLS standard in an ETSI rack (ETSI market)
• Install MPT-HLS standard in an LSY rack (ETSI market)
• Install MPT-HLS compact in a 21” ETSI or 19” rack
• Route and terminate power cables
• Type N adapter bracket installation
• Demarcation panel/DDF installation
• MPT ODU installation
• Route and terminate cables between MSS and MPT ODU
• MPT Ethernet/power cable system installation
• MPT ODU electrical Ethernet and power cable system grounding
• Lightning surge suppressor installation (ANSI market)
• Weatherproofing outside cable connections
• Route and terminate E1 and DS1 signal cables
• Route and terminate DS3 signal cables
• Route and terminate Ethernet signal cables
• Route and Terminate STM-1/OC3 Signal Cables

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 67


Hardware installation Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

• Route and terminate sync signal cables


• Route and terminate AUX card cables
• Route and terminate MSS-8 shelf Enhanced Fan and MSS-1 shelf
housekeeping alarm cable
• Route and terminate MPT Power Unit Housekeeping Alarm cable
• Install standoffs and secure cables with cable ties
• Assemble a cable to connect to a Core card
• Antenna alignment
• Expand an MPT-HLS system (ETSI market)

68 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual High-level procedure to install a 9500 MPR
system

3 High-level procedure to install a 9500


MPR system

3.1 Purpose
This procedure is used to install the system.

3.2 Procedures
This section provides high-level procedures to install the 9500 MPR in various
configurations. Some steps may not be necessary depending on your hardware.
See:

• Table 5 to install a 9500 MPR in a split-mount configuration: an MSS-O/1/4/8 or


MSS-1c and an MPT outdoor unit.
• Table 6 to install a 9500 MPR in an MPR-e configuration:
− MPR-e standalone
− Single NE with 7705 SAR configuration.
For Single NE with 7705 SAR configuration, see also the documentation for
the 7705 SAR.
• Table 7 to install a 9500 MPR in a long-haul configuration for the ETSI market:
an MSS unit and an MPT-HLS.
• Table 8 to install a 9500 MPR in a long-haul configuration for the ANSI market:
− an MSS unit and an MPT-HL or MPT-HLC.
− an MPT-HLC in Single NE with 7705 SAR configuration.
For Single NE with 7705 SAR configuration, see also the documentation for
the 7705 SAR.

Warning: The following Warning applies if cards are inserted as part of the
installation process:

•After the initial insert of a new card, do not extract and re-insert the card quickly.
Once the card is inserted, wait for the status LED to turn steady green.
Extracting a card before the LED has turned steady green can lead to
unpredictable results.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 69


High-level procedure to install a 9500 MPR Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual
system

Note: .Prior to performing equipment installation or removal, the WT


Performance Monitoring Suite (WTPMS) application must be closed.

70 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual High-level procedure to install a 9500 MPR
system

Table 5 Procedures to install a 9500 MPR system in split-mount configuration

Task Indoor or See


Outdoor?

Prepare the site Indoor Unpack and inspect equipment


Prepare floor

Install the antenna Outdoor Manufacturer instructions

Install the rack Indoor Rack installation

Install the Power Distribution Indoor • PDU installation (ANSI market)


Panel • TRU installation (ETSI market)

Set up ground and battery power Indoor Route and terminate station ground and office
cables battery power cables

Set up networking and powering Indoor • MSS-1 shelf installation


• MSS-4/8 and MPT-HL/HLC shelf
installation
• Power interfaces installation
• MSS-1c installation

Set up power connections for Indoor Route and terminate power cables
indoor equipment

If DS1, DS3 or E1 cards will be Indoor Demarcation panel/DDF installation


used, install the demarcation
panel or DDF

Install MPT ODUs Outdoor MPT ODU installation

Install MSS-O, if applicable Outdoor MSS-O installation

Install data and power cables Indoor and • Route and terminate cables between
between the MSS and the MPT Outdoor MSS and MPT ODU
• Type N adapter bracket installation
• MPT Ethernet/power cable system
installation

Ground Ethernet and power Outdoor MPT ODU electrical Ethernet and power
cables cable system grounding

Install lightning surge Indoor and Lightning surge suppressor installation (ANSI
suppressor, if needed Outdoor market)

Weatherproof outside cable Indoor and Weatherproofing outside cable connections


connections Outdoor

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 71


High-level procedure to install a 9500 MPR Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual
system

Table 5 Procedures to install a 9500 MPR system in split-mount configuration (Continued)

Task Indoor or See


Outdoor?

Route and terminate signal Indoor • Route and terminate E1 and DS1 signal
cables cables
• Route and terminate DS3 signal cables
• Route and terminate Ethernet signal
cables
• Route and Terminate STM-1/OC3 Signal
Cables
• Route and terminate sync signal cables
• Route and terminate AUX card cables
• Route and terminate MSS-8 shelf
Enhanced Fan and MSS-1 shelf
housekeeping alarm cable
• Route and terminate MPT Power Unit
Housekeeping Alarm cable
• Install standoffs and secure cables with
cable ties
• Assemble a cable to connect to a Core
card

Align the antenna Outdoor Antenna alignment

Perform turn-up tests to verify Indoor 9500 MPR Turn-up Manual


the installation, and install plug-
in cards

72 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual High-level procedure to install a 9500 MPR
system

Table 6 Procedures to install a 9500 MPR system in MPR-e configuration

Task Indoor or See


Outdoor?

Prepare the site Indoor Unpack and inspect equipment


Prepare floor

Install the antenna Outdoor Manufacturer instructions

Install the rack, if needed Indoor Rack installation

Install the Power Distribution Indoor • PDU installation (ANSI market)


Panel, if needed • TRU installation (ETSI market)

Set up ground and battery power Indoor Route and terminate station ground and office
cables battery power cables

Set up networking and powering Indoor MPR-e standalone: Installation &


interconnection overview
MPR-e in Single NE mode with 7705 SAR:
installation & interconnection overview

Set up power connections for Indoor Route and terminate power cables
indoor equipment

Install MPT ODUs Outdoor MPT ODU installation

Ground Ethernet and power Outdoor MPT ODU electrical Ethernet and power
cables cable system grounding

Install lightning surge Indoor and Lightning surge suppressor installation (ANSI
suppressor, if needed Outdoor market)

Weatherproof outside cable Indoor and Weatherproofing outside cable connections


connections Outdoor

Route and terminate signal Indoor • Route and terminate Ethernet signal
cables, as needed cables
• Route and terminate sync signal cables
• Route and terminate MPT Power Unit
Housekeeping Alarm cable
• Install standoffs and secure cables with
cable ties

Align the antenna Outdoor Antenna alignment

Perform turn-up tests to verify Indoor 9500 MPR Turn-up Manual


the installation, and install plug-
in cards

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 73


High-level procedure to install a 9500 MPR Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual
system

Table 7 Procedures to install a 9500 MPR system with MPT-HLS

Task Indoor or See


Outdoor?

Prepare the site Indoor Unpack and inspect equipment


Prepare floor

Install the antenna Outdoor Manufacturer instructions

Install the rack Indoor Rack installation

Install the Power Distribution Indoor TRU installation (ETSI market)


Panel, if not already installed

Set up ground and battery power Indoor Route and terminate station ground and office
cables battery power cables

Install MPT-HLS, if applicable Indoor • Install MPT-HLS standard in an ETSI


rack (ETSI market)
• Install MPT-HLS standard in an LSY rack
(ETSI market)
• Expand an MPT-HLS system (ETSI
market)

Install MPT-HLS compact Indoor Install MPT-HLS compact in a 21” ETSI or 19”
rack

Install MPT-HLS compact Outdoor Appendix A: Additional cabinet installation


instructions

Install the waveguide Indoor and Manufacturer instructions


Outdoor

Set up power connections for Indoor Route and terminate power cables
indoor equipment

If DS1, DS3 or E1 cards will be Indoor Demarcation panel/DDF installation


used, install the demarcation
panel or DDF

74 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual High-level procedure to install a 9500 MPR
system

Table 7 Procedures to install a 9500 MPR system with MPT-HLS (Continued)

Task Indoor or See


Outdoor?

Route and terminate signal Indoor • Route and terminate E1 and DS1 signal
cables cables
• Route and terminate DS3 signal cables
• Route and terminate Ethernet signal
cables
• Route and Terminate STM-1/OC3 Signal
Cables
• Route and terminate sync signal cables
• Route and terminate AUX card cables
• Route and terminate MSS-8 shelf
Enhanced Fan and MSS-1 shelf
housekeeping alarm cable
• Route and terminate MPT Power Unit
Housekeeping Alarm cable
• Install standoffs and secure cables with
cable ties
• Assemble a cable to connect to a Core
card

Perform turn-up tests to verify Indoor 9500 MPR Turn-up Manual


the installation, and install plug-
in cards

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 75


High-level procedure to install a 9500 MPR Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual
system

Table 8 Procedures to install a 9500 MPR system with MPT-HL/HLC

Task Indoor or See


Outdoor?

Prepare the site Indoor Unpack and inspect equipment


Prepare floor

Install the antenna Outdoor Manufacturer instructions

Install the rack Indoor Rack installation

Install the Power Distribution Indoor PDU installation (ANSI market)


Panel

Set up ground and battery power Indoor Route and terminate station ground and office
cables battery power cables

Set up networking and powering Indoor Power interfaces installation


MPR-e in Single NE mode with 7705 SAR:
installation & interconnection overview
7705 SAR documentation

Install MPT-HL/HLC unit Indoor 9500 MPR-A Engineering Support


Documentation

Install the waveguide Indoor Manufacturer instructions

Set up power connections for Indoor Route and terminate power cables
indoor equipment

If DS1, DS3 or E1 cards will be Indoor Demarcation panel/DDF installation


used, install the demarcation
panel or DDF

76 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual High-level procedure to install a 9500 MPR
system

Table 8 Procedures to install a 9500 MPR system with MPT-HL/HLC (Continued)

Task Indoor or See


Outdoor?

Route and terminate signal Indoor • Route and terminate E1 and DS1 signal
cables cables
• Route and terminate DS3 signal cables
• Route and terminate Ethernet signal
cables
• Route and Terminate STM-1/OC3 Signal
Cables
• Route and terminate sync signal cables
• Route and terminate AUX card cables
• Route and terminate MSS-8 shelf
Enhanced Fan and MSS-1 shelf
housekeeping alarm cable
• Install standoffs and secure cables with
cable ties
• Assemble a cable to connect to a Core
card

Perform turn-up tests to verify Indoor 9500 MPR Turn-up Manual


the installation, and install plug-
in cards

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 77


High-level procedure to install a 9500 MPR Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual
system

78 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Unpack and inspect equipment

4 Unpack and inspect equipment

4.1 Purpose
This chapter describes how to unpack and inspect the 9500 MPR radio and to report
any shipping damage or missing parts.

4.2 General
The 9500 MPR radio may be shipped from the factory as an assembled rack
assembly or as kits for field installation.

Nokia provides expert Installation Services for installations that have different
requirements from the recommended configuration as outlined in this manual.
Contact Nokia for more information.

4.3 Recommended tools


• Tin snips
• Box cutter

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 79


Unpack and inspect equipment Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

4.4 Procedure

Danger: The 9500 MPR radio requires two people to unpack a factory
assembled rack assembly from the box. To prevent equipment damage or
personal injury, make sure appropriate help or suitable lifting equipment is
available if needed.

Warning: If product must be transported or reshipped, repack equipment with


approved shipping materials. Repacking equipment improperly or using
unapproved shipping materials may result in equipment damage, which is
sender’s responsibility. If any shipping materials are lost, contact Nokia before
transporting or reshipping product.

1. Remove external packing slip from the shipping container.

2. Before unpacking the container, ensure that there is no visible damage to


outside of the container.
If damage is visible, report damage to freight carrier before opening container.
Freight carrier will advise as to next step to take. (If a camera is available, take
several pictures of damage.)

3. Use tin snips to cut the container strapping.

4. If necessary, unstack the boxes onto a level surface.

5. Open the top flaps of all boxes.

6. Remove the shelf from the box, removing any additional packing material
covering the shelf. Place the shelf onto a level surface.

7. Remove the fan and modules, excluding filler panels, from the shelf. Place the
modules into antistatic bags or containers to prevent module damage.

8. Inspect the MSS-1/MSS-4/MSS-8, MSS-1c, and/or MPT-HL shelves and their


card cage area for visible damage. If damage is visible, contact Nokia to report
damage and to find out what to do next.

80 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Unpack and inspect equipment

9. Inspect the contents of the box that contains the accessories for damage or
missing parts.

10. To report damage or missing parts, contact Nokia.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 81


Unpack and inspect equipment Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

82 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Prepare floor

5 Prepare floor

5.1 Purpose
This chapter describes the standard procedure for rack installation floor preparation.
The two types of racks that can be installed are the standard rack and the seismic.

5.2 General
Equipment racks are designed for fixed-location installation. Standard and seismic
rack assemblies are available.

Nokia provides expert Installation Services for installations that have different
requirements from the recommended configuration as outlined in this manual.
Contact Nokia for more information.

5.3 Prerequisite
Complete Unpack and inspect equipment.

5.4 Recommended tools


• Safety glasses
• Anchor setting tool (Redhead RT58 or equivalent)
• Chalk line with chalk
• Extension cord (50-foot)
• Felt marking pens
• Hammer, claw (24 to 40 ounces)
• Roll of cellophane tape
• Rotary impact drill and associated drill bits
• Steel tape measure (25-foot)

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 83


Prepare floor Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

• Insulated trouble lamp (droplight—Duralamp, or equivalent)


• Vacuum cleaner, High Efficiency Particulate Arrester (HEPA)

84 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Prepare floor

5.5 Procedure

1. Observe the following guidelines:


a. Verify that layouts of the floor, ceiling, and walls are as indicated in
applicable drawings and specifications.
b. Verify that the area dimensions and location of reference points correspond
to the floor plan.
c. Mark all of the reference and layout lines.
d. To avoid the possibility of cumulative errors when short dimensions are laid
out in a straight line, mark the total length, divide into shorter lengths, and
leave the steel measuring tape in place.
e. Where the layout lines intersect, extend the lines at least 6 in. beyond the
point of intersection to check equipment alignment.

Note: When the shelf assembly is mounted in a rack next to a wall, clearance from the
backplane requires a minimum of six inches.

2.

Warning: Use a level to check entire mounting floor space. Do not try to mount
rack on uneven floor.

Follow job floor plan, and mark equipment locations on floor with chalk line. See
Figure 15 for sample floor plan.rack footprint.

3. Verify required space per rack configuration. See Figure 16 to Figure 19.

4. Follow the chalk line to mark the front baseline and end of the rack.

5. Use the felt-tipped marking pen to mark the anchor points for the rack.
See Figure 20 for the floor mounting diagram for a standard rack. See Figure 21
for the floor mounting diagram for a seismic rack.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 85


Prepare floor Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

Figure 15 Sample floor plan

Figure 16 Rack envelope: MSS-4/MSS-8 shelf

86 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Prepare floor

Figure 17 Rack envelope: MPT-HL shelf w/diplexer

Figure 18 Rack envelope: MPT-HL shelf w/one waveguide bracket

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 87


Prepare floor Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

Figure 19 Rack envelope: MPT-HL shelf w/two waveguide brackets

88 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Prepare floor

Figure 20 Floor mounting detail for standard rack bay

Figure 21 Floor mounting detail for unequal flange seismic rack

6. Determine the rack type. See Figure 22 for the standard rack assembly
mounting dimensions. See Figure 23 for the seismic rack assembly mounting
dimensions.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 89


Prepare floor Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

Figure 22 Standard rack (PN 694-9000-006)

90 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Prepare floor

Figure 23 Unequal flange seismic rack (PN 1AD014120046)

Prepare for rack installation

7. Racks are typically installed on concrete floors; however, a rack can also be
bolted to a wood or steel floor.

Note: Seismic rack installation is effective only on concrete flooring that is at least 6 in. thick,
has minimum strength of 300 psi, and is reinforced with 0.5 percent steel rebar.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 91


Prepare floor Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

8. Is installation on concrete floor, raised computer-equipment floor, uni-strut floor


anchor system, or wood or steel floor?
a. If Concrete floor, go to step 9.
b. If Wood or steel floor, go to step 23.

9. Concrete floor
Install the floor anchors and mount rack. For standard racks, use Redhead
concrete anchors or anchors specified by local practice. For seismic racks, use
the floor mounting kit (PN 019-0425-150) or the anchors as specified by local
practice.

10. Position and lock the chuck/shank assembly in the rotary impact drill.

11. Insert and seat the anchor in chuck.

Note: Let the tool do the work. Apply only enough pressure to control tool. Vertical force in
excess of weight of tool reduces impact force, thus inhibiting drilling process for self-drill
anchors.

12. To position the anchor, operate the drill in impact mode. Use the impact action
until the teeth are embedded just below the concrete surface.

13.

Danger: Never use air hose to clean dust from a hole, as dust may be blown into
eyes and equipment. For the same reason, do not flick out dust. Use HEPA
vacuum cleaner to remove dust from hole.

Care must be taken to ensure that concrete dust from drilling is contained in
immediate vicinity of drill hole. The following two methods ensure that dust does
not spread:
a. Use a HEPA vacuum cleaner to completely remove concrete cuttings from
the hole while drilling. The hole must be completely clear for proper seating
of the anchor.
b. Fill a disposable cup with shaving cream and place it over drill hole. Drill
through the bottom of the cup. Shaving cream contains and traps the dust
particles.

92 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Prepare floor

14. Engage the rotation mode, then drill until the chuck is within 1/16 in. above the
concrete surface. See Figure 24.

Figure 24 Self-drilling anchor

15. Stop the tool and lift approximately 1 in. to disengage the impact action, then
start the tool and withdraw the anchor.

16. Disengage the rotation action. While the anchor is still attached, start the tool to
expel concrete cuttings from the anchor.

17. Completely remove the concrete cuttings from the hole with a vacuum, and
inspect the hole for any concrete chips. The hole must be completely clear for
proper seating of the anchor.

18. Insert and lightly seat the expansion plug in the anchor.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 93


Prepare floor Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

19. Verify that the tool is in an impact position. Insert the anchor in the hole and seat
it with the impact action of the tool until the chuck is 1/16 in. above the concrete.
See Figure 25.

Figure 25 Anchor setting

20. Break off the chucking cone with a hard push of the tool.

21. Remove the chucking cone from the chuck.

22. If the rack is not to be installed immediately, cover the anchors with tape. The
procedure is complete.

23. Wood or steel floor


Mark the position for the rack with four pilot holes for the lag bolts, or four
clearance holes for the machine screws.

94 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Prepare floor

24. To mount a standard rack on a wood or steel floor, use 3/8 in. lag bolts on a
wood floor, or 1/2 in. screws or studs on a steel floor.

25. Drill a 3/16 in. pilot hole for the lag bolts, or a 9/16 in. clearance hole for the
machine screws.

26. If the rack is not to be installed immediately, cover the holes with tape.
The procedure is complete.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 95


Prepare floor Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

96 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Rack installation

6 Rack installation

6.1 Purpose
This chapter provides describes how to physically install a rack. The two types of
racks that can be installed are described in the following paragraphs. See Prepare
floor for rack illustrations and the 9500 MPR Product Information Manual for rack part
numbers.

6.2 General

6.2.1 Rack descriptions

6.2.1.1 Standard rack or Laborack (19”)

The standard rack uses extruded aluminum channels with 12-24 tapped mounting
holes vertically spaced at EIA increments. The tapped-hole pattern provides for
mounting the modular subsystems on the front of the channels, and the waveguide
and rack rear cover on the back. The bottom of the rack is held together by steel
angles mounted to the front and back of the rack channels. As an option, the rear
angle can be turned in toward the rack channel or toward the rear (normal position)
to increase the base dimensions and provide a more stable footing. If the rear angle
is turned in, the front angle must be removed during installation for access to the
holes in the rear-mounting angle. Two optional snap-on front covers are available.
Side covers are provided for the rack. The side covers protect the cable runs and are
secured to the card cages and to slots located on the main rack channels. Retaining
screws are used at the top and bottom of each side cover.

The Laborack is a light weight 19” rack available in the ETSI market. Installation is
similar to the standard rack.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 97


Rack installation Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

6.2.1.2 Seismic 19” rack

A seismic rack, designed to withstand seismic anomalies, such as earthquakes, is


available. The rack frame is steel and consists of the rack top support and front and
rear baseplates welded to the rack channels. Side covers fit only the seismic rack
and are not interchangeable with side covers on the standard extruded aluminum
racks. The side covers protect the cable runs and are secured to the card cages and
the rack channels by the side holders. The side covers (left and right) slide onto the
side panel holders.

6.2.1.3 ETSI (21”) rack

ETSI racks are available in four heights, see the 9500 MPR Product Information
Manual. All ETSI racks are 21” (533 mm) wide.

6.2.1.4 Outdoor cabinet

The outdoor cabinet supports a variety of mounting options and is a GR-487 certified
outdoor enclosure solution.

Nokia provides expert Installation Services for installations that have different
requirements from the recommended configuration as outlined in this manual.
Contact Nokia for more information.

6.3 Prerequisite
Complete Prepare floor.

6.4 Recommended tools


• Safety glasses
• Hammer, claw (24 to 40 ounces)
• Level (3-foot)
• Pinch bar
• Shims (0.06-, 0.09-, and 0.12-inch)

98 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Rack installation

• Socket set (3/8-inch drive)


• Straps (heavy duty) or rope, as required
• Torque wrench (3/8-inch drive) (80 foot-pound capability)
• Vacuum cleaner, (HEPA)
• Wrenches, open-end and box-end combination (3/8- to 11/16- inch)

6.5 Procedure
Perform the steps in the following procedure as applicable to your installation. Some
steps may not be necessary.

1. What equipment is being installed?


a. If rack, go to step 2.
b. If cabinet, see Appendix A: Additional cabinet installation instructions for
installation information.

2. Cover the surrounding floor area with protective covering as required by local
practice.

3. Brace top of rack during movement to prevent tipping and to avoid strains
that can twist or damage backplane.

4. Brace top of rack during movement to prevent tipping and to avoid strains that
can twist or damage backplane.

Note: Use a positioning dolly to move the equipment to a permanent location in a equipment
room or vault. If a dolly is not available, use a piece of canvas under the rack footing to
prevent marring of floor.

5. Move the rack to the floor location for installation.

6. Raise the rack to a vertical position.

7. Carefully position the rack over the mounting anchors. Line up and plumb the
rack.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 99


Rack installation Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

8. Use a level to check leveling and alignment of the rack at base, top, and both
sides. When necessary, insert a shim under the base to assure correct leveling.

9. What type of floor is in use?


a. If concrete floor, go to step 10.
b. If floating floor, go to step 13.
Securing the rack to a concrete floor

10. To secure the rack to a concrete floor, install the anchor, stud, washers, and nut,
and then tighten. Figure 26 shows a typical method of securing the 19” rack to a
floor. Figure 27 and Figure 28 show a typical method of securing the 21” rack to
a floor.
To secure on other than concrete floor, install 3/8in. diameter bolts, flat washers,
and lock washers.

Figure 26 Securing the 19” rack to floor

100 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Rack installation

Figure 27 Securing the 21” Rack to Floor (1)

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 101


Rack installation Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

Figure 28 Securing the 21” Rack to Floor (2)

11. Torque the floor anchor bolts to 80 foot-pounds.

12. Verify the rack leveling and adjust as required.


Securing the rack to a floating floor (ETSI market)

13. The drilling mask for a floating floor is the same used for concrete floor fastening;
see Figure 29.
In this case a hole must be created for the cables coming from the bottom
according to Figure 30.
The rack fastening is to be mounted on the concrete floor below using a suitable
stud as shown in Figure 30.

102 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Rack installation

Figure 29 Example of securing rack assembly to concrete floor

14. Using the row layout drawing, mark out the cable entry areas in the floor tiles and
cut out with a jigsaw. Remember that the beginning of the row must be approved
by the customer.

Note: Unused or incompletely used cable entry areas should be blocked off with foam
rubber.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 103


Rack installation Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

Figure 30 Floor file drilling template

Rack top support

Note: Ensure that the rack is properly aligned. If the rack is twisted, covers may not fit or
bind.

15. Adequately brace the top of the rack assembly to ensure reliable support for the
equipment. Use the holes at top of the waveguide support in the branching area.
See Figure 31 and Figure 32 for the standard rack top support dimensions or
Figure 33 for the seismic rack top support dimensions. Figure 34 shows a
method of bracing the top support. Adhere to local procedures for the top
support of the specific rack.

Note: The extendable 19” rack can rise to any height from 7 ft. 3 in. (2210 mm) to 11 ft. 6
in. (3505 mm). These extensions provide upper rack support only.

104 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Rack installation

Figure 31 Standard rack top support bay

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 105


Rack installation Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

Figure 32 Standard rack top with extension kit

Figure 33 Seismic rack top support

106 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Rack installation

Figure 34 Typical method of bracing top support

16. On an extendable rack, loosen setscrews one turn, and extend the rack to
required height.

17. Tighten front setscrews (four places) securely, then tighten rear setscrews (four
places).
Guardrail installation

Note: The front and rear guardrails provide additional equipment protection. An AC outlet
assembly can be installed on the base plate at the front rail. Side rails are mounted to the
front or rear of the rack channel using 0.250-20 hardware.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 107


Rack installation Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

18. Install the guardrail, as shown in Figure 35.

Figure 35 Guardrail installation, standard racks

Adjacent rack installation

19. See Figure 36 for attaching adjacent racks using rack-to-rack mounting kits.

108 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Rack installation

Figure 36 Adjacent rack attachment, standard racks

Rack grounding

Danger: The rack must be connected to the protection ground before any electrical
connection is performed.

The grounding cable must be the same section size as the power cables connected to the
batteries.

20. Figure 37 shows the connection of the ground to the top side of the ETSI rack.
The rack is grounded to the station using a 16 to 25 mm2 section cable (1)
terminated on the cable terminal lug (2). See Figure 38 for a photo.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 109


Rack installation Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

Figure 37 21” rack grounding

Figure 38 Photo detail of rack grounding point

Figure 39 shows the connection of the ground on the bottom side of the 19” rack.

110 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Rack installation

Figure 39 19” grounding

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 111


Rack installation Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

112 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual PDU installation (ANSI market)

7 PDU installation (ANSI market)

7.1 Purpose
This chapter describes how to physically mount the PDU into the rack.

7.2 General

Note: This chapter is required for systems when the PDU is NOT factory installed in the
rack. If the PDU is factory installed in the rack, skip this chapter and continue with the next
chapter.

Mounting the PDU requires three rack increments. The fuse panel provides fuses for
up to four 9500 MPR shelves (sixteen 20 Amp fuses; two A and B + and two A and
B - per shelf) and two AUX shelves (eight 10 Amp fuses). Battery input voltage can
be 19 to 60 V DC.

An optional relay card is available that provides eight Form-C relay outputs for radio
major and minor alarms. A front panel alarm LED is provided to indicate a blown fuse.
No rack or shelf alarms are provided on the fuse panel.

Nokia provides expert Installation Services for installations that have different
requirements from the recommended configuration as outlined in this manual.
Contact Nokia for more information.

7.3 Prerequisite
Complete Rack installation.

7.4 Recommended tools


• PDU

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 113


PDU installation (ANSI market) Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

• Alarm Board Assembly (Optional)


• Rack screws, Nokia PN: 330-2882-030, Qty 4, P/O Aluminum Rack Screw Kit,
Nokia PN: 695-1001-006
• Phillips screwdriver

7.5 Procedure

1. Determine the required rack type and rack screw type.

2. Mount the PDU according to site documentation, typically in the top three
increments of the rack, using four rack screws. See Figure 40 and Figure 41.

Figure 40 PDU mounting detail

114 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual PDU installation (ANSI market)

Figure 41 PDU mounting detail with existing Bay equipment

3. Tighten the rack screws.


The procedure is completed.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 115


PDU installation (ANSI market) Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

116 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual TRU installation (ETSI market)

8 TRU installation (ETSI market)

8.1 Purpose
This chapter describes how to physically install a Top Rack Unit (TRU) at the top of
a rack.

8.2 General
The TRU is a power supply panel used to provide the power supply (- 48V) to the
equipment. Figure 42, Figure 43, and Figure 44 show different available sizes.

The TRU is fixed to the top of the rack with four screws.

Various power distribution panel kits are available. See the 9500 MPR Product
Information Manual for part numbers.

Figure 42 TRU (6 fuse holders) shown without cover

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 117


TRU installation (ETSI market) Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

Figure 43 TRU (10 breakers slots) shown without cover

Figure 44 TRU (20 breakers slots) shown without cover

New breakers can be added without additional wiring, thanks to the distribution
comb.

Figure 45 Breaker adding

118 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual TRU installation (ETSI market)

Figure 46 TRU shown with cover

• Breakers of different values


− 2A
− 6A
− 10A
− 16A
− 20A
− 32A
• Usage of breakers and fuses (refer to Table 9).

Table 9 Recommended breaker/fuse values (A)

Equipment Voltage (VDC) Recommended breaker/fuse


values (A)

MSS-1 no PFoE MPT +24 6

MSS-1 up to 2 PFoE MPT +24 10

MSS-1 no PFoE MPT -48 2

MSS-1 up to 2 PFoE MPT -48 10

MSS-1 no PFoE MPT -60 2

MSS-1 up to 2 PFoE MPT -60 6

MSS-4 -48 6

MSS-4 powering up to 4 MPT -48 16

MSS-8 1 -48 10

MSS-8 powering up to 8 MPT -48 20

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 119


TRU installation (ETSI market) Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

Table 9 Recommended breaker/fuse values (A) (Continued)

Equipment Voltage (VDC) Recommended breaker/fuse


values (A)

Power injector with 1 or 2 MPT -48 6

MPT Power Unit up to 4 MPT -48 10

MPT Extended Power Unit up to 2 MPT +24 20

MPT Extended Power Unit up to 2 MPT -48 10

1. A 10A or 20A breaker will be provided for the MSS-8 depending on the
configuration installed.

Note: The number of MPT radios that can be supported by an MSS-1/4/8 shelf is greater
than the number that can be powered directly. See the 9500 MPR Product Information
Manual for information about the number of radios that can be powered by an MSS.

For detailed mounting instructions, refer to the leaflets included in each kit.

8.2.1 Breakers for the MPT-HLS TRU

Note: The TRU for the MPT-HLS is usually delivered fully equipped.

The required breaker value and position in the TRU depend on the equipment being
controlled.

Breakers must be placed according to the scheme in Figure 47.

120 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual TRU installation (ETSI market)

Figure 47 Breaker distribution schema

Legend:

• RT indicates the MPT-HLS radio


• H indicates the functions (Fans, Radio, MSS) placed on the High position of the
rack.
• L indicates those on the Low position.
• Left and Right indicate if the breaker controls the function placed on the left or
right side of the rack (under-equipped MPR-LH subracks and relative fans).

Figure 47 shows an example of a TRU configuration.

Figure 48 TRU example configuration

8.3 Prerequisite
Complete Rack installation.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 121


TRU installation (ETSI market) Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

8.4 Procedures
This chapter provides procedures for the following:

• Installation of the 20-slot TRU


• Power cabling to rack components
• -48 Vdc Power Supply connection
• +24 Vdc Power Supply connection

8.4.1 Installation of the 20-slot TRU


The MPT-HLS radio requires the 20-slot TRU. The TRU must be installed in the top
position on the rack. Installation of other TRUs is similar.

If the ETSI 21” rack is in use, the ETSI rack mounting kit must be used. Brackets must
be positioned in the correct orientation with the engraved “UP” writing on the top, as
shown in Figure 49.

Figure 49 TRU in ETSI 21” rack

The cables used for battery power and grounding must be 25 mm2 for MPR-LH
applications. Size the battery power and return and ground cables according to the
specific application. Use blue and black for battery power and yellow/green for
grounding.

122 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual TRU installation (ETSI market)

References to the left and right sides of the rack in this section refer to the left and
right sides when facing the rack.

To install the TRU:

1. Fix the TRU to the top position on the rack. Apply one screw in left position 2 and
one in right position 4.

Note: The TRU is grounded through the fixation screws on the rack. Do not connect the
GND point on the TRU.

2. Connect the battery cables:


a. Crimp the black cables (+) from the two batteries to the 90° lugs and fix them
to the GND bar. Use the first position on the left side for battery A. See
Figure 50.

Figure 50 Fix the battery cables to the GND bar

Connect the lugs in the front of the GND bar with the 90° bending towards
the rear side.
b. Bend the cable again 90° and direct it toward the top of the rack for
connection to station ground.
c. Connect the blue cables (-) to the power clamps at the left side (battery A)
end. Direct them toward the rear and then toward the top of the rack.
d. For redundant battery applications, repeat steps a to c to connect battery B.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 123


TRU installation (ETSI market) Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

3. Insert the breaker:


a. Remove the plastic protection cap on the position the breaker needs to be
inserted in. See Figure 51.

Figure 51 Remove the plastic protection cap

b. Close the lock on the breaker and insert it in the TRU. See Figure 53.

Figure 52 Close the lock on the breaker and insert it in the TRU

c. Open the breaker lock.


d. Fix the breaker correctly on the DIN rail.
e. Close the breaker lock and tighten the upper screw. See Figure 53.

124 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual TRU installation (ETSI market)

Figure 53 Close the breaker lock and tighten the upper screw

4. Connect the blue cable (-) to the breaker and tighten the corresponding screw.
The other end of the cable will be connected to the equipment when it is installed
in the subrack.

5. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for each additional battery A breaker you need to install.

6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to install redundant battery B breakers if applicable.

8.4.2 Power cabling to rack components


To simplify cabling installation, connect and route the power cabling from the TRU to
the planned location in the ETSI 21” rack before you install the remaining
components. See Preparing power cabling for MPT-HLS standard components for
information about how connect the cables for each component to the breakers, and
how to run the cables to the required locations in the rack.

8.4.3 -48 Vdc Power Supply connection


Two solutions of the Power Supply cable can be provided as shown in Figure 54.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 125


TRU installation (ETSI market) Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

Note: Preassembled cord with moulded connector or metallic connector and raw cable to
be assembled on site.

Figure 54 2W2C Connector and Cable

Two cables are used for MSS-8 (2x6 mm2 as shown in Figure 54).

Figure 55 MSS-8 Battery Access Card on subrack

126 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual TRU installation (ETSI market)

Note: The MSS-4 battery access card is similar to the MSS-8 but with only one connector.

The power cable has a 2-pin 2W2C fitted at one end and wire at the other. The cable
is nominally 4 m. The blue wire must be connected to battery; the black wire to
+(Return).

Note: The 2W2C DC power connector can be shorted inadvertently if applied at an angle.
Always insert with correct alignment.

One cable is used for MSS-4 (2x4 mm2).

One cable is used for MSS-1 (2x1 mm2 as shown in Figure 56).

Figure 56 MSS-1 cabling

Note: The use of integrated LVD (Low Voltage Disconnect) device is suggested in order to
protect the battery devices: the power system senses the battery voltage and sends a signal
to the LVD to connect when the battery voltage rises to a user-defined level; when the
battery voltage drops below another user-defined level, the power system removes the
signal from the LVD and the LVD opens to prevent the batteries from over-discharging.

8.4.4 +24 Vdc Power Supply connection


For +24 Vdc office applications the +24 Vdc/-48 Vdc Converter Unit has to be
installed on the MSS and the Connections shown in Figure 57 have to be done. The
single converter kit includes one cord for connection to MSS and the protected
converter kit includes two cords.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 127


TRU installation (ETSI market) Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

Figure 57 +24 Vdc Power Supply connections

Note: Considering the total power dissipation and the max input current range of the
Converter (19.6Amps@20Vdc – 10.9Amps@36Vdc) the cables between the MSS
equipment and Top Rack Unit and related brackets must be correctly sized (min. 4 mm2 -
reference cable P/N 3DB18271AAXX).

128 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Route and terminate station ground and office
battery power cables

9 Route and terminate station ground and


office battery power cables

9.1 Purpose
This chapter describes how to route and connect the station ground cable to a
standard or seismic rack, and to route and connect office battery power to the Power
Distribution Unit (PDU).

9.2 General
The 9500 MPR is suitable for installation in applications using a Common Bonding
Network (CBN).

Establish equipment or station ground in accordance with your company grounding


requirements for all installations.

The 9500 MPR MSS-8 shelf operates on -48 VDC (-40.8 to -57.6 VDC) or +24 VDC
(+19.0 to +36.0 VDC) input power.

Note: When MSS-8 shelf is powered using +24 VDC, an optional +24/-48 Power Converter
must be used to connect the MSS-8 shelf to office power.

The 9500 MPR MSS-4 shelf operates on -48 VDC (-40.8 to -57.6 VDC) input power.

The 9500 MPR MSS-1 unit, depending on the version, operates as follows:

• 3DB19015AA operates on -24 VDC, -48 VDC, or -60 VDC (-19.6 to -72.0 VDC)
and +24 VDC, +48 VDC, or +60 VDC (+19.6 to +72.0 VDC) input power.
• 3DB19015BA and 3DB19015CA operates on -48 VDC (-38.4 to -57.6 VDC)

The 9500 MPR MPT-HL, MPT-HLC and MPT-HLS and related fan unit operate on
+24/48 VDC (+20.4 to +57.6 VDC) or -24/48 VDC (-20.4 to -57.6 VDC) input power.

Note: When MPT-HL shelf is powered using +24/48 VDC, a +24/-48 Power Converter must
be used to connect office power to the MSS-8 shelf.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 129


Route and terminate station ground and office Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual
battery power cables

Office power is connected to the PDU which in turn connects to the backplane of the
shelf assembly. The PDU provides the transition from the large cables that run from
the office power board to the smaller cables that provide power to the shelf
assemblies.

The fuse panel has floating battery inputs to handle either positive or negative 24/48
VDC operation. The strap for grd should only be used when the rectifier source of
power at the site has not been bonded to the common bonding network (CBN) of the
building. In this application the fuse panel must be grounded to the rack rail. In all
other applications, the grd strap should not be used to avoid ground loops.

Nokia provides expert Installation Services for installations that have different
requirements from the recommended configuration as outlined in this manual.
Contact Nokia for more information.

9.3 Prerequisite
Complete PDU installation (ANSI market) or TRU installation (ETSI market).

All power must be turned off at the source.

9.4 Recommended tools


• Thomas & Betts TBM 2, 5, 8, or Hydraulic Tool No. 13642 or TBM15
• Nokia PN: 1AB035020089 (6AWG) ground lugs or equivalent
• Nokia PN: 304-0749-000, Amp Inc. PN: 322051 (6AWG) wire or equivalent

9.5 Procedure

1. On all power supplies, verify that the power switches are set to OFF.

2. Verify that the main CO breakers for A and B power are OFF. If not, set them to
OFF.

3. Remove the PDU front cover.

130 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Route and terminate station ground and office
battery power cables

4. Is the rectifier source of power at the site bonded to the common bonding
network (CBN) of the building?
a. If yes, go to step 9.
b. If no, go to step 5.

5. Are battery inputs positive or negative voltage?


a. If positive, go to step 6.
b. If negative, go to step 8.

6. For floating rectifier system with positive voltage, strap E-37 to E-38 and E-40 to
E-41. See Figure 58.

7. Go to step 9.

8. For floating rectifier system with negative voltage, strap E-39 to E-38 and E-42
to E-41. See Figure 58.

Figure 58 PDU strap detail

9. Route station ground cable

Danger: Before performing this procedure, ensure office power is turned OFF at source.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 131


Route and terminate station ground and office Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual
battery power cables

10. Route station ground cable from overhead cable tray to radio rack per cable run
list.

11. On standard rack, connect station ground cable to topside of standard rack. See
Figure 59.
On seismic rack, connect station ground cable to topside of seismic rack. See
Figure 60.

12. On both standard rack and seismic racks, the preferred method is to insert
ground cable directly crimp lug on cable. See Figure 61.

Note: On seismic rack, remove the paint from the rack where the ground lug is to be
installed.

Figure 59 Station ground standard rack detail

132 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Route and terminate station ground and office
battery power cables

Figure 60 Station ground seismic rack detail

Figure 61 Station ground crimp lug detail

13. Route office battery cables

Danger: Before performing this procedure, ensure office power is turned OFF at source.

14. See Figure 62 for wire size/wire length/current drain relationship. Use the
following between the office battery power source and the power distribution
unit:

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 133


Route and terminate station ground and office Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual
battery power cables

Figure 62 Wire sizing chart

Warning: When torquing on A and B battery studs on PDU do not exceed 35 inch
lbs. Excessive torque will cause studs to become stripped.

15. Route the power cables (-) from office battery source to power distribution unit
in rack. See Figure 63 and Figure 64.

Note: The mechanical lugs provided with the PDU on TB2 and TB4 do not meet Nokia
quality standards. Nokia recommends discarding these lugs and replacing them with
compression lugs or lugs as specified by local practices and procedures.

16. Connect the power cables (-) to NEG A and NEG B BATTERY studs at the
power distribution unit in the rack. See Figure 63 and Figure 64.

134 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Route and terminate station ground and office
battery power cables

Figure 63 PDU battery interconnect detail

Figure 64 PDU office battery routing detail

17. Route the return cables (+) from the battery source to the power distribution unit
in the rack. See Figure 63 and Figure 64.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 135


Route and terminate station ground and office Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual
battery power cables

Note: The mechanical lugs provided with the PDU on TB1 and TB3 do not meet Nokia
quality standards. Nokia recommends discarding these lugs and replacing them with
compression lugs or lugs as specified by local practices and procedures.

18. Connect to the POS A and POS B BATTERY studs at the power distribution unit.
See Figure 63 and Figure 64.

19. Replace the PDU front panel.


The procedure is completed.

136 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Hardware installation for the MPR-e solution

10 Hardware installation for the MPR-e


solution

Warning: To ensure continuity and avoid short circuit, all cables / connectors connections
such as RJ45, Coaxial, Ethernet, or Optical Fiber made in the field have to be verified and
checked with a Cable tester. The waterproofing must be also checked.

10.1 MPR-e standalone: Installation &


interconnection overview
This section describes the supported MPR-e standalone hardware configurations.
Reference Figure 65 through Figure 75.

Warning: Some preliminary activities may be necessary before the MPR-e can be installed
on the pole mounting (reference MPR-e in Single NE mode with 7705 SAR: installation &
interconnection overview).

Figure 65 Station interconnections with MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/9558HC/MC (Power Injector box/


MPT Extended Power Unit)

Indoor
Battery #1 2-wire cable
-48V Power Injector
Box/MPT
Extended Power Electrical Ethernet cable
Battery #2 2-wire cable
Unit DC + Data
-48V
Data

Ethernet
connection

GE
GEthernet
Generic Device

23086

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 137


Hardware installation for the MPR-e solution Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

Figure 66 Station interconnections with MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/9558HC/MC (Power Injector card


and 7705 SAR)

SAR
Power Injector Electrical Ethernet cable
Plug-in DC + Data
Data
Ethernet
connection
GE
GEthernet
Generic Device

24988

Figure 67 Station interconnections with MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/9558HC (MPT power unit)

N-RJ45
Adapter Cord

MPT Power Coaxial power supply cable


Unit
Optical Ethernet cable

GE
GEthernet
Generic Device

WebEML
23088

138 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Hardware installation for the MPR-e solution

Figure 68 Station interconnections with MPT ODU (MPT Extended Power Unit)

N-RJ45
Adapter Cord

MPT Extended Coaxial power supply cable


Power Unit
Optical Ethernet cable

GE
GEthernet
Generic Device

WebEML
23089

Figure 69 Station interconnections with MPT-HC/HC-HQAM - 1+0 repeater configuration

Optical Ethernet cable

N to RJ45
Adapter Cord

Coaxial
cable
Pigtail + Low
Pass Filter +
Lightning Arrestor

Battery -48V

24986

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 139


Hardware installation for the MPR-e solution Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

Figure 70 Station interconnections with MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/9558HC- 1+0 repeater


configuration (MPT Power Unit)

Optical Ethernet cable

N to RJ45
Adapter Cord

Coaxial
cable

MPT Power Unit

24985

Figure 71 Station interconnections with MPT-HC/XP/HC-HQAM/XP-HQAM/9558HC - 1+0


repeater configuration (MPT Extended Power Unit)

Optical Ethernet cable

N to RJ45
Adapter Cord

Coaxial
cable

MPT Extended Power Unit

24987

140 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Hardware installation for the MPR-e solution

Figure 72 Station interconnections with MPT-HC/HC-HQAM - co-channel XPIC (Power Injector


box)

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 141


Hardware installation for the MPR-e solution Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

Figure 73 Station interconnections with MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM - co-channel XPIC


(MPT Extended Power Unit)

142 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Hardware installation for the MPR-e solution

Figure 74 Station interconnections with MPT-HC/HC-HQAM - co-channel XPIC

Figure 75 Station interconnection with MPT-HC/XP/HC-HQAM/XP-HQAM/9558HC - 1+0


repeater configuration

MPR-e MPR-e
Data

DC DC
MSS-4/8 MSS-4/8

MPT Power Unit /


MPT Extended Power Unit /
Battery

23093

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 143


Hardware installation for the MPR-e solution Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

10.2 MPR-e in Single NE mode with 7705 SAR:


installation & interconnection overview
The figures in this section describes supported hardware configurations of MPR-e in
Single NE mode with 7705 SAR. Reference Figure 76 through Figure 88.

Figure 76 Station interconnections with MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/MC (Power Injector card)

Electrical Ethernet Cable


DC + DATA
MPT
CSM CSM
SAR
PMC CSM CSM
PC PIC
CSM CSM
23218

Figure 77 Station interconnections with MPT-HC/HC-HQAM (MPT power unit)

MPT power unit


Coaxial power supply cable N-RJ45 adaptor Cord

Optical Ethernet Cable

MPT
CSM CSM
SAR
PMC CSM
PC CSM CSM
23219

Figure 78 Station interconnections with MPT-HLC

Optical Ethernet Cable


DATA
MPT-HLC
CSM
SAR
PMC
PC
24959

144 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Hardware installation for the MPR-e solution

Figure 79 Station interconnections with MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM (MPT Extended


Power Unit)

DC + DATA with
Housekeeping Alarms
MPT

CSM CSM

PMC CSM
PC CSM
MPT Extended
power unit

Housekeeping Alarm
3EM24105AA or
(3CC52201AA)
23220

Figure 80 Alternative station interconnections with MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM (MPT


Extended Power Unit)

MPT

Optical Data
Coaxial power
supply cable
CSM CSM
SAR
PMC CSM
PC N-RJ-45
CSM adapter Cord
MPT Extended
power unit

RJ45 DSub
3CC52201AA
3EM24105AA
25534

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 145


Hardware installation for the MPR-e solution Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

Figure 81 Station interconnections with MPT-HC/HC-HQAM - co-channel XPIC (7705 SAR)

Electrical Ethernet cable DC + DATA

Electrical Ethernet cable DC + DATA


CSM MPT
7705 SAR
CSM PIC
CSM
DATA
Ethernet
connection
GE
Ethernet
generic device

PC
25497

Figure 82 Station interconnections with MPT-HC/HC-HQAM - co-channel XPIC (Power Injector


Card and 7705 SAR)

DC + DATA

CSM CSM
MPT
CSM CSM
PIC
PC CSM CSM

23221

Figure 83 Station interconnections with MPT-HC/HC-HQAM – 1+1 Hot Standby

DC + DATA

CSM CSM
MPT
PMC CSM
PMC
PC PIC CSM

23222

Note: For more detailed information on PMC ports pair supporting 1+1, see the 7705 SAR
documentation for the latest OS.

146 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Hardware installation for the MPR-e solution

Note: This solution applies with both the MPT Power unit and the MPT Extended power unit;
see Station interconnections with MPT-HC/HC-HQAM (MPT power unit) and Station
interconnections with MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM (MPT Extended Power Unit) for
connectivity reference for these solutions.

10.3 MSS-1c installation & interconnection


overview
The available different installations are shown in Figure 84, Figure 85 and Figure 86
for MPT-HC/MC/HC-HQAM, and in Figure 87 and Figure 88 for MPT-XP/XP-HQAM.

Note: To verify continuity and avoid short circuit, all cables/connectors connections made
on the field have to be verified and checked with Cable tester.

Figure 84 Station interconnections with MPT-MC/HC/HC-HQAM/9558HC (one cable)

Electrical Ethernet cable

MPT #1 (DC+DATA)

MSS-1c

CT Port

WebEML
25042

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 147


Hardware installation for the MPR-e solution Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

Figure 85 Station interconnections with MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/9558HC (optical cable + coax.


power supply cable to MSS-1c)

RJ45/N Coaxial power supply cable


Pigtail
Optical Ethernet cable

MPT #1 (electrical) MPT #1 (optical)

MSS-1c

CT Port

WebEML
25043

Figure 86 Station interconnections with MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/9558HC (optical cable + coax.


power supply cable to Station battery)

Pigtail + Low Pass N-RJ45


Filter+ Lighting Arrestor Adapter Cord

Battery Coaxial power supply cable


-48V
Optical Ethernet cable

MPT #1

MSS-1c

CT Port

WebEML
25044

148 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Hardware installation for the MPR-e solution

Figure 87 Station interconnections with MPT-XP/XP-HQAM (PFoE)

Electrical Ethernet cable (DC+DATA)

MPT Extended
Power Unit

MPT #1

MSS-1c

CT Port

WebEML
25045

Figure 88 Station interconnections with MPT-XP/XP-HQAM (optical cable to MSS-1c + coax.


power supply cable to MPT Extended Power Unit)

N-RJ45
Adapter Cord

MPT Extended Coaxial power supply cable


Power Unit
Optical Ethernet cable

MPT #1

MSS-1c

CT Port

WebEML
25046

10.4 Hardware installation


• Rack installation for MSS-1c
• MSS-1c installation

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 149


Hardware installation for the MPR-e solution Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

10.4.1 Rack installation for MSS-1c

10.4.1.1 General

MSS-1c can be installed in 4 different ways (see Rack installation):

• ETSI market:
− ETSI (WTD) rack (21")
− Laborack (19")
• ANSI market:
− 7.0 Ft Aluminum Rack
− 7.0 Ft Seismic rack

For each of the above type of installation special mechanical supporting fixtures are
available.

Special mechanical fittings are provided for this type of installation, depending on the
width of rack (19" or 21"). The examples show the fittings used to insert the
equipment in ETSI racks (21"). For installation in 21" racks the adapters are needed.

• Elevated operating ambient - If installed in a closed or multi-unit rack assembly,


the operating ambient temperature of the rack environment may be greater than
room ambient. Therefore, consideration should be given to installing the
equipment in an environment compatible with the maximum ambient
temperature (Tma) specified by the manufacturer.
• Reduced air flow - Installation of the equipment in a rack should be such that the
amount of air flow required for safe operation of the equipment is not
compromised.
• Mechanical loading - Mounting of the equipment in the rack should be such that
a hazardous condition is not achieved due to uneven mechanical loading.
• Circuit overloading - Consideration should be given to the connection of the
equipment to the supply circuit and the effect that overloading of the circuits
might have on over current protection and supply wiring. Appropriate
consideration of equipment nameplate ratings should be used when addressing
this concern.
• Reliable earthing - Reliable earthing of rack-mounted equipment should be
maintained.
• Particular attention should be given to supply connections other than direct
connections to the branch circuit (for example, use of power strips).

150 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Hardware installation for the MPR-e solution

10.4.2 MSS-1c installation


Special brackets are provided depending on the equipment composition and on the
width of the rack (19” or 21”).

Two types of brackets are available: 1U to support one box and 1.3U to support one
or two boxes side by side.

MSS-1c and the FAN unit must be first installed on the bracket by using the screws,
provided with the brackets, and then the assembly must be installed on the rack.

Each MSS-1c shall be connected to a fuse or a breaker on a customer power


distribution box. The recommended value is 3 Amps.

Note: Disconnect all power supply cords before servicing.

Figure 89 to Figure 92 show the four installation configurations available for


installation in 19” rack.

• 1) One MSS-1c (Left mounting) + bracket kit (1U)

Figure 89 One MSS-1c, left mounting

• 2) One MSS-1c (Right mounting) + Bracket kit (1U)

Figure 90 One MSS-1c, right mounting

• 3) Two MSS-1c + 1 bracket (1.3U)

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 151


Hardware installation for the MPR-e solution Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

Figure 91 Two MSS-1c

• 4) One MSS-1c + one FAN unit + 1 bracket (1.3U)

Figure 92 One MSS-1c and one FAN

For the installation in 21” rack the 21” Adapter kit must be added to each 19”
installation configuration.

10.4.2.1 MSS-1c grounding

The assembly must be grounded by using the ground screw present on the bracket,
as shown in Figure 93 and Figure 94.

The section cable (wire) is 6 mm² (9AWG) (Yellow/Green).

Figure 93 Grounding

152 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Hardware installation for the MPR-e solution

Figure 94 Grounding

10.4.2.2 Power supply cable

Figure 95 Power/return connection

A power cable (2x1 mm2 - AWG17) is supplied. Power cable gauge smaller than 2x1
mm2 (AWG 17) is not allowed for proper operation of the MSS-1c.

The blue wire must be connected to -48 Vdc (live); the black wire to +/Return.

The cable must be screwed to the MSS-1c and to the TRU.

Note: The power source battery is isolated from AC power main feeds.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 153


Hardware installation for the MPR-e solution Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

10.4.2.3 Installation of more than one MSS-1c in one rack

Several MSS-1c can be stacked in one rack, as shown in Figure 96, Figure 97, and
Figure 98.

Figure 96 Installation solution

Figure 97 Installation solution

154 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Hardware installation for the MPR-e solution

Figure 98 Installation solution

In case of Figure 96 no space is necessary from one MSS-1c assembly to another


assembly; in case of Figure 97 and Figure 98 it is necessary to space the two
assemblies of 1/2 U.

10.4.2.4 E1 external connections (ETSI market)

The E1 streams must be connected to the available three E1 distributors by using the
special cables as shown in Figure 99, Figure 100 and Figure 101.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 155


Hardware installation for the MPR-e solution Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

Figure 99 Interconnections to connector support 1.6/5.6 75 ohm panel 1U

(*): 8xE1s used with MSS-1c 16PDH. Otherwise, only the first 2xE1s are used.

Figure 100 Interconnections to connector support BNC 75 ohm Panel 1U

(*): 8xE1s used with MSS-1c 16PDH. Otherwise, only the first 2xE1s are used.

156 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Hardware installation for the MPR-e solution

Figure 101 Interconnections to support 19 Inch modules 120 ohm Panel 3U

(*): 8xE1s used with MSS-1c 16PDH. Otherwise, only the first 2xE1s are used.

The interconnections to the E1 distributor are shown in Figure 102 and Figure 103.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 157


Hardware installation for the MPR-e solution Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

Figure 102 Interconnections to the E1 distributor (part 1)

Figure 103 Interconnections to the E1 distributor (part 2)

158 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Hardware installation for the MPR-e solution

10.4.2.5 T1 external connections (ANSI market)

The T1 streams must be connected to demarcation panel by using 37 pin D patch


panel cables as shown in Figure 100

Cables are available in various lengths as listed in Table 10.

T1 external interface cable pinout are provided in Table 11.

Warning: The intra-building ports of the equipment or subassembly must use shielded
intra-building cabling/wiring that is grounded at both ends.

Figure 104 Interconnections to T1 connectors 37 position D-Sub cable

Table 10 T1 external interface pinout detail

Part Number Description Qty

3EM23110AA 37 pin D Cable Assembly, 15 Ft Up to 2 per MSS-1c shelf

3EM23110AB 37 pin D Cable Assembly, 30 Ft

3EM23110AC 37 pin D Cable Assembly, 50 Ft

3EM23110AD 37 pin D Cable Assembly, 100 Ft

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 159


Hardware installation for the MPR-e solution Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

Table 11 T1 external interface pinout detail

Pair From Wire color Function

1 Jx-12 White/Blue Output1/9 - Tip (XMT)

Jx-30 Blue/White Output1/9 - Ring (XMT)

2 Jx-13 White/Orange Output2/10 - Tip (XMT)

Jx-31 Orange/White Output2/10 - Ring (XMT)

3 Jx-14 White/Green Output3/11 - Tip (XMT)

Jx-32 Green/White Output3/11 - Ring (XMT)

4 Jx-15 White/Brown Output4/12 - Tip (XMT)

Jx-33 Brown/White Output4/12 - Ring (XMT)

5 Jx-16 White/Slate Output5/13 - Tip (XMT)

Jx-34 Slate/White Output5/13 - Ring (XMT)

6 Jx-17 Red/Blue Output6/14 - Tip (XMT)

Jx-35 Blue/Red Output6/14 - Ring (XMT)

7 Jx-18 Red/Orange Output7/15 - Tip (XMT)

Jx-36 Orange/Red Output7/15 - Ring (XMT)

8 Jx-19 Red/Green Output8/16 - Tip (XMT)

Jx-37 Green/Red Output8/16 - Ring (XMT)

9 Jx-2 Red/Brown Input1/9 - Tip (RCV)

Jx-21 Brown/Red Input1/9 - Ring (RCV)

10 Jx-3 Red/Slate Input2/10 - Tip (RCV)

Jx-22 Slate/Red Input2/10 - Ring (RCV)

11 Jx-4 Black/Blue Input3/11 - Tip (RCV)

Jx-23 Blue/Black Input3/11 - Ring (RCV)

12 Jx-5 Black/Orange Input4/12 - Tip (RCV)

Jx-24 Orange/Black Input4/12 - Ring (RCV)

13 Jx-6 Black/Green Input5/13 - Tip (RCV)

Jx-25 Green/Black Input5/13 - Ring (RCV)

160 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Hardware installation for the MPR-e solution

Table 11 T1 external interface pinout detail (Continued)

Pair From Wire color Function

14 Jx-7 Black/Brown Input6/14 - Tip (RCV)

Jx-26 Brown/Black Input6/14 - Ring (RCV)

15 Jx-8 Black/Slate Input7/15 - Tip (RCV)

Jx-27 Slate/Black Input7/15 - Ring (RCV)

16 Jx-9 Yellow/Blue Input8/16 - Tip (RCV)

Jx-28 Blue/Yellow Input8/16 - Ring (RCV)

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 161


Hardware installation for the MPR-e solution Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

162 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual MSS-O installation

11 MSS-O installation

11.1 Purpose
This chapter describes how to physically mount the MSS-O indoors or outdoors.

11.2 General
The MSS-O can be installed indoors or outdoors. Two versions are available:

• AC version: powered at 110/230 Vac


• DC version: powered at 48 Vdc full floating

The following safety precautions must be taken when installing the MSS-O:

• The power installation must be performed with qualified electrician and followed
with National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70 and Canadian Electrical Code,
Part I, CSA C22.1.
• A disconnect device must be provided to disconnect the equipment from the
mains supply for servicing.
• A short-circuit backup protection must be provided in the building installation.

The installation kit, which is provided with the equipment, enables the placement of
an MSS-O on a 114 mm pole or its fixation on a wall.

Nokia provides expert Installation Services for installations that have different
requirements from the recommended configuration as outlined in this manual.
Contact Nokia for more information.

If the solution described in this chapter does not conform to local codes, a connection
box must be installed near the Nokia equipment and Nokia cable must be connected
to the connection box.

Warning: MSS1/MSS-O output connectors for supplying power to MPT family ODU units
(port 1 and 2) are NOT to be considered as ordinary Power Over Ethernet connectors as
they can supply up to 2 A. For this reason only the dedicated cable (ALU code
1AC016760006) can be connected to these ports. WARNING DO NOT CONNECT
ORDINARY POE CABLES TO THESE PORTS.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 163


MSS-O installation Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

Note: The above Warning applies to MPT radio applications where the Ethernet port
provides power to an MPT ODU unit. In these applications the 1AC016760006 cable MUST
be used.

11.2.1 Equipment powering

11.2.1.1 MSS-O AC version

The power cable 1AC052600002 (provided separately) must be used. It is a three


conductors (section 1.5 mm2) power cable for outdoor application. The cable must
be terminated with the power connector 1AB418220003 contained in the
3DB19158AAAB kit.

The instructions for the connector installation are available in the leaflet included in
the connector plastic bag: see Figure 113.

11.2.1.2 MSS-O DC version

The power cable 1AC057660001 (provided separately) must be used with the DC
version. It is a two conductors (section 2.5 mm2) shielded power cable for outdoor
application. The cable shall be terminated with the power connector 1AB418220003
contained in the 3DB19158AAAB kit.

Important Notice: The instructions for the connector installation contained in the
connector plastic bag refer to the AC power cable installation and must not be
considered in this case.

164 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual MSS-O installation

11.3 Prerequisite
Complete Rack installation.

11.4 Recommended tools


• MSS-O Mounting Kit:
− Nokia PN: 3DB19158AAAB. The kit includes the power connector.
• Power cable:
− Nokia PN: 1AC052600002 for AC version
− Nokia PN: 1AC057660001 for DC version
• Phillips screwdriver, #2

11.5 Procedure
MSS-O installation

1. The MSS-O installation kit enables the placement of an MSS-O on a 114 mm


pole or on a wall. The kit components are shown in Figure 105.
Figure 106 and Figure 107 show the installation instructions for pole and wall
mounting.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 165


MSS-O installation Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

Figure 105 3DB19158AAAB installation kit components

2. Figure 106 shows the installation instructions for pole mounting.

Figure 106 Pole mounting of MSS-O

3. Figure 107 shows the installation instructions for wall mounting.

166 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual MSS-O installation

Figure 107 Wall mounting of MSS-O

Equipment grounding

4. The MSS-O housing must be grounded using a 16 mm2 cable. The ground cable
(part number 1AC001060084, provided separately) must be crimped to the two
holes lug (terminal plug) contained in the 3DB19158AAAB kit. The lug must be
screwed to the MSS-O housing as shown in Figure 108.

Figure 108 MSS-O grounding

The other end of the ground cable must be connected to the closest ground
point.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 167


MSS-O installation Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

5. The shielding braid of the electrical data cables must be grounded with a
grounding kit. Two grounding kits are available for the purpose:
− 1AD040130004: single cable standard grounding kit
− 3CC50251AA: up to three cable grounding kit with supplementary GND
point

Figure 109 Grounding of data cable through the 1AD040130004 kit

Figure 110 Termination of ground cables to a ground point

168 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual MSS-O installation

Figure 111 Grounding of the data cables using the 3CC50271AA grounding kit

6. In case of a specific request for MSS-O installation to be compliant to IEEE


1613, the use of the 3CC50271AA GND kit is compulsory. In this case the
distance between the grounding clamps and the data port on the MSS-O must
not exceed 30 cm; see Figure 112.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 169


MSS-O installation Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

Figure 112 Installation of the 3CC50271AA grounding kit for compliance with IEEE 1613

7. In case of DC powering (see MSS-O DC version) a shielded power cable is


used. Either of the following can be used to ground the cable:
a. The 1AD040130004 kit, installed at a distance less than one meter from the
connector; see Figure 109.
b. A free position of the 3CC50271AA kit, as shown in Figure 112, if it is not
needed for data cables.
Power connection for AC version

8. Install the power connector according to the instructions found in the kit; see
Figure 113.

170 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual MSS-O installation

Figure 113 Installation instructions for the AC power connector

Special care must be taken in placing the right conductors in the appropriate
terminal blocks. See Figure 114 to identify the correct positioning.

Figure 114 Power cable conductors placement on the connector terminal blocks

Power connection for DC version

9. The 1AC057660001 cable must be terminated with the power connector


1AB418220003, found in the 3DB19158AAAB kit.
Install the connector on the cable as shown in the following figures:

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 171


MSS-O installation Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

Figure 115 Assemble connector 1AB41822003

172 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual MSS-O installation

Figure 116 Protect the braid with the thermoretractable tube

Note: The cable braid must be naked and modeled to make it pluggable on the
protective Earth/Ground terminal as in the picture. The thermoretractable tube
contained in the 3DB19158AAAB installation kit must be used to protect it.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 173


MSS-O installation Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

Figure 117 Place the insert assembly in the cover housing

Data connection on MSS-O

10. Four ports are available on an MSS-O unit for data connections. Figure 118
shows all the MSS-O connections in a unit mounted on a pole. In particular it
identifies each data port’s access point.

174 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual MSS-O installation

Figure 118 Data connection on MSS-O

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 175


MSS-O installation Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

176 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual MSS-1 shelf installation

12 MSS-1 shelf installation

12.1 Purpose
This chapter describes how to physically mount the MSS-1 unit into the rack.

12.2 General

Warning: Possibility of equipment damage. MSS1/MSS-O output connectors for supplying


power to MPT family ODU units (port 1 and 2) are NOT to be considered as ordinary Power
Over Ethernet connectors as they can supply up to 2 A. For this reason only the dedicated
cable (P/N 1AC016760006) can be connected to these ports. WARNING DO NOT
CONNECT ORDINARY POE CABLES TO THESE PORTS.

Note: The above Warning applies to MPT radio applications where the Ethernet port
provides power to an MPT ODU. In these applications the 1AC016760006 cable MUST be
used.

12.2.1 Space requirements


The MSS-1 shelf requires a one-half rack increment. The typical installation mounts
the MSS-1 shelf in rack increment 24. Rack increments 20 through 27 are reserved
to run cables, mount patch panels, and for the type N adapter bracket and cable
standoffs.

If the adjacent module/unit is an active one (for example, MSS-4 or MSS-8) one unit
on the rack must be left free above and below the MSS-1 unit to be mounted.

If the adjacent module/unit is a passive one, half a unit free above and below the
MSS-1 is sufficient for cable routing.

The MSS-1 can also be mounted vertically in the rack, with a cooling path from
bottom to top.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 177


MSS-1 shelf installation Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

12.2.1.1 Multiple MSS-1 units

Several MSS-1s can be stacked in one rack. Positioning will be restricted only by the
cooling constraints (1U free below and above each MSS-1 unit).

12.2.2 MSS-1 unit


Figure 119 MSS-1 unit

Note: The MSS-1 does not include a subrack. Mounting brackets are included with the
MSS-1.

12.2.3 Wall Mounting Installation


The IDU wall mounting kits 10U and 3U can be used for wall installation. See the
9500 MPR Product Information Manual for part numbers.

The kit includes:

• Two brackets
• Four fixing for the brackets
− M6x50 socket cap screws
− Onduflex washers
− Expansion bolt

178 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual MSS-1 shelf installation

Figure 120 Mechanical Support 10U (Two brackets)

Figure 121 Installation kit to fix the mechanical support

The mechanical support must be grounded using the subrack grounding kit.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 179


MSS-1 shelf installation Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

12.3 Procedure
This chapter provides the following procedures:

• To horizontally install an MSS-1


• Manage E1 external connections for the ETSI market

For procedures to install power interfaces (Power Injector Box, MPT power unit, MPT
extended power unit, and AC power converter (ETSI market), use the procedures in
Power interfaces installation chapter after installing the MSS-1 unit.

12.3.1 Prerequisites
Observe the following:

• Complete Rack installation procedures


• Observe spacing requirements define in the section: Space requirements

12.3.2 Required Equipment and Tools


• MSS-1 Shelf Kit:
− MSS-1 Shelf, 17 AWG 2-conductor wire
• The MSS-1 is supplied with a mounting kit that includes brackets for a 19” rack.
For a 21” rack installation, an additional bracket kit is required.
• Rack screws, Nokia PN: 330-2882-030, Qty 2 per shelf MSS-1 shelf P/O MSS-1
Shelf kit
• Phillips screwdriver, #2

180 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual MSS-1 shelf installation

12.3.3 To horizontally install an MSS-1

1. Install the rack mounting brackets.

Figure 122 MSS-1 Mounting Kit

2. Position the MSS-1 shelf in the rack according to site documentation. Reference
Figure 123.

Figure 123 MSS-1 installation and constraints

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 181


MSS-1 shelf installation Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

3. Hold the MSS-1 shelf in place and install the two rack screws. See Figure 124.

Figure 124 MSS-1 shelf screw locations

4. Tighten the rack screws.

5. The MSS-1 unit must be grounded through the ground screw present on the left
bracket, as shown in Figure 125. The section cable (wire) is 6 mm² (9AWG)
(Yellow/Green).

Figure 125 MSS-1 grounding

12.3.4 Manage E1 external connections for the ETSI


market
Sixteen E1 streams are provided by the MSS-1 through the SCSI female connector
on the front panel.

The E1 streams can be connected to the available E1 distributors provided with the
SCSI male connector or to customer distribution systems provided with the SCSI
male connector.

182 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual MSS-1 shelf installation

Thirty-two E1 available distributors can be used to manage two MSS-1 units’ E1


streams (see Figure 126 for an example).

Figure 126 MSS-1 E1 external connections

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 183


MSS-1 shelf installation Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

184 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual MSS-4/8 and MPT-HL/HLC shelf installation

13 MSS-4/8 and MPT-HL/HLC shelf


installation

13.1 Purpose
This chapter describes how to physically mount the MSS-4/8 and MPT-HL shelves
into the rack.

13.2 General
The following provides requirements and constraints that should be reviewed prior to
beginning the installation.

13.2.1 Space requirements and mount options (MSS-4/8)


The MSS-8 shelf requires two rack increments. The typical installation mounts the
MSS-8 shelf in rack increments 24 and 25. Rack increments 20 to 27 are reserved
to run cables, mount patch panels, and for the type N adapter bracket and cable
standoffs.

The MSS-4 shelf requires one rack increment. The typical installation mounts the
MSS-4 shelf in rack increment 24. Rack increments 20 through 27 are reserved to
run cables, mount patch panels, and for the type N adapter bracket and cable
standoffs.

The MSS-4/8 shelf provides two rack mounting depth options: flush mount or 5-inch
projection. The 5-inch projection is the factory default. The 5-inch projection must be
utilized with an MSS-4 or MSS-8 to accommodate stacking filter wave guide brackets
associated with the MPT-HL shelf applications.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 185


MSS-4/8 and MPT-HL/HLC shelf installation Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

13.2.2 Space requirements and mount options (MPT-HL)


The MPT-HL shelf requires two and one-half rack increments. Up to eight MPT-HL
shelves can be mounted in a rack. The typical installation reserves rack increments
20 to 27 for MSS-4/8 shelf and supporting equipment.

The MPT-HL shelf provides two rack mounting depth options: flush mount or 5-inch
projection. The 5-inch projection is the factory default. The 5-inch projection must be
utilized to accommodate stacking filter wave guide brackets associated with the
MPT-HL shelf applications.

13.2.3 MSS subracks


Figure 127 MSS-8 Subrack

Figure 128 MSS-4 Subrack

186 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual MSS-4/8 and MPT-HL/HLC shelf installation

13.2.4 Wall Mounting Installation


The IDU wall mounting kits 10U and 3U can be used for wall installation. See the
9500 MPR Product Information Manual for part numbers.

The kit includes:

• Two brackets
• Four fixing for the brackets
− M6x50 socket cap screws
− Onduflex washers
− Expansion bolt

Figure 129 Mechanical Support 10U (Two brackets)

Figure 130 Installation kit to fix the mechanical support

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 187


MSS-4/8 and MPT-HL/HLC shelf installation Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

Figure 131 MSS 8 Fixed on wall mounting

The mechanical support must be grounded using the subrack grounding kit.

13.3 Procedure
This chapter provides the following procedures:

• To horizontally install an MSS-4/8 shelf


• To install an MPT-HL shelf

For procedures to install power interfaces (Power Injector Box, MPT power unit, MPT
extended power unit, and AC power converter (ETSI market), proceed to: Power
interfaces installation chapter after installing the shelf.

13.3.1 Prerequisites
• Complete Rack installation.
• Observe spacing requirements define in sections:
− Space requirements and mount options (MSS-4/8)
− Space requirements and mount options (MPT-HL)

13.3.2 Required Equipment and Tools


• MSS-8 Shelf Kit:
− Includes Fan module
− Includes Enhanced Fan module with external alarm support

188 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual MSS-4/8 and MPT-HL/HLC shelf installation

• MSS-4 Shelf Kit:


− Includes Fan module
• MPT-HL Shelf Kits; Un-populated
− Single Transceiver
− Dual Transceiver
• Direct connection to office power: For MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/9558HC Transceiver
applications connected to Core-E, or EAS and power is provided through direct
office power connection:
− Wall Mount Support bracket
• Rack screws, Nokia PN: 330-2882-030, Qty 4 per shelf MSS-4/8 shelf P/O MSS-
/4/8 Shelf and MPT-HL Shelf Kit
• Phillips screwdriver, #2

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 189


MSS-4/8 and MPT-HL/HLC shelf installation Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

13.3.3 To horizontally install an MSS-4/8 shelf

1. For MSS-4/8 shelf set the shelf rack mounting depth to flush mount or 5-inch
projection according to site documentation.

2. Position the MSS-4/8 shelf in the rack according to site documentation. Typically
there are three rack spaces above and two rack spaces below the shelf
available. See Figure 132.

Figure 132 MSS-4/8 shelf mounting detail

3. Hold the MSS-4/8 shelf in place and install the four rack screws (2 on each side).
See Figure 133.

Figure 133 9500 MPR MSS-4/8 shelf screw locations

190 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual MSS-4/8 and MPT-HL/HLC shelf installation

4. Tighten the rack screws.

5. The subrack must be grounded using the ground screw present on the front
panel of the bracket on the right side.
The section cable (wire) must be a 6 mm² (9AWG) (Yellow/Green).

13.3.4 To install an MPT-HL shelf

1. Set the shelf rack mounting depth to flush mount or 5-inch projection according
to site documentation.

2. Position the MPT-HL shelf in the rack according to site documentation.

3. Hold the MPT-HL shelf in place and install the four rack screws. See Figure 134.

Figure 134 MPT-HL shelf screw locations

4. Tighten the rack screws.

5. The subrack must be grounded using the ground screw present on the front
panel of the bracket on the right side.
The section cable (wire) must be a 6 mm² (9AWG) (Yellow/Green).

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 191


MSS-4/8 and MPT-HL/HLC shelf installation Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

192 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Power interfaces installation

14 Power interfaces installation

14.1 Purpose
This chapter describes how to physically mount the Power Injector Box, MPT Power
Unit, and MPT Extended Power Unit into the rack. It also defines how to utilize an AC
converter for ETSI applications.

14.2 General

Note: This chapter is required for the following site applications:

When the MSS-1/4/8 shelf power cables are NOT factory installed in the rack.

•When the MPT-HL shelf power cables are NOT factory installed in the rack.
•When MPT-MC/HC/HC-HQAM/9558HC is connected to the Core-E card, or EAS cards
and is connected using PFoE to the Power Injector box.
•When MPT-MC/HC/HC-HQAM/9558HC is connected to the Core-E card, or EAS cards
and is connected using the MPT Power Unit.
•When MPT-MC/HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM/9558HC is connected to the Core-E card, or
EAS cards and is connected using MPT Extended Power Unit.
Unless otherwise stated in this chapter, EAS implies both P8ETH and EASv2. When a
section is applicable only to P8ETH or EASv2, these terms will be used.

Warning: Possibility of equipment damage. MSS1/MSS-O output connectors for supplying


power to MPT family ODU units (port 1 and 2) are NOT to be considered as ordinary Power
Over Ethernet connectors as they can supply up to 2 A. For this reason only the dedicated
cable (P/N 1AC016760006) can be connected to these ports. WARNING DO NOT
CONNECT ORDINARY POE CABLES TO THESE PORTS.

Note: The above Warning applies to MPT radio applications where the Ethernet port
provides power to an MPT ODU. In these applications the 1AC016760006 cable MUST be
used.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 193


Power interfaces installation Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

14.2.1 Power injector box


The Power Injector Box/Bracket utilizes a flush mount. The Power Injector box
bracket supports up to two Power Injector boxes and requires 1.3 rack increments.

The following considerations apply when using a power injector:

• Elevated Operating Ambient - If installed in a closed or multi-unit rack


assembly, the operating ambient temperature of the rack environment may be
greater than room ambient temperature. Therefore, consideration should be
given to installing the equipment in an environment compatible with the
maximum ambient temperature (Tma) specified by the manufacturer.
• Reduced Air Flow - Installation of the equipment in a rack should be such that
the amount of air flow required for safe operation of the equipment is not
compromised.
• Mechanical Loading - Mounting of the equipment in the rack should be such
that a hazardous condition is not achieved due to uneven mechanical loading.
• Circuit Overloading - Consideration should be given to the connection of the
equipment to the supply circuit and the effect that overloading of the circuits
might have on over current protection and supply wiring. Appropriate
consideration of equipment nameplate ratings should be used when addressing
this concern.
• Reliable Earthing - Reliable earthing of rack-mounted equipment should be
maintained.
• Particular attention should be given to supply connections other than direct
connections to the branch circuit (e.g. use of power strips).

14.2.2 MPT Power Unit


The MPT Power Unit mounts in the rack to remotely power up to four ODUs.

14.2.3 MPT Extended Power Unit


The MPT Extended Power Unit mounts in the rack to remotely power up to two
ODUs.

194 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Power interfaces installation

14.2.4 AC Power Converter for the ETSI market


For sites where AC Power Supply is requested an optional AC/DC converter is
available.

The AC Power Converter is used to convert AC to DC power for indoor applications


which require up to 250 watts. The AC Power Converter allows for powering of MSS-
1/4/8s, MSS-1, MSS-1c and power units.

Two AC cord sets are supplied with the AC power converter to match North American
and European style AC outlets.

• AC power supply (250W 120/240V AC power converter) – part number


3HE05838AA; see Figure 135.

Figure 135 AC Power Converter

Table 12 AC Power Converter features

Key Description

1 Male 6-pin connector

2 AC cord set1

The connection from the AC converter to the MPR is done using either a subD pigtail
or an O-ring pigtail.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 195


Power interfaces installation Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

14.2.4.1 Connection to MSS-4/8: SubD pigtail

The SubD pigtail is required to connect the AC converter to an MSS-4/8. The a D-


Sub 2 connector connects to the power connection on the MSS-4/8, while the 6-pin
female end connects to the AC converter.

• 7705 AC power converter pigtail - D Sub– part number 3HE05837AA. See


Figure 136.

Figure 136 SubD pigtail for AC Converter (MSS-4/8)

Table 13 AC Power Converter O-Ring Pigtail Cable features

Key Description

1 D-Sub Connector - Male

2 D-Sub Connector - Female

3 Female 6-pin connector

14.2.4.2 Connection to MSS-1, MSS-1c, power injector box, power


unit, and extended power unit: O-ring pigtail

An O-ring pigtail is required to connect the AC converter to an MSS-1, MSS-1c,


power injector box, MPT Power Unit, or MPT Extended Power Unit.

The pigtail O-ring cable must be modified so that the wires can be connected to the
DC power terminal block on the PIB. The other end of the cable (6-pin connector
attaches to the AC power converter. Refer to the procedure: To prepare and connect
the O-Ring Cable to connect AC power converter via the PIB (MSS-1/1c).

• 7705 AC power converter pigtail - O-ring – part number 3HE05837BA. See


Figure 137.

196 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Power interfaces installation

Figure 137 AC Power O-Ring Pigtail

Table 14 AC Power Converter O-Ring Pigtail Cable features

Key Description

1 Ring lug connector (–VDC, black wire)

2 Ring lug connector (+VDC, red wire)

3 Female 6-pin connector

14.2.5 Power Injector card


The Power Injector card can also be used in the MSS-4/8 slot for interconnections
with MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/MC/ 9558HC and the MSS-4/8 Core, P8ETH and EASv2
Ethernet ports.

Figure 138 Power Injector card

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 197


Power interfaces installation Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

14.3 Power interface procedures


This chapter provides the following procedures:

• To install a power injector box


• To install an MPT power unit or MPT extended power unit
• To connect direct office power to MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/9558HC
• To prepare and connect the O-Ring Cable to connect AC power converter via
the PIB (MSS-1/1c)
• To connect AC power converter to the MSS-4/8 using the D Sub cable

14.3.1 Prerequisites
• Complete Rack installation
• The appropriate shelf should be installed:
− MSS-1 shelf installation
− MSS-4/8 and MPT-HL/HLC shelf installation

14.3.2 Recommended Tools


• Power Injector Box: For MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/9558HC Transceiver applications
connected to Core-E, or EAS using Power Injector Box installation:
− Power Injector Bracket
− Power Injector Box
• MPT Power Unit/MPT Extended Power Unit: For MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/9558HC
Transceiver applications connected to Core-E, or EAS using MPT Power Unit/
MPT Extended Power Unit installation:
− MPT Power Unit Bracket
− MPT Power Unit
− MPT Extended Power Unit

198 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Power interfaces installation

• Direct connection to office power: For MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/9558HC Transceiver


applications connected to Core-E, or EAS and power is provided through direct
office power connection:
− Wall Mount Support bracket
• O-ring pigtail conversion
− AC power converter pigtail - O-ring – PN: 3HE05837BA
− Wire cutter
− Wire stripper
• Rack screws, Nokia PN: 330-2882-030, Qty 4 per shelf MSS-4/8 shelf and Qty
2 per shelf MSS-1 shelf P/O MSS-1/4/8 Shelf and MPT-HL Shelf Kit
• Phillips screwdriver, #2

14.3.3 To install a power injector box

1. Install the Power Injector Box on to the bracket using the screws provided with
the bracket.

2. Install the Power Injector Box/Bracket to the 19 inch rack according to site
documentation. For installation in 21 inch rack, use the 21 inch adapter bracket.
See Figure 139 for Power Injector box mounted in 19 inch rack.

Figure 139 Power injector box/bracket mounting detail

3. Tighten the rack screws.

4. The assembly must be grounded by using the ground screw present on the
bracket, as shown in Figure 140.
The section cable (wire) is 6 mm² (9AWG) (Yellow/Green).

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 199


Power interfaces installation Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

Figure 140 Grounding

14.3.4 To install an MPT power unit or MPT extended


power unit

1. Install the MPT Power Unit on to the bracket using the screws provided with the
bracket.

2. Install the MPT Power Unit/Bracket to the 19 inch rack according to site
documentation.

3. Tighten the rack screws.

14.3.5 To connect direct office power to MPT-HC/HC-


HQAM/9558HC

1. Secure the Wall Mount Support bracket according to site documentation. See
Figure 141.

200 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Power interfaces installation

Figure 141 Direct office power support bracket mounting detail

2. Tighten the rack screws.

14.3.6 To prepare and connect the O-Ring Cable to


connect AC power converter via the PIB (MSS-1/1c)
Use this procedure to modify the pigtail O-ring cable by cutting off the output
terminals (the O-ring lug connectors) on the O-ring cable and splicing the open-
ended wires to interface with the DC power terminal block on the PIB.

Note: Not applicable to MSS-4 and MSS-8

Danger: Ensure that the power supply is disconnected from the AC main power feed before
preparing and cutting the DC wires.

1. Cut off the O-ring lugs (items 1 and 2 on the cable in Figure 137) and strip
approximately 0.5 cm of shield from each wire to expose the conductors. See
Figure 142.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 201


Power interfaces installation Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

Figure 142 Modified AC Power O-Ring Pigtail Cable

0.5 cm
(0.2 in)
23094

2. Connect the modified end of the pigtail O-ring cable to the DC inputs on the PIB.
Connect the -VDC (black wire) to the -Batt terminal on the PIB terminal block;
connect the +VDC (red wire) to the +Batt terminal on the PIB terminal block.

3. Connect the male 6-pin connector on the AC Power Converter (item 1 in


Figure 135) to the female 6-pin connector on the pigtail cable (item 3 in
Figure 137).
Plug the AC power converter cord (item 2 in Figure 135) into an AC power outlet.

14.3.7 To connect AC power converter to the MSS-4/8


using the D Sub cable
Use this procedure to connect the AC power converter to an MSS-4/8 using a D Sub
pigtail cable.

Note: Not applicable to MSS-1.

Danger: Ensure that the power supply is disconnected from the AC main power feed.

1. Connect the male 6-pin connector on the AC Power Converter (item 1 in


Figure 135) to the female 6-pin connector on the pigtail cable (item 3 in
Figure 136).
Plug the AC power converter cord (item 2 in Figure 135) into an AC power outlet.

202 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Install MPT-HLS standard in an ETSI rack (ETSI
market)

15 Install MPT-HLS standard in an ETSI rack


(ETSI market)

15.1 Purpose
This section describes how to install 9500 MPR long haul components. For
information about installation in a 9600 LSY rack, see Install MPT-HLS standard in
an LSY rack (ETSI market).

15.2 Prerequisite
The MPT-HLS standard radio requires the 20-slot TRU (3CC50156AAXX). The TRU
installation requirements and procedures are described in TRU installation (ETSI
market).

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 203


Install MPT-HLS standard in an ETSI rack (ETSI Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual
market)

15.3 Procedures
The installation sequence is as follows:

1. Mount TRU and install the required breakers (see Prerequisite)

2. Connect the power cables to the breakers that supply power to the components
in the rack (see Preparing power cabling for MPT-HLS standard components)

3. Install the fan assembly (see MPT-HLS standard fan assembly)

4. Install the MSS and distributor (see MSS-8 and E1 distribution patch panel)

5. 9500 MPR long haul subrack (see 9500 MPR long haul subrack)

6. Install the MPT-HLS modules (see MPT-HLS standard module installation)

7. MPT-HLS module connections (see MPT-HLS standard module connections to


9500 MPR long haul components)

15.3.1 Preparing power cabling for MPT-HLS standard


components
This section describes how to install and route the power cables from the breakers
in the TRU to the dedicated positions in the 21” rack where the planned components
will be installed.

Note: To simplify cabling installation, connect and route the power cabling from the TRU
before you install the remaining components in the ETSI 21” rack.

The cables for the planned components are:

• two cables 2 x 1 mm2 for each fan unit


• two cords 2 x 6 mm2, 4 m long, for each MSS-8
• two cables 2 x 6 mm2 for each half of the 9500 MPR long haul subrack

204 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Install MPT-HLS standard in an ETSI rack (ETSI
market)

The stripping length of the supply cables is 15 mm for connection to breakers.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 205


Install MPT-HLS standard in an ETSI rack (ETSI Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual
market)

15.3.1.1 Connecting and routing power supply cables for the fan
module

Each fan unit has two power supply inputs: Batt A and Batt B.

Two connectors are provided with each fan unit. Fan units are supplied power using
2x 1 mm2 zip cable to be provided. One end of the cable is terminated to a 2A breaker
on the TRU. The other end of the cable is routed through the rack to the planned
position of the fan unit. The cable is terminated with the supplied connectors and
installed in the Batt A and Batt B connectors appropriately.

Danger: Ensure that no power is running to the TRU.

The following procedure describes how to prepare the power cabling for the fan units.

1. Identify the breakers in the TRU slots that correspond to the fan positions that
you need to install. There are eight possible breaker locations, four for each
battery. See section 8.2.1 for information.

2. Strip 15 mm of insulated shielding from one end of each 2x1 mm2 zip cables.
Connect the blue cable (-) from the equipment to the Batt. A breaker terminal
and tighten the corresponding screw.

3. Connect the black cable (+) from the equipment to the Batt. A GND bar on the
TRU and tighten the corresponding screw.

4. Label the other ends of the cable—that is, the end that will plug into the fan
unit—to identify the fan for which the cable is intended.

5. Repeat steps 2 to 5 for the Batt. B breaker.

6. Route the cables from the 2A breaker in the TRU to the adjacent cable duct on
the left or right side of the rack, depending on the fan location.

7. Pass the cables down the duct and extract the cable just below the planned
location for the fan, that is N°7 (for high-position 9500 MPR long haul subracks),
or N°52 (for low-position 9500 MPR long haul subracks). Figure 143 shows how
the cables are extracted from the cable duct on the right side.

206 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Install MPT-HLS standard in an ETSI rack (ETSI
market)

8. Dress the cable to the corresponding fan connector and cut the cable to length.

9. Strip 5 mm of insulated shielding from the end of zip cable and terminate to the
supplied connector.

10. Connect the blue cable (-) from the equipment to the negative connector input
and tighten the corresponding screw.

11. Connect the black cable (+) from the equipment to the positive connector input
and tighten the corresponding screw.

12. Repeat steps 7 to 12 for the Batt. B breaker.

13. If more that one fan is used, repeat steps 2 to 13 for each fan.)

Figure 143 Right-side cable duct detail

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 207


Install MPT-HLS standard in an ETSI rack (ETSI Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual
market)

15.3.1.2 Connecting and routing power supply cables for the MSS-8

Each MSS-8 requires two 6 mm2 zip cables with connectors. The power supply
cables must be routed from the dedicated breakers in the TRU to the planned
position of each MSS-8.

The following procedure describes how to prepare the power cabling for the MSS-8s.

1. Identify the breakers in the TRU slots that correspond to the MSS-8 positions
that you need to install. There are four possible breaker locations, two for each
battery. See section 8.2.1 for information.

2. Strip 15 mm of insulated shielding from the non-terminated end of each of the 6


mm2 zip cables.

3. Connect the blue cable (-) from the equipment to the Batt. A breaker terminal
and tighten the corresponding screw.

4. Connect the black cable (+) from the equipment to the Batt. A GND bar on the
TRU and tighten the corresponding screw.

5. Label the other ends of the cable—that is, the end that will plug into the MSS-8
unit—to identify the MSS-8 for which the cable is intended.

6. Repeat steps 2 to 5 for the Batt. B breaker.

7. If a second MSS-8 is used, repeat steps 2 to 6 for the second MSS-8.

8. Route the power supply cables from the dedicated breakers in the TRU to the
cable duct on the right side of the rack.

9. Route the power supply cables down the cable duct.

10. Extract the power supply cables adjacent to the planned location of the MSS-8.
See Figure 144.

208 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Install MPT-HLS standard in an ETSI rack (ETSI
market)

15.3.1.3 Connecting and routing power supply cables for the 9500
MPR long haul subrack

The two 6 mm2 zip power cables must be routed from the TRU to the planned
position of each 9500 MPR long haul subrack.

The following procedure describes how to prepare the power cabling for the 9500
MPR long haul subrack.

1. Identify the breakers in the TRU slots that correspond to the 9500 MPR long haul
subrack positions. There are eight possible breaker locations, four for each
battery. See section 8.2.1 for information.

2. Strip 15 mm of insulated shielding from the non-terminated end of each of the 6


mm2 zip power cables.

3. Connect the blue cable (-) from the equipment to the Batt. A breaker terminal
and tighten the corresponding screw.

4. Connect the black cable (+) from the equipment to the Batt. A GND bar on the
TRU and tighten the corresponding screw.

5. Label the other ends of the cable—that is, the end that will plug into the 9500
MPR long haul subrack—to identify the subrack for which the cable is intended.

6. Repeat steps 2 to 5 for the Batt. B breaker.

7. If a second 9500 MPR long haul subrack is used, repeat steps 2 to 6 for the
second 9500 MPR long haul subrack.

8. Route the cables to the waveguide on the back-left or back-right side of the rack.

9. Run the cables down the rack to the back-left or back-right corner of the 9500
MPR long haul subrack and use a cable tie attach the cable. Figure 144 shows
the position of the cable (indicated with red arrows), behind the waveguide and
adjacent to the subrack.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 209


Install MPT-HLS standard in an ETSI rack (ETSI Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual
market)

Figure 144 Routing power cable to the subrack

15.3.2 MPT-HLS standard fan assembly


The fan assembly for the MPT-HLS standard has the following components:

• shock absorber gasket for fan support shelf


• fan support shelf
• up to two fan units

Each 9500 MPR long haul subrack is cooled by a fan assembly that has one or two
fan units, depending on number and configuration of RTs in the subrack. In general:

• a fan support shelf with a single fan unit is used to cool up to five RTs on the
same side of the subrack (homopolar configuration)
• a fan support shelf with two fan units must be used to cool RTs in both sides of
the subrack

210 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Install MPT-HLS standard in an ETSI rack (ETSI
market)

15.3.2.1 Fan supports

You must install the fan supports in the rack. Up to two fan units can be placed on a
fan support. The fan support must be positioned above each 9500 MPR long haul
subrack in dedicated positions. Figure 145 shows a drawing of the fan support rack.

Figure 145 Fan support rack

15.3.2.2 Fan support positions

Fan units must be installed in dedicated positions in the rack. The positions are
numbered to correspond with the mounting holes for the ETSI 21” rack and are
labeled on the lateral frame of the rack.

• Positions N°6 and N°7 must be used to cool systems when 9500 MPR long haul
subracks are installed in the high position.
• Positions N°51 and N°52 must be used to cool systems when 9500 MPR long
haul subracks are installed in the low position.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 211


Install MPT-HLS standard in an ETSI rack (ETSI Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual
market)

15.3.2.3 Fan installation procedures

15.3.2.3.1 Installing shock absorbers in the rack

Shock absorbers must be installed in the rack before you install the Fan supports.
The shock absorber is a rubber gasket that sits between the Fan unit and the inside
back cover of the rack. The gasket has adhesive tape on one side. The gasket must
be installed on the back cover as described in the following procedure.

1. Before you install the Fan supports, locate where you need to install the shock
absorber. Shock absorbers must be installed on the inside of the back cover of
the rack in the middle of positions N°6 and N°7 (for high-position 9500 MPR long
haul subracks), or in the middle of positions N°51 and N°52 (for low-position
9500 MPR long haul subracks).

2. Remove the protective band from the adhesive tape on the back of the shock
absorber.

3. Apply the rubber shock absorber to the internal side of the back cover in one of
the locations described in step 1. See Figure 146.

212 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Install MPT-HLS standard in an ETSI rack (ETSI
market)

Figure 146 Rubber shock absorber

15.3.2.3.2 Installing fan supports and fan modules

After the shock absorber is installed, install the fan support shelf, then the modules,
as described in the following procedure.

1. Place the fan support in one of the dedicated positions.

2. Attach the fixing screws.

3. Attach the fan module to the support.

4. Attach the second fan module to the support. If only one fan is installed, you
must install the Fan cover plate (3DB80464AAAA) in the empty fan position of
the support rack, as shown in Figure 147.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 213


Install MPT-HLS standard in an ETSI rack (ETSI Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual
market)

Figure 147 Cover plate

15.3.2.4 Supply connections for the fans

Each fan unit has a two supply inputs: Batt. A and Batt. B.

Two 1mmsq zip cables must be equipped with ferrites and terminated with
connectors (both included into the fan unit package).

Figure 148 Fan module connector with cable

Figure 149 Fan cabling components

Perform the following to prepare the cables:

1. Separate a 250 mm length of cable into two wires and make a loop of
approximately 45 mm on one wire.

214 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Install MPT-HLS standard in an ETSI rack (ETSI
market)

Figure 150 Separate cable and make a loop

2. Install one ferrite on the wire as shown in Figure 151.

Figure 151 Install the ferrite on the wire

3. Close the ferrite on the wire.

Figure 152 Close the ferrite on the wire

4. Pull the wire on both sides to tighten.

Figure 153 Pull the wire on both sides

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 215


Install MPT-HLS standard in an ETSI rack (ETSI Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual
market)

5. Repeat steps 1 to 4 for the second wire.

Figure 154 Second wire

6. Cut the two wires and remove the wire jacket as shown in Figure 155.

Figure 155 Remove the wire jacket

7. Terminate the power cord by inserting the wires in the dedicated connector slot.

Figure 156 Power supply with ferrites on a fan module

216 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Install MPT-HLS standard in an ETSI rack (ETSI
market)

Figure 157 Terminate the power cord

Once plugged into the fan unit the cables must be inserted in the duct cable on the
rack side (left or right depending on the fun unit) and driven toward the TRU for the
connection to the 2A breaker in it (see Prerequisite).

Figure 158 Insert fan cables in the duct cable

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 217


Install MPT-HLS standard in an ETSI rack (ETSI Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual
market)

15.3.2.5 Single fan substitution into a fan module

Each fan module contains inside four single fans. Each single fan (1AB016320110)
can be substituted in case of failure. Perform the following to substitute a fan:

1. Unplug and remove the faulty fan module from the fan support by loosening the
two lateral screws.

Figure 159 Remove the faulty fan module

2. Unscrew the five screws of the top cover of the module and remove it.

Figure 160 Unscrew the screws from the top cover

3. Loosen and remove the screws in the bottom cover of the module corresponding
to the faulty fan.

218 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Install MPT-HLS standard in an ETSI rack (ETSI
market)

Figure 161 Remove screws in the bottom cover

4. Unwind the connection wires of the faulty fan from the tie wrap binding all wires
and remove the corresponding connector.

Figure 162 Unwind wires and remove the connector

5. Connect the new fan to the connector and follow the sequence in reverse to fix
it to the shelf. Close the fan module.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 219


Install MPT-HLS standard in an ETSI rack (ETSI Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual
market)

15.3.2.6 Connecting power cables to the fan unit

Connectors for the fan module are included with the fan unit package. The
terminated end is used to connect to the fan module; the non-terminated end of the
cable is used to connect to a 2A breaker on the TRU.

Power is supplied to the fan modules through cables that are connected to breakers
on the TRU and pre-routed through the rack as described in Connecting and routing
power supply cables for the fan module). Each fan unit has two power supply inputs:
Batt. A and Batt. B.

Perform the following procedure to connect the power cables to the fan unit

1. Locate the two 1 mm2 zip cables in the cable duct.

2. Plug the terminal Batt A end of one 1 mm2 zip cables into the Batt. A port on the
front of the fan module. Repeat for the Batt B cable in the Batt.B port. See
Figure 163.

Figure 163 FAN battery terminals

220 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Install MPT-HLS standard in an ETSI rack (ETSI
market)

15.3.3 MSS-8 and E1 distribution patch panel


For an 9500 MPR long haul installation, up to two MSS-8 and the supporting
distribution patch panels can be installed in the ETSI 21” rack. The MSS-8 and the
patch panels require adapter brackets for the ETSI 21” rack. MSS subracks and
patch panels have to be placed in dedicated positions on the rack.

The basic description of the MSS-8 is described in the 9500 MPR Product
Information Manual. The following sections describe requirements that are specific
to the 9500 MPR long haul installation.

15.3.3.1 MSS-8 and E1 distribution patch panel components

The components are:

• two MSS-8
• 21” Adapter kit. Adapter brackets required to install the MSS-8 in the ETSI 21”
rack (3DB18181AAAB)
• distribution patch panels, 32E1 SCSI 68 - 1.0/2.3 75 ohm (3DB16104AAAA)
• 21” Adapter kit. Adapter brackets required to install the distribution patch panels
in the 21" ETSI rack (3CC50065AAAA)

Figure 164 shows the MSS-8 and distribution patch panels components. The
adapter brackets are on each side of the components. When attached to the rack
with the adapter brackets, the distribution patch panels are recessed in the rack.

Figure 164 MPT-HLS standard rack components

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 221


Install MPT-HLS standard in an ETSI rack (ETSI Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual
market)

15.3.3.2 MSS-8 and distribution patch panel positions

MSS-8 and distribution patch panels are installed in dedicated positions in an ETSI
21” rack as listed in Table 15.

Table 15 Rack positions

Item Position in the rack/hole n°

Distribution patch panel (top position) 37 and 38

MSS-8 (top position) 40 and 43

MSS-8 (bottom position) 44 and 46

Distribution patch panel (bottom position) 48 and 49

Figure 165 shows the position of the MSS-8 and patch panels in the ETSI 21” rack.

Figure 165 MSS distribution patch panel

15.3.3.3 Power supply connections for the MSS-8

Each MSS-8 requires two 6 mm2 zip cables with connectors. The power supply
cables must be pre-routed from the dedicated breakers in the TRU to the cable duct
on the right side of the rack, then down the cable duct and extracted adjacent to the
MSS-8.

222 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Install MPT-HLS standard in an ETSI rack (ETSI
market)

15.3.3.3.1 MSS-8 power supply cables and connectors

Each MSS-8 sub-rack has a two supply inputs (one for Batt.A and one for Batt.B).
The cables plug into the power inputs on the right side of the subrack, as shown in
Figure 166.

Figure 166 MSS-8 Battery connector location

15.3.3.3.2 Patch Panel cable connections

The two distribution cables (3CC52118AAAA) connect into the front of the MSS-8
boards and are routed to the opposite side of the rack, as shown in Figure 167.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 223


Install MPT-HLS standard in an ETSI rack (ETSI Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual
market)

Figure 167 Distribution cable connections

The distribution cables (3CC52118AAAA) from MSS-8 boards are routed behind the
MSS-8, by passing the cables to the side of the rack and through the space between
two support brackets, as shown in Figure 168.

224 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Install MPT-HLS standard in an ETSI rack (ETSI
market)

Figure 168 Routing distribution cables from the MSS-8 to the distribution rack

Route the cable to the back of the distribution panel.

Connect the male SCSI connector on the cable to the female connectors at the back
of the distribution panel, as listed in Table 16 and shown in Figure 169. Figure 169
shows the connected cables.

Table 16 SCSI port to port connections

MSS-8 (front view) Distribution panel (viewed from back)

Right module, right side, ports 1-16 Top right

Right module, left side, ports 17-32 Top left

Left module, right side, ports 1-16 Bottom right

Left module, left side, ports 17-32 Bottom left

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 225


Install MPT-HLS standard in an ETSI rack (ETSI Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual
market)

Figure 169 Distribution panel

Front
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
IN 1 - 8 IN 17 - 24
OUT 1 - 8 OUT 17 - 24
IN 9 - 16 IN 25 - 32
OUT 9 - 16 OUT 25 - 32
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32

Back
SPARE / EXT SPARE / EXT
IN / OUT 17 - 32 M4 M3 IN / OUT 1 - 16

MAIN MAIN
IN / OUT 17 - 32 M2 M1 IN / OUT 1 - 16

24004

Figure 170 Top view of cables connected to the back of the distribution panel

226 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Install MPT-HLS standard in an ETSI rack (ETSI
market)

15.3.4 9500 MPR long haul subrack


The 9500 MPR long haul product includes the 9500 MPR long haul subrack, which
is pre-installed in an ETSI 21-inch rack. The subrack comes pre-equipped in the
configuration ordered by the customer.

15.3.4.1 9500 MPR long haul subrack installation

9500 MPR long haul subracks are installed in dedicated positions in an ETSI 21-inch
rack. Two positions are available, as described in Table 17.

Table 17 9500 MPR long haul subrack positions

ETSI 21” rack Subrack position Back screw Front screw


location

High Top n. 19 n. 17

Bottom n. 30 n. 33

Low Top n. 64 n. 62

Bottom n. 75 n. 78

15.3.4.2 Factory configuration

Sub-racks are equipped as ordered. Support guides and centering pins for the RTs
are mounted in the rack only for the RTs that have been ordered. Cover plates are
pre-installed for the top and front positions that are not used. To install additional
RTs, the cover plates must be removed and additional support guides and centering
pins must be installed.

15.3.4.3 Power supply connections for the 9500 MPR long haul
subrack

You must connect the power supply cables to the supply connectors on the subrack
before you insert the RTs into the dedicated slots.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 227


Install MPT-HLS standard in an ETSI rack (ETSI Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual
market)

15.3.4.3.1 Rack connectors

Each 9500 MPR long haul subrack is equipped with one or two back panels for the
power distribution to the RTs. One back panel distributes the power to MPT-HLS
standard positions 1 to 5, a second back panel distributes power to positions 6 to 10.
Each back panel has two power input connectors, one for Batt. A and one for Batt. B).

15.3.4.3.2 Power supply cables

Each 9500 MPR long haul subrack back panel requires two 6 mm2 zip power cables.
The power supply cables must be pre-routed from the TRU through the rack to each
back panel of the subrack.

The cables must be plugged into the two pre-installed green connectors on the back
panel. There is one connector for each battery. The connectors are labeled Batt. A
and Batt. B on the back panel and on the green connectors.

228 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Install MPT-HLS standard in an ETSI rack (ETSI
market)

15.3.4.4 Connecting the power leads to the subrack battery


connectors

The following procedure describes how to connect the leads of the power supply
cables to the battery connectors on the subrack.

1. Remove 15 mm of the external insulating jacket from the end of the 6 mm2 zip
power cables, as shown in Figure 171.

Figure 171 Cables to connector

2. Insert the black wire into the positive (+) terminal of the connector. The
connector has a quick-fit insertion mechanism which holds the wire in place. No
additional fasteners are required. See Figure 172.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 229


Install MPT-HLS standard in an ETSI rack (ETSI Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual
market)

Figure 172 Positive cable

3. Insert the blue/black wire into the negative (–) terminal of the connector, as
shown in Figure 173.

230 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Install MPT-HLS standard in an ETSI rack (ETSI
market)

Figure 173 Negative cable

15.3.5 MPT-HLS standard module installation


MPT-HLS standard modules must be inserted into a dedicated slots in the subrack.
When fully inserted in the slot, the power supply connectors (one for Batt. A and one
for Batt. B) on the back of the MPT-HLS standard module mate with the connectors
on the back panel of the subrack to power the MPT-HLS standard module.

The following procedure describes how to insert an MPT-HLS standard module in the
subrack.

1. Before inserting the module in a slot, take note of the support guides and
centering pins close to the back panel connectors that ensure the correct
alignment of the module in the subrack. The support guides and centering pins
are supplied only for the slots intended for the modules you have ordered.
Figure 174 shows the back panel with the plastic protection caps over the
connectors, and two centering pins for slot 1.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 231


Install MPT-HLS standard in an ETSI rack (ETSI Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual
market)

Figure 174 9500 MPR long haul subrack back panel

2. Remove the plastic protection caps from the power connector receptacles on the
back panel of the subrack for the required slot.

3. Insert the MPT-HLS standard module three-quarters of the way into the rack by
sliding it on the support guides, then gently push on front of the module at the
top and bottom, as shown in Figure 175, to ensure that the module is properly
set.

232 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Install MPT-HLS standard in an ETSI rack (ETSI
market)

Figure 175 Inserting an MPT-HLS standard module

4. Tighten the screws at the top and bottom of the module to secure the module in
the subrack.

15.3.6 MPT-HLS standard module connections to 9500


MPR long haul components
The following subsections describe how to connect the RF, data, RPS, and fan
management cabling for the MPT-HLS standard module.

• RF connections for the MPT-HLS standard module (see MPT-HLS standard


module RF connections)
• Data and RPS connections for the MPT-HLS standard module (see Data and
RPS connectors)
• Fan management connections for the MPT-HLS standard module (see Fan
management)
• XPIC connection for the MPT-HLS standard module (see XPIC)

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 233


Install MPT-HLS standard in an ETSI rack (ETSI Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual
market)

15.3.6.1 MPT-HLS standard module RF connections

TX, RX, and DivRX signals are carried to and from the MPT-HLS standard by coaxial
cables. The cables connect the RF ports to filters in the branching section of the
system. Figure 176 shows the location of the RF connectors on the front of the MPT-
HLS standard module.

Figure 176 RF connectors on the MPT-HLS standard module

234 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Install MPT-HLS standard in an ETSI rack (ETSI
market)

15.3.6.1.1 RF cables and connectors

Table 18 lists the product codes and lengths for each type of RF coaxial cable
supported by the MPT-HLS standard module.

Table 18 RF coaxial cable list

System RF Cable part number Cable System configuration


frequency port length (mm)
range

4 GHz (L and U TX 3CY09399AAAA 220 All


band)
RX 3CY09400AAAA 320 All

Rx Div 3CY09315AAAA 280 All

6, 7, 8 GHz TX 3DB80893AAAA 170 • Homopolar systems (one or two


sub-shelves)
• Heteropolar systems (one sub-
shelf)
• Heteropolar systems with two
sub-shelves (four polarizations)
RX 3DB05857AAAA 240 • Homopolar systems (one or two
sub-shelves)
• Heteropolar systems (one sub-
shelf)
• Heteropolar systems with two
sub-shelves (four polarizations)
five channels
3DB80746AAAA 260 Heteropolar systems with two sub-
shelves (four polarizations) up to four
channels

RX Div 3DB80692AAAA 240 • Homopolar systems (one or two


sub-shelves)
• Heteropolar systems (one sub-
shelf)
• Heteropolar systems with two
sub-shelves (four polarizations)
up to four channels
3DB80692AAAA 200 Heteropolar systems with two sub-
shelves (four polarizations) five
channels

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 235


Install MPT-HLS standard in an ETSI rack (ETSI Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual
market)

Table 18 RF coaxial cable list (Continued)

System RF Cable part number Cable System configuration


frequency port length (mm)
range

10, 11, 13 GHz TX 3DB80692AAA 200 • Homopolar systems (one or two


sub-shelves)
RX 3DB80694AAAA 250
• Heteropolar systems (one sub-
RX Div 3DB80693AAAA 230 shelf)
• Heteropolar systems with two
sub-shelves (four polarizations)

RF cables are equipped with 90° SMA connectors to permit optimal routing to other
components.

15.3.6.1.2 RF cable routing to the TX and RX filters

The TX filters for the branching system are pre-installed and positioned below the
subracks. The TX cables are routed down to the filters.

The RX filters are pre-installed and positioned immediately above the subracks. The
RX Div filters, if required, are positioned above the RX filters. RX and the RX Div
cables are routed up to the RX filters.

Connect the cables as shown in Figure 177. The appropriate torque wrench must be
used to tighten the SMA connectors.

236 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Install MPT-HLS standard in an ETSI rack (ETSI
market)

Figure 177 RF connections from the MPT-HLS standard module to the TX and RX filters

After all of the RF cables are connected, the RX branching filters must be covered
with the Branching front plate (KIT 3DB80459AAAA), as shown in Figure 178.

Warning: Do not operate the equipment without installing the branching RF front plate.

Figure 178 RX filter cover plate

15.3.6.2 Data and RPS connectors

The MPT-HLS standard module has two data ports. The GE port is used for data, the
GE-RPS is used to support radio protection switching (RPS). Figure 179 shows the
MPT-HLS standard module faceplate with an expanded view of ports.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 237


Install MPT-HLS standard in an ETSI rack (ETSI Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual
market)

Figure 179 Data and RPS ports: expanded view

15.3.6.2.1 Supported cables

The MPT-HLS standard module data ports can support electrical or optical cables,
as described in the following subsections.

15.3.6.2.2 Electrical connections

The 9500 MPR long haul uses copper SFP-terminated cables for electrical data
connections between the MSS-8 and the MPT-HLS standard modules. The cables
are multi-pair, and terminate with a passive SFP interface connector.

The same cables are used for electrical RPS connection. The length of the SFP
copper cable depends on usage. Five lengths of cable are available, as listed in
Table 19.

Table 19 Electrical cables

Cable code Cable length Used for

3DB80628AAAA 1.5 m Data (for high position in the rack)

3DB80628ABAA 2.0 m Data (for low position in the rack)

3DB80628ACAA 3.0 m Data (inter-rack connections)

3DB80628ADAA 0.5 m RPS only

238 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Install MPT-HLS standard in an ETSI rack (ETSI
market)

Table 19 Electrical cables (Continued)

Cable code Cable length Used for

3DB80628AEAA 1.0 m RPS only

15.3.6.2.3 Optical connections

The 9500 MPR long haul uses optical data connections between the MSS-8 and the
MPT-HLS standard modules. The cables are multi-mode, duplex optical cables LC/
LC terminated for indoor usage. The same cables are used for RPS optical
connections. Use the shortest length of optical cable to connect adjacent RTs. Three
lengths of cable are available, as listed in Table 20.

Table 20 Optical cables

Cable code Cable length Used for

1AB426580001 1m Data and RPS

1AB426590001 2.0 m Data

1AB426600001 3.0 m Data

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 239


Install MPT-HLS standard in an ETSI rack (ETSI Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual
market)

15.3.6.2.4 SFP modules for optical data cables

Table 21 lists the SFPs that are supported for the optical cables that connect the
MPT-HLS standard module and the MSS-8.

Table 21 SFPs

SFP code Function

3CC50167AAAA SFP 1000 Base-SX Transceiver

3CC50168AAAA SFP 1000 Base-TX Transceiver

15.3.6.2.5 Intra rack cable routing

Each MPT-HLS standard requires an MSS radio port data connection between the
radio port in the MSS to the MPT-HLS standard in the 9500 MPR long haul.

1+1 RPS configurations require an RPS connection between the main and spare
MPT-HLS standard in the 9500 MPR long haul.

Figure 180 shows the high- and low-rack data connections (indicated in red) and
RPS connections (indicated in blue) in a fully-equipped ETSI rack.

240 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Install MPT-HLS standard in an ETSI rack (ETSI
market)

Figure 180 Data and RPS connections in the ETSI rack

Perform the following procedure to route and connect the data and RPS cables.

1. Plug the cable into the data port on the MPT-HLS standard.

2. Bend the cable slightly downwards and route the cable below the RTs. This will
allow you to remove other RTs during routine maintenance without having to
unplug the cable.

3. Route the cable to the adjacent cable duct on the rack, using the left side of the
rack for MPT-HLS standard modules 1 to 5, and the right side for MPT-HLS
standard module 6-10.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 241


Install MPT-HLS standard in an ETSI rack (ETSI Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual
market)

4. Route the cable to the MSS-8, MPT-HLS standard radio port (Core-E or EASv2
optical port).

5. For RPS protection connect two adjacent RTs. Use the shortest cable lengths
available.

15.3.6.3 Fan management

The MPT-HLS standard modules manage the fans for the 9500 MPR long haul
system. The 9500 MPR long haul system can require up to four fan modules
depending on rack equipment. Each fan module is used to cool up to five RTs. The
full configuration requires two fan modules for the RTs in the high position and two
for the RTs in the low position.

Each MPT-HLS standard modules has a dedicated port which is used to connect the
MPT-HLS standard module to the fan module. Figure 181 shows the fan
management port on the MPT-HLS standard module.

Figure 181 MPT-HLS standard fan management port

15.3.6.3.1 Fan module cable

A dedicated 1.3 m Ethernet cable is used to connect the RTs and Fan modules. The
same type of cable is used in all fan arrays.

242 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Install MPT-HLS standard in an ETSI rack (ETSI
market)

15.3.6.3.2 Fan management ports on the fan module

Each Fan module supports redundant management protection. Two connector ports
on the front of each fan module can be used to connect the fan module to two
different MPT-HLS standard modules. Figure 182 shows the two fan management
ports on the front of the Fan module.

Figure 182 FAN Mgmt ports on the fan module

15.3.6.3.3 Fan configurations and cabling

The following figures show the possible configurations for fan management.
Figure 183 shows the top subrack equipment; the connection schema is the same
for the lower subrack.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 243


Install MPT-HLS standard in an ETSI rack (ETSI Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual
market)

Figure 183 Protected and non-protected fan management

15.3.6.3.4 Connecting the fan module cables

Perform the following steps to connect the fan module cables.

1. Plug the fan module cable into the Fan Mgmt port on the fan module.

2. For a redundant management protection configuration, plug the second fan


module cable into the second Fan Mgmt port on the fan module.

3. Route each cable to the left or right depending on configuration and insert each
cable in the cable duct on the side of the rack.

4. Extract the Ethernet cable from the cable duct adjacent to the MPT-HLS
standard module Fan management port.

244 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Install MPT-HLS standard in an ETSI rack (ETSI
market)

5. Plug the Ethernet cable into the Fan Mgmt port of the MPT-HLS standard
module.

Ensure that you leave enough extra length to permit extraction of one of the
transceivers in case of maintenance need. See Figure 184 for an example.

Figure 184 Example of routing of Fan management cables

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 245


Install MPT-HLS standard in an ETSI rack (ETSI Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual
market)

15.3.6.4 XPIC

The MPT-HLS standard modules support XPIC. In configurations with XPIC, two RTs
must be connected to enable cross-polar signal cancellation.

15.3.6.4.1 XPIC connector port

The MPT-HLS standard module has a dedicated port for XPIC, as shown in
Figure 185.

Figure 185 XPIC connector port

A dedicated multi-pair RJ45 terminated cable must be used for XPIC connections.
The cable is available in three lengths, depending on usage, as listed in Table 22.

Table 22 XPIC cables

Cable code Cable length Used for

3CC52204AA 3m Intra-rack connections on the low subrack or


between subracks

3CC52204BA 5m Intra-rack connections on the high subrack

3CC52204CA 10 m Inter-rack connections

246 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Install MPT-HLS standard in an ETSI rack (ETSI
market)

15.3.6.4.2 Supported XPIC connections

Figure 186 shows the supported XPIC configurations, which are:

• Intra-rack connections between two RTs on the same sub-rack (in red)
• Intra-rack connections between two RTs on different sub-racks (in blue)
• Inter-rack connections between two RTs on different rack (in purple)

Figure 186 Supported XPIC configurations

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 247


Install MPT-HLS standard in an ETSI rack (ETSI Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual
market)

15.3.6.4.3 Low subrack intra-rack cabling considerations

For intra-rack connections for RTs on the lower subrack, the 3 m cable is always
sufficient. Route the cable from one MPT-HLS standard to the cable duct on the
adjacent side of the rack. Pass the cable down the duct to the bottom of the subrack,
then across the base of the rack to the duct on the other side of the rack. Route the
cable upwards and extract it from the duct adjacent to the other MPT-HLS standard.
Any excess cable can be managed by rolling up the cable and putting it in the free
space at the base of the subrack.

15.3.6.4.4 High subrack cabling considerations

There is no free space in the upper subrack to manage excess cable. Nokia
recommends that you use a 5 m cable and route the cable to the cable barrel above
the rack. Route the cable from one MPT-HLS standard to the cable duct on the
adjacent side of the rack and pass the cable upwards towards the barrel. Pass the
cable down the duct on the other side and extract it adjacent to the other MPT-HLS
standard.

248 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Install MPT-HLS standard in an LSY rack (ETSI
market)

16 Install MPT-HLS standard in an LSY rack


(ETSI market)

16.1 Purpose
An existing LSY system can be upgraded by addition or substitution of LSY
transceivers with MPT-HLS transceivers.

Depending on the configuration of the system to be upgraded and on the final


configuration to be achieved, different operations shall be addressed.

16.2 General

16.2.1 LSY existing installations


LSY systems can be found installed in configurations with or without Add-Drop
Multiplexers (ADMs such as 1650SMC/1662SMC). Figure 187 and Figure 188 are
representative of these two cases.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 249


Install MPT-HLS standard in an LSY rack (ETSI Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual
market)

Figure 187 LSY system without ADM

250 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Install MPT-HLS standard in an LSY rack (ETSI
market)

Figure 188 LSY system with ADM

16.2.2 Upgrade use cases


Addition, partial replacement or full replacement of the LSY transceivers with MPT-
HLS transceivers can be performed.

Looking at the existing installations described, four cases are possible:

a. Addition of MPT-HLS transceivers or partial replacement of LSY transceivers in


a system without ADM
b. Addition of MPT-HLS transceivers or partial replacement of LSY transceivers in
a system with ADM
c. Full replacement of LSY transceivers with MPT-HLS standard in a system
without ADM
d. Full replacement of LSY transceivers with MPT-HLS standard in a system with
ADM

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 251


Install MPT-HLS standard in an LSY rack (ETSI Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual
market)

The existing LSY transceiver sub-shelf and the eventual ADM will stay in place.

The changes will impact the TRU, the fan units, the Base Band. Moreover the new
MPT-HLS transceivers shall be equipped with special adapters before to insert into
the sub-shelf.

This section provides a short description of cases and operation to be addressed. In


the following section all operations will be detailed.

16.2.2.1 Case a: Addition of MPT-HLS transceivers or partial


replacement of LSY transceivers in a system without ADM

In case of addition or partial substitution on MPT-HL transceivers in a LSY system


without ADM, the existing Base Band sub-shelf shall be kept (to control the remaining
LSY transceivers).

The fan unit for the transceiver sub-shelf shall be replaced by the new MPT cooling
system.

The MSS sub-shelf shall be added into the rack in the empty space previously
reserved for ADM.

The branching sections shall be expanded through additional circulators/filters in


case of addition of transceivers with respect to old LSY system.

The existing LSY Power distribution unit (LSY Top Rack Unit (TRU)) shall be kept
and upgraded. Two additional breakers (value 2A) for fan unit and two for MSS-8
(value 10A) must be inserted in it.

Procedure

1. Keep the Base band sub-shelf.

2. Replace fan unit for transceiver sub-shelf.

3. Install the MSS sub-shelf in the free room.

4. Expand the branching section (only in case of addition of channels or


transceivers).

5. Keep the existing LSY TRU and upgrade it through addition of breakers for new
fan unit and MSS.

252 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Install MPT-HLS standard in an LSY rack (ETSI
market)

Figure 189 Case a

16.2.2.2 Case b: Addition of MPT-HLS transceivers or partial


replacement of LSY transceivers in a system with ADM

In case of addition or partial substitution of MPT-HLS transceivers in an LSY system


with ADM, the existing Base Band sub-shelf and the ADM sub-shelf are kept.

The fan unit for transceiver sub-shelf will be replaced by the new MPT cooling
system.

In this case there will be not enough space in the rack to place the MSS sub-shelf. It
must be placed in another rack provided with the MPT TRU. This power distribution
unit will power the MSS sub-shelf and the second 4X fan unit (if present, see Cooling
system (fan module) replacement).

The existing ADM fan unit shall be kept.

When transceivers are added to the old LSY system, the branching section must be
expanded using additional circulators/filters.

The existing LSY Power distribution unit (LSY Top Rack Unit (TRU)) shall be kept.
The 2A breakers for the old fan unit of transceivers sub-shelf shall be used for one
4X fan unit of the new one.

Procedure

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 253


Install MPT-HLS standard in an LSY rack (ETSI Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual
market)

1. Keep the Base band and ADM sub-shelves.

2. Replace fan unit for transceiver sub-shelf.

3. Keep the old fan unit for ADM.

4. Install the MSS sub-shelf in another rack.

5. Expand the branching section (only in case of addition of channels or


transceivers).

6. Keep the existing LSY TRU, use the existing breaker for fans to serve part of the
new fan unit.

7. Equip the TRU of the new rack with breakers for MSS and one 4X fan module
(if the upgraded system foresees two 4X fan module in the fan unit for
transceiver).

Figure 190 Case b

254 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Install MPT-HLS standard in an LSY rack (ETSI
market)

16.2.2.3 Case c: Full replacement of LSY transceivers with MPT-


HLS standard in a system without ADM

In case of full replacement of LSY transceivers with MPT-HLS standard in a system


without ADM, the existing Base Band sub-shelf shall be removed.

The fan unit for transceiver sub-shelf shall be replaced through the new MPT cooling
system.

The MSS sub-shelf shall be added into the rack in the space left free by the removed
Base Band sub-shelf.

When transceivers are added to the old LSY system, the branching section must be
expanded using additional circulators/filters.

The existing LSY Power distribution unit (LSY Top Rack Unit (TRU)) shall be kept.
The breakers formerly used for Base Band shall be substituted with new ones for
MSS-8 powering. New additional breakers for fan unit (for one 4X fan unit) must be
inserted in it.

Procedure

1. Remove the Base band sub-shelf.

2. Replace fan unit for transceiver sub-shelf.

3. Install the MSS sub-shelf in the room left free by the removed Base Band.

4. Expand the branching section (only in case of addition of channels/


transceivers).

5. Keep the existing LSY TRU and upgrade it through addition/substitution of


breakers for new fan unit and MSS.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 255


Install MPT-HLS standard in an LSY rack (ETSI Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual
market)

Figure 191 Case c

16.2.2.4 Case d: Full replacement of LSY transceivers with MPT-


HLS standard in a system with ADM

In case of full replacement of LSY transceivers with MPT-HLS standard in a system


with ADM, the existing Base Band sub-shelf shall be removed.

The existing ADM sub-shelf shall be kept.

The fan unit for the transceiver sub-shelf and those for ADM shall be replaced by the
new MPT cooling system.

The MSS sub-shelf shall be added into the rack in the space left free by the removed
Base Band.

When transceivers are added to the old LSY system, the branching section must be
expanded using additional circulators/filters.

The existing LSY Power distribution unit does not have enough breakers slots to
serve all the new system parts. It must be replaced with an MPT TRU.

Procedure

1. Remove the Base band sub-shelf.

256 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Install MPT-HLS standard in an LSY rack (ETSI
market)

2. Replace fan unit for transceiver sub-shelf and for ADM sub-shelf.

3. Install the MSS sub-shelf in the room left free by the removed Base Band.

4. Expand the branching section (only in case of addition of channels or


transceivers).

5. Replace the existing LSY TRU with a new MPT TRU equipped with breakers for
all system parts.

Figure 192 Case d

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 257


Install MPT-HLS standard in an LSY rack (ETSI Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual
market)

16.2.3 Common operation description

16.2.3.1 Existing TRU upgrading or replacement

16.2.3.1.1 TRU upgrading

In the LSY system the TRU provides the power distribution to the entire system
through the breakers. Figure 193 shows the front view of a TRU and the positioning
of breakers for each section. The breakers that must be installed will depend on the
system configuration. Note also that the effective position of each breaker can be
different from the one reported in the picture. Check for the real usage of each
breaker before initiating the system upgrading.

Table 23 describes breaker utilization in the LSY TRU.

Figure 193 Front view of LSY TRU

Table 23 TRU breaker utilization in 9600 LSY

Breaker number Usage Current limit

1A and 1B Transceiver slot 1 to 5 20 A

2A and 2B Transceiver slot 6 to 10 20 A

3A and 3B Base Band subrack 10 A

4A and 4B ADM 4A

5A and 5B Fan unit for BB subrack 2A

6A and 6B Fan unit for ADM 2A

258 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Install MPT-HLS standard in an LSY rack (ETSI
market)

Depending on system deployment period, the TRU can be found in the following
versions:

• 3DB05602AA – most recent version of TRU


• 3DB00734AA – previous version of TRU

The breakers to be used with the two TRUs are different: Table 24 provides the
codes.

Table 24 Breakers for TRU

Breaker value Part number

Breakers for 3DB05602AA

2A 1AB162710010

10A 1AB162710011

20A 1AB162710013

Breakers for 3DB00734AA

2A 1AB162710002

10A 1AB162710005

20A 1AB162710007

The two versions also differ in the way to plug the cables into the breaker holder. With
the most recent version (3DB05602AA) the cable requires crimp contacts for the
connection; see Figure 194.

Figure 194 Connection of supply cables to the breaker holder bar for 3DB05602AA TRU

In the old version of the TRU (3DB00734AA) the cables are plugged to the breaker
holder bar without crimp contacts; see Figure 195.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 259


Install MPT-HLS standard in an LSY rack (ETSI Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual
market)

Figure 195 Connection of supply cables to the breaker holder bar for 3DB00734AA TRU

In case of TRU upgrading additional breakers shall be added or changed. See


Upgrade use cases for specific operation case by case.

Figure 196 shows a breaker for the LSY TRU. To insert a breaker, position it and
push it into its slot; see Figure 197.

Figure 196 Breaker for LSY TRU

Figure 197 Breaker insertion in LSY TRU

260 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Install MPT-HLS standard in an LSY rack (ETSI
market)

To extract a breaker, pull it. To facilitate this operation, two tool-screws have been
put in the TRU. Screw the tools to the breaker (on the top and bottom treaded holes
as indicated in Figure 198) and pull it down.

Figure 198 Use of tool-screw for breaker extraction

Note on cabling for system upgrading:

The already installed supply cables of the system functions that will be kept will not
be changed. For the new functions to be installed (Fan units and MSS-8) new supply
cables will be provided as part of the material for the system upgrading.

Table 25 Supply cords for system upgrading

Supply cable for system upgrading Part number

2x1 mm2 power cord for Fan unit 3CC52208AA

2x6 mm2 power cord for MSS-8 3CC52209AA

These new cables include the crimp connectors to be used with the 3DB05602AA
version of the TRU.

Figure 199 shows the routing of the MSS-8 and fan unit cable.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 261


Install MPT-HLS standard in an LSY rack (ETSI Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual
market)

Figure 199 Supply cords for fan unit and MSS-8 pre-assembled with crimp connectors and
plug-in to terminals

In case of system upgrading with a 3DB00734AA TRU, the end of the cords
terminated with the crimp connectors must be cut and the cable ends have to be
peeled (15mm) for the connection on the breaker holder bar terminals as shown in
Figure 195.

16.2.3.1.2 TRU replacement

In case of TRU replacement (case d in Upgrade use cases) the existing LSY TRU
must be completely removed.

Unplug all the cables arriving to it and dismount the unit.

Assemble the new unit (MPT TRU, 3CC50156AA). The procedures to be followed
are the same as those described in TRU installation (ETSI market).

16.3 Prerequisite
Complete TRU installation (ETSI market).

16.4 Procedures
This chapter provides procedures for the following:

• Cooling system (fan module) replacement


• Upgrading of the transceivers sub-shelf

262 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Install MPT-HLS standard in an LSY rack (ETSI
market)

• Branching section expansion


• Positioning and powering of the MSS-8 sub-shelf

16.4.1 Cooling system (fan module) replacement


The use of MPT-HLS transceivers on a LSY system requires an upgrade of the
cooling system.

An LSY system is always equipped with a fan unit right below the Base Band section
(fan unit for transceiver sub-shelf). Another fan unit (fan unit for ADM) placed right
below the ADM section, is installed only in case of systems equipped with ADM.

In case of system upgrading, the fan unit for transceiver sub-shelf must always be
replaced. The fan unit for ADM will be replaced only in case of full replacement of
LSY transceivers in a system equipped with ADM (case d)).

The cooling system to be used for replacement will be the one used in standard MPT-
HLS systems. It consists of a support containing one or two 4X fan modules, as
shown in Figure 200.

Figure 200 Two 4x fan modules in the fan support

One or two 4X fan modules shall be used for cooling the transceivers sub-shelf.

As a general rule: up to five transceivers in an homopolar configuration can be cooled


by a single 4X fan module. More than five transceivers in homopolar configuration
and all heteropolar configurations need two 4X fan modules.

Only a 4X fan module is required to cool the ADM section (case d)).

In a LSY system the alarms of the fan units are managed by the base band section
through a CAN-BUS connection. This connection must be reconfigured once the
cooling system is changed.

The main operations to be followed for cooling system replacement are described in
the following sections.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 263


Install MPT-HLS standard in an LSY rack (ETSI Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual
market)

16.4.1.1 Fan unit for transceiver sub-shelf replacement

Procedure

1. Shut down the fan module acting on the two breakers (battery A and B) on the
TRU.

2. Remove the RX branching cover from the rack by unscrewing the four screws;
see Figure 201.

Note: Do not remove the nuts from the rack. They can be used for the placement of the new
RX branching cover; see Powering of new fan units.

Figure 201 Remove Rx branching cover

3. Unplug the two supply cables and the two CAN-BUS cables.

264 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Install MPT-HLS standard in an LSY rack (ETSI
market)

Note: The CAN-BUS connector 2 is closed with a CAN-BUS terminator when the ADM is
not installed in the system. This terminator shall be used to terminate the CAN-BUS control
in the Base Band in configurations where it shall be kept (case b) (see CAN-BUS
reconfiguration after fan unit replacement) so it must be kept for this purpose.

Figure 202 Supply cables and CAN-BUS connectors

Figure 203 Supply cables and CAN-BUS connectors unplugged

4. Remove the fan unit by unscrewing the four screws fixing it to the rack, see
Figure 204.

Figure 204 Remove the fan unit

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 265


Install MPT-HLS standard in an LSY rack (ETSI Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual
market)

5. If the Base Band section needs to be kept (cases a and b) carefully remove the
dust that is accumulated into the grid placed in the bottom side of the Base Band
sub-shelf, see Figure 205.

Figure 205 Bottom side of base band shelf before and after dust removal

6. The supply and CAN-BUS cables will not be used anymore in the upgraded
system so they can be removed from the rack.

7. Place the new fan support in the same position of the old one. To do it, use the
same nuts on the rack that were used for the old fan unit.
IMPORTANT NOTICE: Prior to placing the fan support:
− The shock absorber rubber band must be placed on the back. Remove the
protective band from the adhesive tape of the shock absorber and stick it to
the internal side of the back cover of the rack. The position of the shock
absorber band has to be in the middle of the two nuts for the fan support
fixation, see Figure 206.

Figure 206 Shock absorbing rubber band

− In configurations where the Base band shelf will stay in place (case a and
b) the gasket 3DB80783AAAA must be applied (this item is contained into
the 3DB80781AAAA Kit of cover branching): Remove the protective band
on the gasket adhesive and stick it in the bottom side of the Base Band sub-
shelf as indicated in Figure 207.

266 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Install MPT-HLS standard in an LSY rack (ETSI
market)

Figure 207 Placement of the 3DB80783AAAA gasket

16.4.1.2 Fan unit for ADM sub-shelf replacement

In case of full replacement of LSY transceivers with MPT-HLS standard in a system


with ADM (case d) the fan unit of ADM must be replaced by a new MPT-HLS
standard fan unit. Only one 4X fan module on the fan support will be used in this
case.

Procedure

1. Shut down the fan module acting on the two breakers (battery A and B) on the
TRU.

2. Unplug the two supply cables the CAN-BUS cable.

3. Unscrew and remove the fan unit.

4. The supply and CAN-BUS cables will not be used anymore in the upgraded
system so they can be removed from the rack.

5. Remove dust from the bottom of ADM sub-shelf if needed.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 267


Install MPT-HLS standard in an LSY rack (ETSI Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual
market)

6. Place the new fan support in the same position of the old one. To do it, use the
same nuts on the rack that were used for the old fan unit.

16.4.1.3 Powering of new fan units

Once mounted on the system the new fan units must be powered.

Use the 3CC52208AAAA pre-assembled Fan unit power cord for the purpose. This
cable has one end terminated with special crimp connectors for the connections on
the TRU terminals. The other end is free and must be terminated with the connector
for the plug-in to the 4X fan unit. The procedures to be followed are the same as
those described in section 15.3.1.1.

Pass the cables on the duct (left side or right side depending on 4Xfan module
position) and drive them towards the top of the rack as shown in Figure 208.

Figure 208 Routing of supply cables for fans

Pass the cables from the backside into the TRU and connect to the terminal
corresponding to the breaker.

In case of only one 4X fan unit installed for the transceiver sub-shelf, the already
existing 2A breaker (used for the old fan unit) shall be used. In case of two 4X fan
unit an additional 2A breaker must be inserted in the TRU (see Upgrade use cases).

16.4.1.4 CAN-BUS reconfiguration after fan unit replacement

In an LSY system the alarms of the fan units are managed by the base band section
through a CAN-BUS connection. The following pictures show the connection scheme
in case of systems with or without ADM:

268 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Install MPT-HLS standard in an LSY rack (ETSI
market)

Figure 209 CAN-BUS connection scheme for LSY systems without ADM

Figure 210 CAN-BUS connection scheme for LSY systems with ADM

In upgrading systems without ADM in which the Base Band is kept (case a) the CAN
BUS connection must be removed but the connector on the Base Band must be
terminated. Use the CAN BUS terminator that was in the old transceivers fan unit for
the purpose, as shown in Figure 211.

Figure 211 CAN-BUS terminator for case a

In upgrading systems with ADM in which the Base Band is kept (case b) the CAN
BUS connection scheme must be changed as shown in Figure 212.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 269


Install MPT-HLS standard in an LSY rack (ETSI Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual
market)

Figure 212 CAN-BUS terminator for case b

16.4.1.5 Alarm management for replaced fan units

Alarms for the new MPT-HL fan units for the transceiver sub-shelf shall be managed
through the new MPT-HLS transceivers. Section 15.3.6.3 provides all details for
these connections.

The alarm management of the new fan unit for ADM (case d in Upgrade use cases)
will be performed by MSS housekeeping (AUX board in MSS-8).

16.4.2 Upgrading of the transceivers sub-shelf


In an LSY system upgrade, the operations related to the transceiver sub-shelf mainly
consist of the following:

• preparation of the slots for the insertion of new MPT-HL transceivers


• adaptation of the transceivers
• insertion and connection of the new transceivers.

No changes to powering of the transceiver sub-shelf are needed. The 20A breakers
already present in the TRU do not need to be changed.

16.4.2.1 Preparation of the slots

The unused positions in a LSY transceiver sub-shelf are closed with covers in the
front and top of each slot.

To enable a slot for an additional transceiver the covers must be removed, as shown
in Figure 213.

270 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Install MPT-HLS standard in an LSY rack (ETSI
market)

Figure 213 Removal of front and top cover to enable a new slot on the sub-shelf

16.4.2.2 Preparation of the MPT-HLS transceiver and insertion into


the sub-shelf

Different dimensions of the MPT-HL transceivers with respect to the LSY ones
impose the addition of mechanical and electrical adapters in the transceiver body.

Two equivalent kits are available: 3DB80504AA or 3DB80896AA. One or the other
can be received and can be used indifferently for the transceiver adaptation to the
LSY slot.

Note: The second kit (3DB80896AA) is dedicated to the LHRC upgrading, on which the first
one cannot be used. See dedicated chapter 17 Install MPT-HLS standard in an LSY-LHRC
sub-shelf (ETSI market).

The adaptation kit contains three parts: one to be put on the top, another on the
bottom and the last on the back of the transceiver. Figure 214 shows the positioning
of the three adapters.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 271


Install MPT-HLS standard in an LSY rack (ETSI Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual
market)

Figure 214 Placement of MPT-HLS transceiver adapters

The adapters must be screwed to the transceiver main body using Philips M2.5
screws (included in the kit). Use a tightening torque of 0.53 Nm.

The new transceiver can be now inserted into the sub-shelf. Align it to the slot rails
and push to connect the backside supply connectors. Block the transceiver with the
two screws in the top and bottom position, as shown in Figure 215.

272 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Install MPT-HLS standard in an LSY rack (ETSI
market)

Figure 215 MPT-HLS transceivers in the LSY sub-shelf with details of the blocking screws

16.4.2.3 RF connections of the MPT-HLS transceiver in a LSY sub-


shelf and branching cover placement

Once inserted into the sub-shelf the MPT-HLS transceiver RF connection to and from
branching filters must be completed.

The position of RF IN (RX or RX DIV) and OUT (TX) connector is different in a MPT-
HLS transceiver with respect to an LSY one. The RF cables needed are provided in
kits which will always contain one cable for TX, one for RX, and one for RX DIV. In a
system without a diversity receiver the RX DIV cable is not required.

Table 26 provides the kit references and the cable usage.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 273


Install MPT-HLS standard in an LSY rack (ETSI Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual
market)

Table 26 RF cables reference table for MPT-HLS transceivers in an LSY rack

System Kit reference Content Cable reference Usage


frequency
range

6L,6U,7,8GHz 3DB80543AAAA 2x 230mm RF cable 3DB80693AAAA TX and RX DIV


M90/M90

1x250mm RF cable 3DB80693AAAA RX


M90/M90

10, 11, 13GHz 3DB80797AAAA 2x 280mm RF cable 3DB80748AAAA TX and RX


M90/M90

1x280mm RF cable 3DB80748AAAA RX DIV


M90/M

Figure 216 and Figure 217 show the RF connections between the TX/RX connectors
and branching filters.

274 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Install MPT-HLS standard in an LSY rack (ETSI
market)

Figure 216 Upper RF connections for new MPT-HL transceivers in a LSY sub-shelf

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 275


Install MPT-HLS standard in an LSY rack (ETSI Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual
market)

Figure 217 Lower RF connections for new MPT-HL transceivers in a LSY sub-shelf

After the RF connections for all new transceivers are completed, the new RX
branching cover must be mounted in the rack.

The cover branching kit 3DB80781AAAA contains the cover. The screws and nuts to
be used for rack fixation are also included.

The new cover must be placed in the same position as the old one removed during
fan unit replacement, as shown in Figure 218 (see Fan unit for transceiver sub-shelf
replacement). The nuts already present in the rack can be used.

276 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Install MPT-HLS standard in an LSY rack (ETSI
market)

Figure 218 New RX branching cover placement

Note: The 3DB80781AAAA kit contains the 3DB80783AAAA gasket to be used in between
new fan unit and Base Band.

16.4.3 Branching section expansion


In case of addition of new transceivers with respect to the old installation the
branching section must be upgraded through the addition of the TX/RX/(RX DIV)
circulators and filters relative to the new channels to be introduced.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 277


Install MPT-HLS standard in an LSY rack (ETSI Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual
market)

The branching expansion procedure is the same as described for standard MPT-HLS
standard systems. See Expand an MPT-HLS system (ETSI market).

16.4.4 Positioning and powering of the MSS-8 sub-shelf


The positioning of the MSS-8 sub-shelf in case of LSY system upgrading will depend
on the existing system to be upgraded and on the final configuration to be achieved
(see Upgrade use cases).

Specific positions on the rack have to be used depending on the case.

Assembly note: placement/adaptation of MSS sub-rack into the LSY 21" rack is
achieved using brackets (3DB18181AAAB for MSS-8). The brackets must be
mounted on the MSS-8 sub-shelf prior to mounting it on the system rack.

16.4.4.1 Placement of MSS-8 in systems without ADM that will


maintain the Base Band sub-shelf (case a)

The MSS-8 sub-shelf will be placed in the empty space previously reserved for ADM;
see Figure 219.

Figure 219 Placement of MSS-8 in the ADM reserved empty space

278 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Install MPT-HLS standard in an LSY rack (ETSI
market)

Holes number 14 and 16 on the rack must be used to place the nuts and screws of
the brackets.

16.4.4.2 Placement of MSS-8 in systems where Base Band is


removed (case c and d)

The MSS-8 sub-shelf will be placed in the space left free after the Base Band
removal, as shown in Figure 220.

Figure 220 Placement of MSS-8 in the space left by Base Band removal

Holes number 31 and 33 on the rack must be used to place the nuts and screws of
the brackets.

16.4.4.3 Powering of MSS-8 sub-shelf

Two cords (3CC52209AAAA) must be used for the supply connections of the MSS-
8 sub-shelf.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 279


Install MPT-HLS standard in an LSY rack (ETSI Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual
market)

The cable is terminated at one end with the connector for the MSS-8. The other end
is terminated with the special crimp connector for the connection to the 3DB05602AA
LSY TRU terminals. If another TRU is used, the crimp connectors must be removed
by cutting the wires.

Insert the cables in the duct (left side) and drive them toward the top of the rack. Pass
the cables from the backside into the TRU and connect to the terminal corresponding
to the breakers (value 10A).

280 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Install MPT-HLS standard in an LSY-LHRC sub-
shelf (ETSI market)

17 Install MPT-HLS standard in an LSY-


LHRC sub-shelf (ETSI market)

17.1 Purpose
An existing 9600 LSY-LHRC version system can be upgraded by replacing the LSY
transceivers with MPT-HLS transceivers.

The upgraded system will exploit the MPT-HLS system performances but retains the
radio configurations of the old LHRC system.

This chapter describes the procedures for replacing the necessary transceivers.

17.2 General

17.2.1 LSY-LHRC existing installations


The basic building block of a 9600 LSY–LHRC version system is a 19” sub-shelf that
contains up to two transceivers (two radio channels). Each LHRC sub-shelf is
functionally independent and is composed of the following (see Figure 221):

• Transceivers section
• Branching section
• Base band section
• Power supply and filtering section

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 281


Install MPT-HLS standard in an LSY-LHRC sub- Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual
shelf (ETSI market)

Figure 221 LSY-LHRC sub-shelf sections

An LHRC sub-shelf can be hosted on a 19” or 21” rack. In the latter case, specific
mechanical adaptation brackets are installed.

Multiple LHRC sub-shelves can be hosted in the same rack (for example, up to three
in a 2200mm 21” ETSI rack) but each sub-shelf is independent in terms of
functionality.

LHRC systems may be equipped with a fan module, depending on the configuration
of the entire installed system. The power supply for the fan module is provided
separately by the power distribution unit through two 2A breaker (protected
configuration).

282 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Install MPT-HLS standard in an LSY-LHRC sub-
shelf (ETSI market)

17.2.2 9600 LSY – LHRC upgrading with MPT HLS


(generalities)
An LHRC system can be upgraded with MPT HLS transceivers that possess the
same frequency ranges of the original LHRC installation.

Since every LHRC sub-shelf is functionally independent, all the actions conceived for
upgrading to MPT-HLS will be referred to the single sub-shelf.

From the original system, the following parts are kept:

1. The TRU (Top Rack Unit, the power distribution unit for ETSI racks) or PDU
(Power Distribution Unit in other installations).
2. The power connections cables from the TRU or PDU to the LHRC sub-shelf
3. The LHRC sub-shelf with:
a. The filtered power input plugs
b. The branching section
4. Any existing connections toward the antenna feeders

Contrary to the original LHRC system, once upgraded to MPT HLS, the proper fan
module must always be installed.

The MPT HLS are conceived for working with Nokia MSS (MSS8/MSS1) switch
system. Therefore, an MSS sub-shelf must be hosted in the same rack of the LHRC
or in a different one but close enough to guarantee electrical or optical connections
to/from the MPT HLS transceivers.

17.3 Procedure for 9600 LSY – LHRC upgrading


with MPT HLS
Regardless of the system frequency and radio configuration, a general procedure
can be drawn.

Procedure

1. Switch off all breakers in the TRU/PDU that control the power of the LHRC sub-
shelf.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 283


Install MPT-HLS standard in an LSY-LHRC sub- Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual
shelf (ETSI market)

2. Remove all the cable connections between the LSY transceivers and branching
and between the LSY transceivers and the Base Band boards.

3. Remove all the boards from the Base Band section of the LHRC and cover the
empty space on the sub-shelf with the dedicated dummy plate (PN:
3DB80915AA).

4. Remove the power supply modules for the Base band in the supply section and
cover the two empty spaces with the dedicated dummy plates (PN:
3DB03010AA).

Figure 222 Module removal before upgrading

5. Remove, if present, the existing Fan Module and the relative power cabling.

6. Install the fan support (kit 3DB80901AA) just below the LHRC sub-shelf as
indicate in Figure 223. In the case of installation on ETSI 21” racks, the
adaptation brackets (3CC50065AAAA) must be used too. Use the tightening
torque values indicated in Figure 223.

7. Place the MPT HLS fan module in correspondence of the transceivers section
(see Figure 223).

284 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Install MPT-HLS standard in an LSY-LHRC sub-
shelf (ETSI market)

Figure 223 MPT HLS Fan module

8. Provide power supply to the Fan module.


Power supply of the fan module must be provided through two bifilar 1mmsq
section cables (battery protected power supply). Each power supply connection
must be protected by a 2A breaker. If the existing power distribution unit already
has the 2A breakers (systems with the LSY fan units already installed) these
breakers can be reused, otherwise the proper breakers must be added.
In most cases, the LSY-LHRC systems are installed in a ETSI 21” rack equipped
with a dedicated TRU. There are two different versions of TRUs depending on
the deployment date of the system. The following table lists the correct code of
the 2A breaker to be used according to the TRU type.

Table 27 RU type and 2A breaker

ETSI 21” LSY-LHRC TRU Type 2A breaker (identification code)

3DB05602AA (most recent) 1AB162710010

3DB00734AA (older) 1AB162710002

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 285


Install MPT-HLS standard in an LSY-LHRC sub- Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual
shelf (ETSI market)

With the most recent version (3DB05602AA) of the TRU, the cable require crimp
contacts for the connection. In this case, a dedicated cable (3CC52208AA) is
provided for the power supply of the fans.
See 16.2.3.1 Existing TRU upgrading or replacement for more details and
consider if to recall it for a better explanation.
Once connected to the breakers, route the supply cables in a proper way toward
the fan module using the lateral cable ducts, if present.

9. Remove the existing LSY transceivers from the transceivers section of the
LHRC sub-shelf.

10. Prepare the new MPT HLS transceivers with the dedicated adapters permitting
them to be hosted in the existing slots. Dedicated kit (PN 3DB80896AA)
containing all the adapters is available and procedure to be followed is reported
in chapter 16.4.2.2 Preparation of the MPT-HLS transceiver and insertion into
the sub-shelf.

11. Insert the new MPT HLS transceivers inside the LHRC sub-shelf and connect
the RF ports to the branching section, according to the schemes reported in the
next sections. The new MPT HLS transceivers will be secured in their correct
position by tightening the two screws with the torque value reported in
Figure 224 (NB 1).
The RF cables must be tightened by means of a dynamometric wrench with the
torque values as indicated in Figure 224 (NB 2).

Figure 224 Tightening the RF cables of the MPT HLS transceivers

286 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Install MPT-HLS standard in an LSY-LHRC sub-
shelf (ETSI market)

Note: For the access to the branching section, the existing Branching front cover must be
removed and must be reassembled.

Different RF cable kits have been designed for a proper connections of the new transceivers
with the branching section depending on configurations and frequency ranges. These kits
and the different use cases are listed and shown in the next section.

12. Connect cables (3CC52141ADAA) for Fan and Fan alarms management. For
more information, see 15.3.6.3 Fan management.

13. Connect the Transceivers to MSS.

Note: On MSS (8 or 1) installation, the MSS should be preferably placed in the same rack
hosting the LHRC according to space availability. There is no technical constraint except
the maximum length of the data connections preventing its placement elsewhere. For the
installation and powering of the MSS, follow the proper installation instructions in this
handbook. When powering through an existing LSY-LHRC TRU, follow the indications
reported in 16.2.3.1 Existing TRU upgrading or replacement. For data connection between
MSS and MPT HLS transceivers, follow the indication reported in 15.3.6.2.2 Electrical
connections.

Figure 225 LHRC system after upgrading with MPT HLS transceivers

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 287


Install MPT-HLS standard in an LSY-LHRC sub- Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual
shelf (ETSI market)

17.4 LSY-LHRC system configurations and their


upgrading with MPT HLS
LSY-LHRC installed systems are ranging from 4 to 13GHz in different radio
configurations. In this chapter, the possible cases are presented and the connection
schemes for the new MPT HLS transceivers with branching section. The RF cable
kits that have to be used case by case are also included.

17.4.1 Systems at 6, 7, and 8 GHz, 2 channels co-polar


The scheme in Figure 226 shows the designation and the proper placement of RF
cables connecting the MPT HLS transceivers. The kit of RF cables for this
configuration is the 3DB80909AA.

Figure 226 Systems at 6, 7, and 8 GHz, 2 channels co-polar

288 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Install MPT-HLS standard in an LSY-LHRC sub-
shelf (ETSI market)

17.4.2 Systems at 6, 7, and 8 GHz, 2 channels alternate


polar
The scheme in Figure 227 shows the designation and the proper placement of RF
cables connecting the MPT HLS transceivers. The kit of RF cables for this
configuration is the 3DB80910AA.

Figure 227 Systems at 6, 7, and 8 GHz, 2 channels alternate polar

17.4.3 Systems at 10, 11, and 13 GHz, 2 channels co-polar


The scheme in Figure 228 shows the designation and the proper placement of RF
cables connecting the MPT HLS transceivers. The kit of RF cables for this
configuration is the 3DB80909AA.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 289


Install MPT-HLS standard in an LSY-LHRC sub- Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual
shelf (ETSI market)

Figure 228 Systems at 10, 11, and 13 GHz, 2 channels co-polar

17.4.4 Systems at 10, 11, and 13 GHz, 2 channels alternate


polar
The scheme in Figure 229 shows the designation and the proper placement of RF
cables connecting the MPT HLS transceivers. The kit of RF cables for this
configuration is the 3DB80910AA.

290 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Install MPT-HLS standard in an LSY-LHRC sub-
shelf (ETSI market)

Figure 229 Systems at 10, 11, and 13 GHz, 2 channels alternate polar

17.4.5 Systems at 10.5 GHz, 2 channels co-polar special


configuration
The scheme in Figure 230 shows the designation and the proper placement of RF
cables connecting the MPT HLS transceivers. The kit of RF cables for this
configuration is the 3DB81363AA.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 291


Install MPT-HLS standard in an LSY-LHRC sub- Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual
shelf (ETSI market)

Figure 230 Systems at 10.5 GHz, 2 channels co-polar special configuration

17.4.6 Systems at 10.5 GHz, 2 channels alternate polar


special configuration
The scheme in Figure 231 shows the designation and the proper placement of RF
cables connecting the MPT HLS transceivers. The kit of RF cables for this
configuration is the 3DB81364AA.

292 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Install MPT-HLS standard in an LSY-LHRC sub-
shelf (ETSI market)

Figure 231 Systems at 10.5 GHz, 2 channels alternate polar special configuration

17.4.7 Systems at 4 GHz, 2 channels co-polar


The scheme in Figure 232 shows the designation and the proper placement of RF
cables connecting the MPT HLS transceivers. The kit of RF cables for this
configuration is the 3DB81367AA.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 293


Install MPT-HLS standard in an LSY-LHRC sub- Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual
shelf (ETSI market)

Figure 232 Systems at 4 GHz, 2 channels co-polar

17.4.8 Systems at 4 GHz, 2 channels alternate polar


The scheme in Figure 233 shows the designation and the proper placement of RF
cables connecting the MPT HLS transceivers. The kit of RF cables for this
configuration is the 3DB81368AA.

294 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Install MPT-HLS standard in an LSY-LHRC sub-
shelf (ETSI market)

Figure 233 Systems at 4 GHz, 2 channels alternate polar

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 295


Install MPT-HLS standard in an LSY-LHRC sub- Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual
shelf (ETSI market)

296 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Install MPT-HLS compact in a 21” ETSI or 19”
rack

18 Install MPT-HLS compact in a 21” ETSI or


19” rack

18.1 Purpose
This chapter describes how to install the compact variant of the 9500 MPR long haul
slim in a 21” ETSI or 19” rack. See one of the following for information about other
installations:

• For information about installing the MPT-HLS standard, see Install MPT-HLS
standard in an ETSI rack (ETSI market) or Install MPT-HLS standard in an LSY
rack (ETSI market)
• For information about the MPT-HLS compact outdoor cabinet, see Appendix A:
Additional cabinet installation instructions.

18.2 Prerequisites
An ETSI rack must be installed, for Nokia supplied 21” and 19” racks; see Rack
installation.

18.2.1 Customer supplied 19” rack requirements


The MPT-HLS compact Indoor 19” rack can be a Nokia-provided or customer
supplied 19” rack. A customer supplied rack must meet component placement
criteria.

• Sufficient free space must be available. Table 28 defines required occupancy


units:

Table 28 Customer supplied 19” rack - required units

Component Required Units

Branching drawer 4U

Transceiver sub-shelf 2.5U

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 297


Install MPT-HLS compact in a 21” ETSI or 19” Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual
rack

Table 28 Customer supplied 19” rack - required units (Continued)

Component Required Units

MSS-8 2U

• The branching drawer must be placed above the transceiver sub-shelf with no
space in between.
• The MSS-8 is not required to be close to, or in the same rack as, the branching
drawer or transceiver sub-shelf, but this is the recommended placement. In this
procedure, the MSS-8 is placed directly below the last transceiver sub-shelf
(preferred placement).

Eleven total units are needed for all components. See Figure 234.

Figure 234 Customer supplied 19” rack - space requirements

The customer supplied rack must also meet the following criteria:

• Have threaded metric holes (M6) on the jambs for part fastening.
• Be in good condition and must be safely installed and secured.
• Grounded according to standards applicable for the rack used.
• Must have 50mm between the lateral walls of the sub-shelves and any other
external equipment, obstacle, or obstruction. See Figure 235.

298 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Install MPT-HLS compact in a 21” ETSI or 19”
rack

Figure 235 Required spacing between rack and external objects (19” rack - customer supplied)

Access to antenna feeders is located on the rear side of the branching drawer (see
Figure 236). Ensure sufficient space is provided to antenna feeders for Twist Flex
cable routing.

Figure 236 Branching drawer - rear access

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 299


Install MPT-HLS compact in a 21” ETSI or 19” Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual
rack

18.2.2 Customer supplied 19” rack - power requirements


A power distribution unit with the following criteria must be used:

• Must be able to provide the power supply in a battery protected way.


• The two battery sections must have breakers for sectioning each part of the
system. See Table 29 for breakers values.
• Maximum distance of the power distribution unit from the supplied unit must not
exceed 4mt (length of the power supply cords provided).

Table 29 MPT-HLS compact breaker values (19” rack - customer


supplied)

Component Breaker Value

Transceiver sub-shelf 1 10A

Transceiver sub-shelf 2 10A

MSS-8 10A

18.3 General
The MPT-HLS compact systems can be installed in a 21" ETSI rack (2200, 2000,
1700 and 1300 mm) or a 19” rack. For the 19” rack option, this rack can be supplied
by Nokia (seismic, 2100 mm) or customer supplied provided certain installation
conditions are met.

The MPT-HLS compact is delivered as one of the following:

• RF Subsystem (21” ETSI racks only): The system arrives with all the parts
already mounted and connected according to the configuration ordered. The
MSS-1/4/8 system must be mounted and connected in the field according to the
configuration tested in the factory before delivery.
• Basic Process (19” racks only): The system arrives with the transceivers sub-
shelves and the branching drawer set with the requested configuration, but not
mounted on a rack. The MSS-1/4/8 system must be mounted and configured
always in field. Components are assembled and connected in field.

Antenna feeders access is on the top of the rack for 21” racks and the back of the
rack for 19” racks.

Table 30 shows the antenna flanges at the antenna feeder access of the systems.

300 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Install MPT-HLS compact in a 21” ETSI or 19”
rack

Table 30 Antenna flanges for MPT-HLS compact

System frequency range Flange type at the antenna feeder


access

4L UDR40

4U UDR48

6L UDR70

6U UDR70

7 GHz UDR70

8 GHz UDR84

10 GHz UDR100

11 GHz UDR100

13 GHz UDR120

18.3.1 Transceivers sub-shelf


Each transceivers sub-shelf occupies 2.5 Units in a rack. Each sub-shelf is able to
support up two MPT HLS transceivers. In case of an under-equipped configuration,
dummy plate covers are used.

A complete view, of a fully equipped sub-shelf with 2 transceivers, is shown in


Figure 237.

Figure 237 MPT-HLS compact transceiver sub-shelf with two transceivers

Figure 238 shows the sub-shelf0 with a dummy plate.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 301


Install MPT-HLS compact in a 21” ETSI or 19” Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual
rack

Figure 238 MPT-HLS compact transceiver sub-shelf with one transceiver

As shown in Figure 239, an equipped transceiver sub-shelf is composed of the


following parts:

1. sub-shelf chassis: hosts the transceivers (up to two) and the fan unit. It contains
the power supply access and provides the power supply to transceivers and fan
unit through a back panel.
2. Power supply access: part of the sub-shelf chassis. It presents two filtered
connectors (Batt.A and Batt.B) for protected battery connection.
3. Fan unit: provides the cooling system for the transceivers hosted in the sub-
shelf. It is powered through the sub-shelf back panel and It can be unplugged in
case of maintenance/replacement. There are 2 connectors on the front for
protected alarm management through transceiver connections.
4. Transceivers: MPT-HLS (any frequency belonging to the MPT-HLS family).

Figure 239 Equipped MPT-HLS compact sub-shelf

The fan unit and transceivers are pluggable units. They can be plugged in and
removed as follows:

302 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Install MPT-HLS compact in a 21” ETSI or 19”
rack

• The fan unit can be unplugged by loosening the blocking screw on the right. To
plug the unit in, push it until the connector on the rear side is engaged with the
connector on the back panel, then tighten the blocking screw. See Figure 240.

Figure 240 Fan unit

• To unplug the transceiver first loosen the two blocking screws on the levers. Use
the levers to disengage the unit and pull the transceiver out. To plug it, push the
unit until the two connectors on the rear side are engaged with the connectors
on the back panel, then tighten the 2 blocking screws. See Figure 241.

Figure 241 Transceiver levers with blocking screws

18.3.2 Connections
Connections on the transceiver sub-shelves are already in place for systems using
21” ETSI racks. For systems using 19” racks, RF connections must be set in the field.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 303


Install MPT-HLS compact in a 21” ETSI or 19” Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual
rack

18.3.2.1 Power connections and grounding

Battery protected powering of the transceivers sub-shelf is set up by connecting the


two filtered connectors (batt. A and batt. B) on the right side of the sub-shelf to the
battery breakers on the power distribution unit of the system. The connection must
be done using dedicated power cords (3DB18272AA). The breaker on the power
distribution unit must be a 10A. Figure 242 shows the connection of the power cords
to the transceiver sub-shelf.

Figure 242 Power cords connected to the transceiver sub-shelf

Grounding of the transceiver sub-shelf is achieved directly through the mechanical


contact between the sub-shelf and racks in case of 21" ETSI and 19" Nokia provided
racks. In case of customer provided 19" rack, the transceivers sub-shelf must be
grounded directly by connecting the grounding kit 3CC13423AA to the GND point on
the right fixation bracket; see Figure 243.

Figure 243 Grounding point

304 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Install MPT-HLS compact in a 21” ETSI or 19”
rack

18.3.2.2 Fan unit connections

The Fan Unit must be connected to the transceivers for alarm management. Each
Fan Module has two RJ-45 connectors in the front plate to permit protected alarm
exchange when two transceivers are present in the sub-shelf. When only one
transceiver is available, only one connection is made.

A dedicated 1.3 m Ethernet cable is used to connect the RTs and Fan modules, as
shown in Figure 244.

Figure 244 Fan unit connections for alarm management

18.3.2.3 Transceivers connections

The following connections are required for the transceivers:

1. Transceivers are connected to the branching filters through dedicated RF


cables. Depending on the system configuration and frequency, the cables will
have different lengths and codes. For In-Field installations the cables will be
delivered in kits. See the 9500 MPR Product Information Manual to identify the
kits.
2. Transceivers must be connected to the MSS-1/4/8 for traffic exchange using
Optical SFP plugs and fibers or SFP copper cables. See the 9500 MPR Product
Information Manual for part numbers.
3. When using RPS configurations, transceivers on the same sub-shelf must be
connected to each other with a 0.5 m long SFP copper cable; see Figure 245.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 305


Install MPT-HLS compact in a 21” ETSI or 19” Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual
rack

Figure 245 RF, data and RPS connections on transceivers

4. In case of heteropolar systems, cross-polar transceivers are always put in


separate sub-shelves. XPIC connection must be set up among these
transceivers using a 0.5 m XPIC cable; see Figure 246.

Figure 246 XPIC connections on transceivers

18.3.3 Branching drawer


The branching drawer is a subassembly containing:

• Channel filters and circulators

306 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Install MPT-HLS compact in a 21” ETSI or 19”
rack

• Splitters and switch (HSB or RPS configuration cases)

The branching drawer is installed above the first transceivers sub-shelf and occupies
4 units in a rack. Configurations are factory set with the configuration requested by
the customer. It can contain up to four+ four filters for the TX+RX sections plus the
filters for RXdiv for systems configured in this way. Branching configuration can be
homopolar or heteropolar.

External dimensions and positioning of the components in the drawers for systems
6 to 13GHz are different than those for system in the 4L/4U frequency ranges. This
is due to the mechanical dimensions of the filters and circulators that are frequency
dependent. For 21" rack installations, extension brackets are added to increase the
width of the branching drawer.

Antenna circulators also are included in the branching drawer but only on systems
with frequency from 6 to 13 GHz. On the 4L and 4U systems the antenna circulators
are arranged outside the branching drawer.

18.3.3.1 4L and 4U systems

4L and 4U branching drawers have the following dimensions:

• 19" racks installation: 485mm (w) x 179mm (h) (=4U) x 224mm (d)
• 21" racks installation (*): 535mm (w) x 179mm (h) (=4U) x 224mm (d)

Where * for 21” racks indicates that proper extension brackets are added leading the
"w" dimension to 535mm.

The branching drawers on 4L and 4U systems are built on two different mechanical
assemblies depending on the configuration. See Figure 247 and Figure 248.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 307


Install MPT-HLS compact in a 21” ETSI or 19” Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual
rack

Figure 247 4L/U branching drawer homopolar config (four channels)

Figure 248 4L/U branching drawer in heteropolar config (four channels)

Position of filters and circulators depends on configuration and is defined in the


section Standard branching configurations.

18.3.3.1.1 Position of antenna circulators

On the 4L and 4U systems, the antenna circulators are not part of the branching
drawer. They are put on the top of the racks and connected to the branching output
ports through coaxial cables.

308 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Install MPT-HLS compact in a 21” ETSI or 19”
rack

On the 21" ETSI racks, the antenna circulators are mechanically fixed to the rack
through proper brackets. Then they must be connected to the waveguide antenna
feeder connector. See Figure 249.

On the 19" racks (either provided by Nokia or already existing in the customer
premises) the antenna circulators must be fixed directly to the antenna feeder
connector without any other mechanical fixation system. The antenna feeder access
supports have to sustain the antenna circulators once connected to them. See
Figure 250.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 309


Install MPT-HLS compact in a 21” ETSI or 19” Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual
rack

Figure 249 Antenna circulators in a 21" ETSI rack

310 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Install MPT-HLS compact in a 21” ETSI or 19”
rack

Figure 250 Antenna circulators on a 19" rack

18.3.3.2 6 to 13 GHz systems

The branching drawer has the following mechanical dimensions:

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 311


Install MPT-HLS compact in a 21” ETSI or 19” Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual
rack

• 19" racks installation: 485mm (w) x 179mm (h) x 284mm (d)


• 21" racks installation (*): 535mm (w) x 179mm (h) x 284mm (d)

Each branching drawer occupies four Units in a rack.

On branching drawers assembled for 19" racks, access to antenna feeders is located
on the rear side of the drawer; see Figure 251.

On branching drawers assembled for 21" ETSI racks, access to antenna feeders is
routed on top of the rack through rigid waveguides; see Figure 252.

Figure 251 6 to 13 GHz branching drawer for 19” rack

312 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Install MPT-HLS compact in a 21” ETSI or 19”
rack

Figure 252 6 to 13 GHz branching drawer for 21” rack

The flange type on the antenna ports depend on the system frequency and are listed
in Table 30.

18.3.3.2.1 TX and RX filters

Figure 253 and Figure 254 show the TX, RX and RXdiv sections for the homopolar
and heteropolar branching.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 313


Install MPT-HLS compact in a 21” ETSI or 19” Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual
rack

Figure 253 Homopolar branching

Figure 254 Heteropolar branching

314 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Install MPT-HLS compact in a 21” ETSI or 19”
rack

18.3.4 Standard branching configurations


This section describes the standard branching configurations used with the MPT-
HLS compact.

18.3.4.1 4L and 4U configurations

18.3.4.1.1 4L/4U:Two channels homopolar without diversity

Figure 255 shows the branching arrangement and the RF connections between
branching and transceivers.

Figure 255 4L/4U:Two channels homopolar without diversity

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 315


Install MPT-HLS compact in a 21” ETSI or 19” Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual
rack

18.3.4.1.2 4L/4U:Two channels homopolar with diversity

Figure 256 shows the branching arrangement and the RF connections between
branching and transceivers.

Figure 256 4L/4U:Two channels homopolar with diversity

316 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Install MPT-HLS compact in a 21” ETSI or 19”
rack

18.3.4.1.3 4L/4U: Four channel homopolar without diversity

Figure 257 shows the branching arrangement and the RF connections between
branching and transceivers.

Figure 257 4L/4U: Four channel homopolar without diversity

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 317


Install MPT-HLS compact in a 21” ETSI or 19” Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual
rack

18.3.4.1.4 4L/4U: Four channel homopolar with diversity

Figure 258 shows the branching arrangement and the RF connections between
branching and transceivers.

Figure 258 4L/4U: Four channel homopolar with diversity

318 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Install MPT-HLS compact in a 21” ETSI or 19”
rack

18.3.4.1.5 4L/4U: 2 + 2 channels heteropolar without diversity

Figure 259 shows the branching arrangement and the RF connections between
branching and transceivers.

Figure 259 4L/4U: 2 + 2 channels heteropolar without diversity

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 319


Install MPT-HLS compact in a 21” ETSI or 19” Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual
rack

18.3.4.1.6 4L/4U: 2 + 2 channels heteropolar with diversity

Figure 260 shows the branching arrangement and the RF connections between
branching and transceivers.

Figure 260 4L/4U: 2 + 2 channels heteropolar with diversity

320 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Install MPT-HLS compact in a 21” ETSI or 19”
rack

18.3.4.1.7 4L/4U: HSB without diversity

Figure 261 shows the branching arrangement and the RF connections between
branching and transceivers.

Figure 261 4L/4U: HSB without diversity

Note: These notes apply to Figure 261.

- The cable exiting from the RF switch (12* in the picture above) must be connected to the
HSB connector of transceiver 2 (TR2).

- The RF cables indicated in the picture for systems installed in field are part of kit
3DB81193AAAA (HSB kit). Refer to the paper documentation included in the package for
identification and placement.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 321


Install MPT-HLS compact in a 21” ETSI or 19” Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual
rack

18.3.4.1.8 4L/4U: 2 x HSB without diversity

Figure 262 shows the branching arrangement and the RF connections between
branching and transceivers.

Figure 262 4L/4U: 2 x HSB without diversity

Note: These notes apply to Figure 262.

- The cable exiting from the RF switch (12* in the picture above) must be connected to the
HSB connector of transceiver TR2 and TR4.

- The RF cables indicated in the picture for systems installed in field are part of kit
3DB81212AAAA (HSB kit). Refer to the paper documentation included in the package for
identification and placement.

322 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Install MPT-HLS compact in a 21” ETSI or 19”
rack

18.3.4.1.9 4L/4U: HSB diversity with combiner

Figure 263 shows the branching arrangement and the RF connections between
branching and transceivers.

Figure 263 4L/4U: HSB diversity with combiner

Note: These notes apply to Figure 263.

- The cable exiting from the RF switch (12* in the picture above) must be connected to the
HSB connector of transceiver 2 (TR2).

- The RF cables indicated in the picture for systems installed in field are part of kit
3DB81147AAAA (HSB SD kit). Refer to the paper documentation included in the package
for identification and placement.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 323


Install MPT-HLS compact in a 21” ETSI or 19” Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual
rack

18.3.4.1.10 4L/4U: 2 x HSB diversity with combiner

Figure 264 shows the branching arrangement and the RF connections between
branching and transceivers.

Figure 264 4L/4U: 2 x HSB diversity with combiner

Note: These notes apply to Figure 264.

- The cable exiting from the RF switch (12* in the picture above) must be connected to the
HSB connector of transceiver TR2 and TR4.

- The RF cables indicated in the picture for systems installed in field are part of kit
3DB81210AAAA (2xHSB SD kit). Refer to the paper documentation included in the package
for identification and placement.

324 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Install MPT-HLS compact in a 21” ETSI or 19”
rack

18.3.4.1.11 4L/4U: HSB diversity RPS

Figure 265 shows the branching arrangement and the RF connections between
branching and transceivers.

Figure 265 4L/4U: HSB diversity RPS

Note: These notes apply to Figure 265.

- The cable exiting from the RF switch (12* in the picture above) must be connected to the
HSB connector of transceiver 2 (TR2).

- The RF cables indicated in the picture for systems installed in field are part of kit
3DB81148AAAA (HSB RPS kit). Refer to the paper documentation included in the package
for identification and placement.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 325


Install MPT-HLS compact in a 21” ETSI or 19” Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual
rack

18.3.4.1.12 4L/4U: 2 x HSB diversity RPS

Figure 266 shows the branching arrangement and the RF connections between
branching and transceivers.

Figure 266 4L/4U: 2 xHSB diversity RPS

Note: These notes apply to Figure 266.

- The cable exiting from the RF switch (12** in the picture above) must be connected to the
HSB connector of transceiver TR2 and TR4.

- The RF cables indicated in the picture for systems installed in field are part of kit
3DB81224AAAA (2xHSB RPS kit). Refer to the paper documentation included in the
package for identification and placement.

18.3.4.2 6, 7 and 8 GHz configurations

18.3.4.2.1 6, 7 and 8 GHz: Two channel homopolar

Figure 267 shows the branching arrangement and the RF connections between
branching and transceivers.

326 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Install MPT-HLS compact in a 21” ETSI or 19”
rack

Figure 267 6, 7 and 8 GHz two channel homopolar

18.3.4.2.2 6, 7 and 8 GHz: Four channel homopolar

Figure 268 shows the branching arrangement and the RF connections between
branching and transceivers.

Figure 268 6, 7 and 8 GHz four channel homopolar

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 327


Install MPT-HLS compact in a 21” ETSI or 19” Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual
rack

18.3.4.2.3 6, 7 and 8 GHz: 2+2 channel heteropolar

Figure 269 shows the branching arrangement and the RF connections between
branching and transceivers.

Figure 269 6, 7 and 8 GHz 2+2 channel homopolar

18.3.4.2.4 6, 7 and 8 GHz: 1+1 channel heteropolar

This configuration is an under equipment of the 2+2 heteropolar configuration, on


which only transceivers 1 and 3 and relative branching filters are present.

18.3.4.2.5 6, 7 and 8 GHz: HSB configuration

Figure 270 shows the branching arrangement and the RF connections between
branching and transceivers.

328 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Install MPT-HLS compact in a 21” ETSI or 19”
rack

Figure 270 6, 7 and 8 GHz HSB

Notes:

• The cable exiting from the RF switch (ref. 18 in the detail B) must be connected
to the HSB connector of transceiver 2.
• For systems installed in field, the RF cables (MC01 to MC07 in Figure 270) are
delivered in the same package as the branching drawer. Refer to the paper
documentation included in the package for identification and placement.

18.3.4.2.6 6, 7 and 8 GHz: HSB space diversity with combiner

Figure 271 shows the branching arrangement and the RF connections between
branching and transceivers.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 329


Install MPT-HLS compact in a 21” ETSI or 19” Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual
rack

Figure 271 6, 7 and 8 GHz HSB space diversity with combiner

Notes:

• The cable exiting from the RF switch (ref. 18 in the detail C) must be connected
to the HSB connector of transceiver 2.
• For systems installed in field, the RF cables (MC01 to MC09 in Figure 271) are
delivered in the same package as the branching drawer. Refer to the paper
documentation included in the package for identification and placement.

18.3.4.2.7 6, 7 and 8 GHz: System with RPS, HSB and diversity

Figure 272 shows the branching arrangement and the RF connections between
branching and transceivers.

330 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Install MPT-HLS compact in a 21” ETSI or 19”
rack

Figure 272 6, 7 and 8 GHz with RPS, HSB and diversity

Notes:

• The cable exiting from the RF switch (ref. 18 in the detail D) must be connected
to the HSB connector of transceiver 2.
• For systems installed in field, the RF cables (MC01 to MC011 in Figure 272) are
delivered in the same package as the branching drawer. Refer to the paper
documentation included in the package for identification and placement.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 331


Install MPT-HLS compact in a 21” ETSI or 19” Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual
rack

18.3.4.3 10 and 11GHz system configurations

18.3.4.3.1 10/11 GHz: Two channels homopolar

Figure 273 shows the branching arrangement and the RF connections between
branching and transceivers.

Figure 273 10/11 GHz: Two channels homopolar

332 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Install MPT-HLS compact in a 21” ETSI or 19”
rack

18.3.4.3.2 10/11 GHz: Four channel homopolar

Figure 274 shows the branching arrangement and the RF connections between
branching and transceivers.

Figure 274 10/11 GHz: Four channel homopolar

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 333


Install MPT-HLS compact in a 21” ETSI or 19” Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual
rack

18.3.4.3.3 10/11 GHz: 2 + 2 channels heteropolar

Figure 275 shows the branching arrangement and the RF connections between
branching and transceivers.

Figure 275 10/11 GHz: 2 + 2 channels heteropolar

18.3.4.3.4 10/11 GHz: 1 + 1 channels heteropolar

This configuration is an under equipment of the 2 + 2 heteropolar where only


transceivers 1 and 3 and relative branching filters are present.

334 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Install MPT-HLS compact in a 21” ETSI or 19”
rack

18.3.4.3.5 10/11 GHz: HSB configuration

Figure 276 shows the branching arrangement and the RF connections between
branching and transceivers.

Figure 276 10/11 GHz: HSB configuration

Notes:

• The cable exiting from the RF switch (ref. 18 in the detail A) must be connected
to the HSB connector of transceiver 2.
• For systems installed in field, the RF cables (MC01 to MC07 in Figure 276) are
delivered in the same package as the branching drawer. Refer to the paper
documentation included in the package for identification and placement.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 335


Install MPT-HLS compact in a 21” ETSI or 19” Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual
rack

18.3.4.3.6 10/11 GHz: HSB space diversity with combiner configuration

Figure 277 shows the branching arrangement and the RF connections between
branching and transceivers.

Figure 277 10/11 GHz: HSB space diversity with combiner configuration

Notes:

• The cable exiting from the RF switch (ref. 18 in the detail B) must be connected
to the HSB connector of transceiver 2.
• For systems installed in field, the RF cables (MC01 to MC09 in Figure 277) are
delivered in the same package as the branching drawer. Refer to the paper
documentation included in the package for identification and placement.

336 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Install MPT-HLS compact in a 21” ETSI or 19”
rack

18.3.4.3.7 10/11 GHz: System with RPS, HSB and diversity

Figure 278 shows the branching arrangement and the RF connections between
branching and transceivers.

Figure 278 10/11 GHz: System with RPS, HSB and diversity

Notes:

• The cable exiting from the RF switch (ref. 18 in the detail C) must be connected
to the HSB connector of transceiver 2.
• For systems installed in field, the RF cables (MC01 to MC05 in Figure 278) are
delivered in the same package as the branching drawer. Refer to the paper
documentation included in the package for identification and placement.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 337


Install MPT-HLS compact in a 21” ETSI or 19” Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual
rack

18.4 Procedures

18.4.1 To install the MPT-HLS compact on a 21” rack


The installation sequence is as follows:

Note: Installations on 21” ETSI racks are delivered with all components mounted except the
MSS-1/4/8 sub-shelf.

1. Install the rack (see Prerequisites).

2. Mount the MSS-1/4/8 sub-shelf:


− Positioning: the sub-shelf must be mounted on the rack immediately below
the transceiver sub-shelves.
− Fixation: Adapter brackets (kit 3DB18181AAAB) are required to install the
MSS-1/4/8 in the ETSI 21" rack. Secure the MSS-1/4/8 to the lateral jambs
using the M6 screws provided. Use a tightening torque of 7.6Nm.

338 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Install MPT-HLS compact in a 21” ETSI or 19”
rack

Figure 279 MSS-8 positioning on the 21” ETSI rack

3. Connect the MSS-1/4/8 to the power distribution unit:


− Connect the 2 power cords (3DB18272AA) to the power connectors on the
front plate of the MSS-1/4/8 sub-shelf. See Figure 280.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 339


Install MPT-HLS compact in a 21” ETSI or 19” Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual
rack

Figure 280 Power cords plugged in to the MSS sub-shelf

− Route the free end of the power cords towards the power distribution unit
(TRU) passing them to the left lateral duct of the rack. Connect them to the
free 10A breakers on Battery A and Battery B sections of the TRU. See TRU
installation (ETSI market).
− Grounding for the transceiver sub-shelf and MSS-1/4/8 chassis is
established through metallic contact of the fixation brackets/screws with the
lateral jamb.

4. Equip the MSS-1/4/8 unit according to the system configuration requested and
route the data connections between the MSS-1/4/8 and transceivers.
Note: Data connection in this systems can be either optical (SFP modules plus
fiber optic jumper) or electrical (Passive SFP copper cables). By default, SFP
copper cables 1m long are provided.

5. Check that all the Transceivers and Fan Units and Transceivers Branching
drawer connections are correctly and placed according to the system
configuration expected; see Standard branching configurations in this
document.

6. Connect the system to the power supply of the station. For cable connections to
the TRU, see TRU installation (ETSI market).

7. Connect the antenna filters. Systems on ETSI racks provide the antenna access
points on top of the rack. Refer to the following pictures showing the rack from
the top for identifying the right antenna ports.

340 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Install MPT-HLS compact in a 21” ETSI or 19”
rack

Figure 281 Antenna flanges in homopolar configuration with and without diversity

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 341


Install MPT-HLS compact in a 21” ETSI or 19” Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual
rack

Figure 282 Antenna flanges in heteropolar configuration with and without diversity

342 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Install MPT-HLS compact in a 21” ETSI or 19”
rack

18.4.2 To install the MPT-HLS compact on a 19” Rack


The installation sequence is as follows:

• Rack and TRU installation (Nokia supplied 19” rack)

Note: This step applies to Nokia supplied 19” rack only.

Procedures to Install the rack, ground the rack, and install the TRU and
breakers.
• MPT-HLS compact module installation
Procedures to mount the branching drawer, transceiver sub-shelf and the MSS-
1/4/8
• MPT-HLS compact module connections
Procedures for:
− Transceiver sub-shelf and MSS-1/4/8 connections to TRU
− MPT-HLS module RF connections
− Fan management connections for the MPT-HLS module
− XPIC or RPS connection
− Data connection
− Antenna feeder connections

18.4.2.1 Rack and TRU installation (Nokia supplied 19” rack)

This section covers rack and TRU installation for a Nokia supplied 19” rack. If a
customer supplied rack is used, skip this section and go to MPT-HLS compact
module installation.

1. Install the rack. Follow the procedures outlined in the chapter Rack installation
of this document for a Seismic 19” rack.

2. Ground the rack. Follow the procedures outlined in the chapter Route and
terminate station ground and office battery power cables of this document
following the procedures for terminating station ground.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 343


Install MPT-HLS compact in a 21” ETSI or 19” Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual
rack

3. Install the TRU and breakers. Follow the procedures outlined in the chapter TRU
installation (ETSI market).

18.4.2.2 MPT-HLS compact module installation

The following procedures describes how to mount the following MPT-HLS compact
modules in a 19”rack:

• Branching drawer (delivered with the requested pre-set configuration)


• 1 - 2 Transceiver (delivered with the requested transceivers and the fan unit)
• MSS-1/4/8 sub-shelf

1. Position the branching drawer in the rack using the rules defined in Table 31.

Table 31 Branching drawer 19” rack position

If Then

Any frequency except Nokia 19” rack: There are no specific limitations on
4L and 4U positioning 4L and 4U frequencies

Customer supplied 19” rack: There are no specific


limitations on positioning

4L and 4U Customer supplied 19” rack: The branching drawer


frequencies rack placement is constrained by the length of the
coaxial cable used to connect the branching drawer to
the antenna circulators (typically located on the top of
the rack).

Nokia 19” rack: Reference Positioning of branching


shelf for 4L/4UFigure 283 for details on positioning the
branching drawer and sub-shelves on a 4L/4U system

344 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Install MPT-HLS compact in a 21” ETSI or 19”
rack

Figure 283 Positioning of branching shelf for 4L/4U

2. Fasten the drawer to the lateral jambs of the rack using four M6 screws. Use a
tightening torque of 7.6Nm.

3. Position the transceiver sub-shelf or shelves directly below the branching


drawer. This distance placement is mandatory to ensure RF connections can be
made.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 345


Install MPT-HLS compact in a 21” ETSI or 19” Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual
rack

4. Fasten the drawer to the lateral jambs of the rack using four M6 screws. Use a
tightening torque of 7.6Nm. See Figure 284

Figure 284 Transceiver sub-shelf positioning (19” rack)

5. Position the MSS-1/4/8 sub-shelf on the rack immediately below the transceiver
sub-shelf (recommended location).

Note: The MSS-1/4/8 sub-shelf can be mounted in a different position in the rack, or in
another rack. However, connections for data and power supply must be considered.

6. Fasten the MSS-1/4/8 sub-shelf to the lateral jambs of the rack using four M6
screws. Use a tightening torque of 7.6Nm.

18.4.2.3 MPT-HLS compact module connections

The following procedures describes how to set connections among the MP-HLS
compact modules when a Nokia supplied 19” rack is used.

1. Connect the transceiver sub-shelf and the MSS-1/4/8 to the power distribution
unit on the TRU.
i. Using the dedicated power cords (3DB18272AA), plug one side into the
power connectors on the front plate of the transceiver sub-shelf; see
Figure 285.

346 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Install MPT-HLS compact in a 21” ETSI or 19”
rack

Figure 285 Connections to PDU (19” rack)

ii. Perform one of the following steps in Table 32 to route the power cords and
ground the sub-shelf.

Table 32 Power cord routing and grounding

If Then

using a Nokia provided 19” Route the opposite end of the power cord towards the PDU and
rack connect to the 10A breakers on Battery A and Battery B. See
TRU installation (ETSI market).

Grounding for the transceiver sub-shelf and MSS-1/4/8 chassis


is established through metallic contact of the fixation brackets/
screws with the lateral jamb.

using a customer supplied Route the opposite end of the power cord towards the Power
19” rack distribution unit and connect to the 10A breakers on Battery A
and Battery B sections of the unit. Refer to the installation
instruction of the Power Distribution Unit available for the rack.

Grounding of the MSS-1/4/8 and Transceivers sub-shelf must


be achieved by connecting the grounding kit 3CC13423AA to
the GND fixation points on the right brackets of the sub-shelves
(see Figure 243).

2. Connect transceivers to the branching filters. Use diagrams Standard branching


configurations for reference.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 347


Install MPT-HLS compact in a 21” ETSI or 19” Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual
rack

Note: Transceivers are connected to the branching filters through dedicated RF cables.
Depending on the system configuration and frequency, the cables will have different lengths
and codes. For In-Field installations the cables will be delivered in kits. See the 9500 MPR
Product Information Manual to identify the kits.

3. Using the fan management cable, connect one end to the RJ45 connector on
the fan unit and the opposite end to the transceiver. Perform a second time if 2
transceivers are present. See Fan unit connections and Figure 244.

4. If using an RPS configuration connect transceivers on the same sub-shelf using


the RPS cable. See Transceivers connections and Figure 245.

5. Set the data connections between the MSS-1/4/8 and the transceivers. See
Transceivers connections and Figure 245.

6. If using a heteropolar system where XPOL transceivers are on separate sub-


shelves, set the XPIC connection between the sub-shelves using the required
XPIC cable. See Transceivers connections and Figure 246.

7. Connect the antenna circulators.


− Systems from 6 to 13GHz on 19” racks provide the antenna access points
at the rear side of the rack. See Figure 286, Figure 287, and Figure 288
showing the rack from the side for identifying the correct antenna ports.
− Systems in the 4L/4U ranges on 19” racks provide the antenna access
points directly on the antenna circulators. The antenna circulators are
connected to the branching filters through special coaxial cables. Instruction
for the right connections are part of the documentation package provided in
the system delivery. Connectors and positions described in the
documentation will be properly labeled for identification. See Figure 289 for
an example of a system after the proper connection of the antenna
circulators:

348 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Install MPT-HLS compact in a 21” ETSI or 19”
rack

Figure 286 Antenna filters in homopolar systems with/without RX diversity

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 349


Install MPT-HLS compact in a 21” ETSI or 19” Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual
rack

Figure 287 Antenna filters in heteropolar systems with/without RX diversity (6/7/8 GHz)

350 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Install MPT-HLS compact in a 21” ETSI or 19”
rack

Figure 288 Antenna filters in heteropolar systems with/without RX diversity


(10-13 GHz)

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 351


Install MPT-HLS compact in a 21” ETSI or 19” Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual
rack

Figure 289 4L/4U ranges the antenna access points

352 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Route and terminate power cables

19 Route and terminate power cables

19.1 Purpose
This chapter describes how to connect the 9500 MPR MSS-O, MSS-1, MSS-4,
MSS-8, or MPT-HL shelf power cables to the PDU.

This chapter also describes how to connect the 9500 MPR Power Injector Card,
Power Injector Box, MPT Power Unit, and MPT Extended Power Unit power cables
to the PDU.

19.2 General

Note: This chapter is required for the following site applications:

•When the MSS-1/MSS-4/MSS-8 shelf power cables are NOT factory installed in the rack.
•When the MPT-HL shelf power cables are NOT factory installed in the rack.
•For MPT-MC/HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM/9558HC installations.
•For installations which include Power Injector Box, MPT Power Unit, and MPT Extended
Power Unit.
If NONE of these site applications exist for this installation, skip this chapter and continue
with the next chapter.

Unless otherwise stated in this chapter, EAS implies both P8ETH and EASv2. When a
section is applicable only to P8ETH or EASv2, these terms will be used.

The MSS-4/8 shelf operates on -48 Vdc (-40.8 to -57.6 Vdc) input power. The office
power is connected to the (PDU) which in turn connects to the power connectors on
the MSS-4/8 shelf.

The MSS-8 shelf also operates on +24 VDC (+19.0 to +36.0 VDC) input power. The
office power is connected to the (PDU) which in turn connects to the power
connectors on the Power Converter, which in turn connects to the power connectors
on the MSS-8 shelf.

Note: When MSS-8 shelf is powered using +24 VDC, an optional +24/-48 Power Converter
must be used to connect the MSS-8 shelf to office power.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 353


Route and terminate power cables Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

The 9500 MPR MSS-1 unit, depending on its version, operates as follows:

• 3DB19015AA version operates on -24 VDC, -48 VDC, or -60 VDC (-20 to -72.0
VDC) and +24 VDC, +48 VDC, or +60 VDC (+20 to +72.0 VDC) input power.
• 3DB19015BA and 3DB19015CA versions operate on -48 VDC (-38.4 to -57.6
VDC).

The MPT-HL shelf operates on +24/48 VDC (+20.4 to +57.6 VDC) or -24/48 VDC (-
20.4 to -57.6 VDC) input power. Office power is connected to the (PDU) which in turn
connects to the power connectors on the MPT-HL/MPT-HLC Transceiver.

The MSS-O is available in two versions:

• MSS-O AC version powered at 110/230 VAC.


• MSS-O DC version powered at 48 VDC full floating

The Power Injector Card plugs into the MSS-4 and MSS-8 shelf, thus no additional
power connections are required to power the card.

The Power Injector Box mounts in the rack to remotely power up to two MPTs.
Operates on -48 VDC (-40.8 to -57.6 VDC) input power. Office power is connected
to the Power Injector Box which in turn connects power using the PFoE solution to
the MPT-MC/HC/HC-HQAM/9558HC.

The MPT Power Unit mounts in the rack to remotely power up to four MPTs.
Operates on -48 VDC (+20.4VDC to +28VDC and -57.6VDC to -38.4VDC) input
power. Office power is connected to the MPT Power Unit which in turn connects
power using N connectors to the MPT-MC/HC/HC-HQAM/9558HC.

The MPT Extended Power Unit operates on +28 or -48 VDC (+20.4VDC to +28VDC
and -57.6VDC to -38.4VDC) input power. Office power is connected to the MPT
Extended Power Unit which in turn connects power using N connectors or the PFoE
solution to the MPT-MC/HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM/9558HC.

Power can also be connected using PFoE directly from an MPTACC or EASv2 card;
see Route and terminate cables between MSS and MPT ODU.

354 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Route and terminate power cables

19.2.1 MSS-8 shelf


Each MSS-8 shelf requires two power cables to provide fused power backup in case
of a blown fuse or bad cable/connection to the MSS-8 shelf. When only one power
cable is used, power is provided to the entire MSS-8 shelf. The A-side power
connection of the MSS-8 shelf should be fused through the A-side of the fuse panel.
The B-side power connection of the MSS-8 shelf should be fused through the B-side
of the fuse panel.

19.2.2 MSS-4 shelf


Each MSS-4 shelf requires one power cable. If there is a power failure to the MSS-4
shelf, traffic is lost on the MSS-4 shelf.

19.2.3 MSS-1 unit


Each MSS-1 shelf requires two power cables to provide fused power backup in case
of a blown fuse or bad cable/connection to the MSS-1 shelf. When only one power
cable is used, power is provided to the entire MSS-1 shelf. The A-side power
connection of the MSS-1 shelf should be fused through the A-side of the fuse panel.
The B-side power connection of the MSS-1 shelf should be fused through the B-side
of the fuse panel.

The MSS-1 power supply is a raw cable + 2-Pin 2W2C plastic connector to be
assembled in the field. A power cable (2x1 mm2 - AWG17) is supplied and two 2-pin
2W2C connectors are included in the Field Assembly Parts Kit. Power cable gauge
smaller than 2x1mm2 (AWG 17) is not allowed for proper operation. The 2-pin 2W2C
must be fitted at one end of the cable; the other end is connected to the TRU.

• Power supply range for 3DB19015AA is from -20 to -72 VDC and from +20 to
+72 VDC.
• Power supply range for 3DB19015BA and 3DB19015CA is -48 VDC (from -38.4
to -57.6 VDC)

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 355


Route and terminate power cables Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

19.2.4 MSS-O
The MSS-O AC version requires the power cable 1AC052600002 (provided
separately). It is a three conductors (section 1.5 mm2) power cable for outdoor
application. The cable must be terminated with the AC connector 1AB418220003,
included in the 3DB19158AA kit. The instructions for the connector installation are
contained in the leaflet included in the connector plastic bag.

The MSS-O DC version requires the power cable 1AC057660001 (provided


separately). It is a two conductors (section 2.5 mm2) shielded power cable for
outdoor applications. The cable must be terminated with the power connector
1AB41822003, included in the 3DB19158AA kit.

19.2.5 MPT-HL/HLC shelf


Each MPT-HL/MPT-HLC Transceiver requires one power cable. In the event of a
power failure to the MPT-HL/MPT-HLC Transceiver, traffic will be lost on the
channel. For the systems that are configured with 1+1 HSB protection, the main
MPT-HL/MPT-HLC Transceiver (left-hand side) of the MPT-HL shelf should be fused
through the A side of the fuse panel, and the spare MPT-HL/MPT-HLC Transceiver
(right-hand side) of the MPT-HL shelf should be fused through the B side of the fuse
panel.

19.2.6 +24/-48 Power Converter


When the office power configuration consists of +24 Vdc, a +24/-48 Power Converter
is required to condition office power to -48 Vdc for the MSS-8 shelf ONLY. The Power
Converter resides in slot 4, 6, or 8 in the MSS-8 shelf. Office power (+24 Vdc) is
connected to the PDU which in turn connects to the Power Converter. The output of
the Power Converter (-48 Vdc) is then connected to the MSS-8 shelf power
connector(s). The Power Converter supports both unprotected and protected power
arrangements. The single converter kit includes one cord for connection to MSS and
the protected converter kit includes two cords.

The same PDU power cables are used to connect between the PDU and the Power
Converter. Keyed power cables are used to connect between the Power Converter
and the MSS-8 shelf. Configuration equipped with the +24/-48 Power Converter
require the Enhanced Fan card.

356 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Route and terminate power cables

19.2.7 Power Injector Card/Box


For MPT-MC/HC/HC-HQAM/9558HC applications connected to the Core or P8ETH
card or MSS-1 shelf electrical Ethernet ports 3 and 4, office power may be connected
using the Power Injector Box or Power Injector Card for cable run lengths of 100 m
or less using Cat5e electrical Ethernet cable (PFoE solution).

The Power Injector Box requires two power cables to provide fused redundant power
backup in case of a blown fuse or bad cable/connection to the Power Injector Box.

19.2.8 MPT Power Unit


For MPT-MC/HC/HC-HQAM/9558HC applications connected to the Core card, EAS
cards, or MSS-1 shelf, office power may be connected using the MPT Power Unit
where the cable run length is longer than 100 m and up to 300 m.

The MPT Power Unit requires two power cables to provide fused redundant power
backup in case of a blown fuse or bad cable/connection to the MPT Power Unit.

19.2.9 MPT Extended Power Unit


The following MPT Extended Power Unit configurations are supported (Table 33):

Table 33 MPT Extended Power Unit configurations

Radio Radio to Unit Connection Power Connections

MPT XP/ MPT Access card Ethernet ports 1 Data & power using PFoE solution
XP- and 2, Core card electrical Ethernet Cat5E cable connection between
HQAM ports 1 to 4, EAS card electrical the Core, EASv2, or MSS 1 shelf
Ethernet ports 1 to 4, or MSS 1 shelf Ethernet port to the MPT Extended
electrical Ethernet ports 1 to 4. Power Unit Data port and then from
(Cable length must be < 40 m) the DC+Data port to the MPT XP/
XP-HQAM

MPT Access card Ethernet ports 3 Powered using MPT Extended


and 4, Core E card or EAS cards or Power Unit
MSS 1 shelf optical Ethernet ports, Coax cable connection between the
MPT Extended Power Unit and the
DC+Data port to the MPT XP/XP-
HQAM

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 357


Route and terminate power cables Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

Table 33 MPT Extended Power Unit configurations (Continued)

Radio Radio to Unit Connection Power Connections

MPT-MC/ Core card or EAS cards or MSS 1 Powered using MPT Extended
HC/HC- shelf Ethernet ports Power Unit
HQAM/ Coax cable connection between the
9558HC MPT Extended Power Unit and the
DC+Data port to the MPT HC/HC-
HQAM/9558HC

Core card electrical Ethernet ports 1 Data & power using PFoE solution
to 4 or, MSS 1 shelf electrical Cat5E cable connection between
Ethernet ports 3 and 4 the Ethernet port and the MPT
(Cable length must be < 40 m) Extended Power Unit Data port and
then from the DC+Data port to the
MPT-MC/HC/HC-HQAM/9558HC

Note: All MPT-XP/XP-HQAM applications must be powered using the MPT Extended
Power Unit. See the 9500 MPR Product Information Manual for information about cable
length requirements.

In ALL MPT-XP/XP-HQAM applications MUST be powered using the MPT Extended


Power Unit. See the 9500 MPR Product Information Manual for information about
cable length requirements.

The MPT Extended Power Unit requires two power cables to provide fused
redundant power backup in case of a blown fuse or bad cable/connection to the MPT
Extended Power Unit.

Nokia provides expert Installation Services for installations that have different
requirements from the recommended configuration as outlined in this manual.
Contact Nokia for more information.

19.3 Prerequisite
Complete PDU installation (ANSI market).

Complete MSS-1 shelf installation, MSS-4/8 and MPT-HL/HLC shelf installation, and
Power interfaces installation.

All power must be turned OFF.

358 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Route and terminate power cables

19.4 Recommended materials


See the 9500 MPR Product Information Manual for part numbers.

• MSS-4/MSS-8 Shelf Installation:


− MSS-4/MSS-8 Shelf Power Cable, Qty 1 or 2
• MSS-1 unit Installation:
− 2-Conductor Power Wire, 17 AWG, included in MSS-1 unit kit (Wire size
and length according to site documentation)
− Ferrite Beads, included in Field Assembly parts kit, Qty 4
• MSS-8 Shelf +24 Volt Office Application Installation:
− MSS-4/MSS-8 Shelf Power Cable, Qty 1 or 2
− +24/-48 Power Converter Kits (Power cables included):
• Chassis plus 2 Converters
• Chassis plus 1 Converter
• Power Converter Power Cable
− Enhanced Fan Alarm Card
• MPT-HL Shelf Application Installation:
− MPT-HL Shelf Power Cable, Qty 1 per MPT-HL/MPT-HLC Transceiver
• Power Injector Box Installation:
− Power Injector Box
− 2-Conductor Power Wire, (Wire size and length according to site
documentation)
• MPT Power Unit Installation:
− MPT Power Unit
− 2-Conductor Power Wire, 17 AWG (Wire size and length according to site
documentation)
• MPT Extended Power Unit Installation:
− MPT Extended Power Unit
− 2-Conductor Power Wire, 17 AWG (Wire size and length according to site
documentation)
• Terminate Power Cables for Connection to PDU
− Crimp on lugs (yellow), Nokia PN: 304-1540-070
− Crimp tool for 10-12 AWG lug

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 359


Route and terminate power cables Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

19.5 Procedures
This section provides procedures for the following:

• To install MSS-8 shelf power cable


• To install MSS-4 shelf power cable
• To install MSS-1 Shelf power cable
• To install +24/-48 Power Converter power cable
• To install MPT-HL/MPT-HLC transceiver power cable
• To install power injector box power cable
• To install MPT Power Unit/MPT Extended Power Unit cable

19.5.1 To install MSS-8 shelf power cable

1. Locate the MSS-8 shelf main side power A and spare side power B connectors.
See Figure 290.

Figure 290 MSS-8 shelf power connection detail

2. Attach the main power cable to the MSS-8 shelf main side power connector.

3. Attach the protect power cable to the MSS-8 shelf spare side power connector
if redundant shelf power is configured.

4. Go to step 8 in the procedure To install +24/-48 Power Converter power cable.

360 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Route and terminate power cables

19.5.2 To install MSS-4 shelf power cable

1. Locate the MSS-4 shelf power connector. See Figure 290.

Figure 291 MSS-4 shelf power connection detail

2. Attach the main power cable to the MSS-4 shelf power connector.

3. Go to step 8 in the procedure To install +24/-48 Power Converter power cable.

19.5.3 To install MSS-1 Shelf power cable

1. Terminate battery A and Return/GND raw cable to 2W2C power connector


provided with the MSS-1 shelf. Battery connection is located on the right-hand
side of the connector. Battery Return/GND is located on the left-hand side of the
connector. See Figure 292.

Note: Ferrites must be installed on the power cords. For more information, see the
instructions in the Field Assembly Parts kit.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 361


Route and terminate power cables Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

Figure 292 MSS-1 Shelf power cable termination

Note: Wire size of 17 AWG or larger is required for proper operation of the MSS-1 shelf.

Note: The MSS-1 shelf must be connected to a fuse or a breaker.

Note: The 2W2C DC power connector can be shorted inadvertently if applied at an angle.
Always insert with correct alignment.

2. Install the battery A power cable onto MSS-1 shelf.

362 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Route and terminate power cables

Figure 293 A & B power/return connection to MSS-1 Shelf

3. If applicable, terminate battery B and Return/GND wires to power connector


installed on the MSS-1 shelf. Install battery B power cable onto MSS-1 shelf.

4. Route the power cables up the side of the rack using cable standoff supports to
the PDU.

5. Cut power cables to desired length. See Table 34 for PDU power cable
termination information.

6. Attach the crimp on lugs.

7. Attach the lugs to the PDU.

8. Connect the station ground screw on the front of the MSS-1 shelf Bracket to
station ground according to site documentation. See Figure 295 and Figure 295.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 363


Route and terminate power cables Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

Figure 294 Station ground connection to MSS-1 Shelf

Figure 295 Station ground connection to MSS-1 Shelf

26204

19.5.4 To install +24/-48 Power Converter power cable

1. Install the Power Converter into MSS-8 shelf slot 4, 6, or 8 according to site
documentation.

2. Install Enhanced Fan card into MSS-8 shelf slot 9.

3. Locate the Power Converter and MSS-8 shelf power connectors. See
Figure 290.

364 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Route and terminate power cables

Figure 296 MSS-8 shelf power converter connection detail

Power Converter Power Converter Cable Assemblies:


Outputs Inputs 3DB18766AA

Main
(A-Side)
Power

Protect
(B-Side)
Power

Main Power Protect Power


Cable Assemblies: Converter Converter
3DB18271AA
No3020

4. Attach the main MSS-8 shelf power cable to the Power Converter main power
input connector.

5. Attach the spare MSS-8 shelf power cable to the Power Converter spare power
input connector according to site documentation.

6. Attach one end of the main Power Converter power cable (3EM18766AA) to the
Power Converter main power output connector and the other end to the main
MSS-8 shelf power connector.

7. Attach one end of the spare Power Converter power cable (3EM18766AA) to the
Power Converter spare power output connector and the other end to the spare
MSS-8 shelf power connector.

8. Route and terminate power cable to PDU


Route the power cables from the front of the MSS-1/MSS-4/MSS-8 shelf to the
back of the rack. See Figure 297.

9. Route the power cables up the right side of the rack using cable standoff
supports to the PDU.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 365


Route and terminate power cables Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

Figure 297 Power cable connection to MSS-4/MSS-8 shelf

10. Continue routing the cables up the back of the rack to the top. See Figure 298.

Figure 298 Power cable routing detail

11. If applicable, route the B-side power cable into the back of the PDU. See
Figure 299.

366 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Route and terminate power cables

Figure 299 B-side power to PDU routing

12. Route the A-side power cable into the back of the PDU, as shown in Figure 299,
or route the A-side power cable up to the cable ladder, across the top of the rack
and down the other side of the back of the rack and into the back of the PDU.
See Figure 300.

Figure 300 A-side power to PDU routing

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 367


Route and terminate power cables Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

13. Cut the power cables to desired length. See Table 34 for MSS-1/MSS-4/MSS-8
shelf power cable termination information.

14. Strip back 6 inches to attach crimp on lugs. See Figure 301.

15. Attach the crimp on lugs to the PDU. See Figure 302 and Table 34.

Table 34 MSS-1/MSS-4/MSS-8 shelf PDU power cable termination details

FUSE PANEL (E-PIN) DEFINITION

A SIDE B SIDE
EQUIPMENT
POS NEG GRD POS NEG GRD 1

BLACK BLUE N/A BLACK BLUE N/A

Shelf 1 E1 E7 E25 E18 E24 E36

Shelf 2 E2 E8 E26 E17 E23 E35

Shelf 3 E3 E9 E27 E16 E22 E34

Shelf 4 E4 E10 E28 E15 E21 E33

Auxiliary E5 E11 E29 E14 E20 E32

Auxiliary E6 E12 E30 E13 E19 E31

1. GRD lug connections are unused on MSS-1/MSS-4/MSS-8 shelf


applications.

Figure 301 MSS-4/MSS-8 shelf power cable detail

368 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Route and terminate power cables

Figure 302 MSS-1/MSS-4/MSS-8 shelf power cable termination details

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 369


Route and terminate power cables Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

19.5.5 To install MPT-HL/MPT-HLC transceiver power


cable

1. Locate the MPT-HL/MPT-HLC transceiver power connector. See Figure 303.

Figure 303 Power cable connection to MPT-HL/MPT-HLC transceiver

2. Attach the power cable (3EM24095AA) to the MPT-HL/MPT-HLC transceiver


connector.

3. Route and terminate power cable to PDU


Route the power cables from the front of the MPT-HL/MPT-HLC transceiver to
the back of the rack.

4. Route the power cable up the side of the rack using cable standoff supports to
the PDU.

5. Continue routing the cable(s) up the back of the rack to the top. See Figure 298.

6. For the left-side MPT-HL/MPT-HLC transceiver, route the transceiver power


cable into the back of the PDU. See Figure 299.

7. For the right-side MPT-HL/MPT-HLC transceiver, route the transceiver power


cable into the back of the PDU. See Figure 300.

8. See Table 35 for MPT-HL/MPT-HLC transceiver power cable termination


information.

9. Attach crimp on lugs. See Figure 304.

370 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Route and terminate power cables

10. Attach the crimp on lugs to the PDU. See Figure 305 and Table 35.

Table 35 MPT-HL/MPT-HLC transceiver to PDU power cable termination details

FUSE PANEL (E-PIN) DEFINITION

LEFT MPT-HL/MPT-HLC TRANSCEIVER RIGHT MPT-HL/MPT-HLC TRANSCEIVER


EQUIPMENT
POS NEG GRD POS NEG GRD

BLACK BLUE GREEN/ BLACK BLUE GREEN/


YELLOW YELLOW

Shelf 1 E1 E7 E25 E18 E24 E36

Shelf 2 E2 E8 E26 E17 E23 E35

Shelf 3 E3 E9 E27 E16 E22 E34

Shelf 4 E4 E10 E28 E15 E21 E33

Auxiliary E5 E11 E29 E14 E20 E32

Auxiliary E6 E12 E30 E13 E19 E31

Figure 304 MPT-HL/MPT-HLC shelf power cable detail

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 371


Route and terminate power cables Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

Figure 305 MPT-HL shelf power cable termination details

19.5.6 To install power injector box power cable

1. Terminate battery A and return wires to power connector installed on the Power
Injector Box. Battery connection is located on the right-hand side of the
connector. Battery return is located on the left-hand side of the connector. See
Figure 306.

Note: Wire size of 17 AWG or larger is required for proper operation of the Power Injector
Box.

Note: The power Injector Box must be connected to a fuse or a breaker. The recommended
value is 3 amps for one MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/9558HC and 6 amps for two MPT-HC/HC-
HQAM/9558HCs.

372 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Route and terminate power cables

Figure 306 A & B power/return connection to power injector box

2. Install the battery A power cable onto Power Injector Box.

3. If applicable, terminate battery B and return wires to power connector installed


on the Power Injector Box. Install battery B power cable onto Power Injector Box.

4. Route the power cables up the side of the rack using cable standoff supports to
the PDU.

5. Cut power cables to desired length. See Table 34 for PDU power cable
termination information.

6. Attach the crimp on lugs.

7. Attach the lugs to the PDU.

8. Connect the station ground screw on the front of the Power Injector Bracket to
station ground according to site documentation. See Figure 307.

Figure 307 Station ground connection to power injector box

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 373


Route and terminate power cables Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

19.5.7 To install MPT Power Unit/MPT Extended Power


Unit cable

1. Terminate battery A and return wires to power connector installed on the MPT
Power Unit/MPT Extended Power Unit. Battery connection is located on the
right-hand side of the connector. Battery return is located on the left-hand side
of the connector. See Figure 308.

Note: Wire size of 17 AWG or larger is required for proper operation of the MPT Power Unit/
MPT Extended Power Unit.

Note: The MPT Extended Power Unit must be connected to a fuse or a breaker. The
recommended fuse or breaker values are as follows:

•one MPT-MC/HC/HC-HQAM/9558HC, 3 amps


•two MPT-MC/HC/HC-HQAM/9558HC, 6 amps
•three MPT-MC/HC/HC-HQAM/9558HC, 10 amps
•four MPT-MC/HC/HC-HQAM/9558HC, 10 amps

Note: The MPT Extended Power Unit must be connected to a fuse or a breaker. The
recommended fuse or breaker values are as follows:

•+24 VDC office power:


− one MPT-MC/HC/HC-HQAM/9558HC, 6 amps
− two MPT-MC/HC/HC-HQAM/9558HC, 10 amps
− one MPT-XP/XP-HQAM, 6 amps
− two MPT-XP/XP-HQAM, 10 amps
•-48 VDC office power:
− one MPT-MC/HC/HC-HQAM/9558HC, 3 amps
− two MPT-MC/HC/HC-HQAM/9558HC, 6 amps
− one MPT-XP/XP-HQAM, 6 amps
− two MPT-XP/XP-HQAM, 10 amps

374 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Route and terminate power cables

Figure 308 A & B power/return connection to MPT power unit

2. Install the battery A power cable onto Power Injector Box.

3. If applicable, terminate battery B and return wires to power connector installed


on the Power Injector Box. Install battery B power cable onto Power Injector Box.

4. Route the power cables up the side of the rack using cable standoff supports to
the PDU.

5. Cut power cables to desired length. See Table 34 for PDU power cable
termination information.

6. Attach the crimp on lugs.

7. Attach the lugs to the PDU.

8. Connect the station ground screw on the front of the MPT Power Unit to station
ground according to site documentation. See Figure 309.

Figure 309 Station ground connection to MPT power unit

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 375


Route and terminate power cables Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

376 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Type N adapter bracket installation

20 Type N adapter bracket installation

20.1 Purpose
This chapter describes how to physically mount and cable Type N adapter bracket
into the rack.

20.2 General

Note: This chapter is only required for applications which include an MPT Access card
providing power to an MPT-MC/HC/HC-QAM/9558HC using the QMA power connector. For
applications without the Type N Adapter Bracket, continue to the next chapter.

Note: This chapter is required for systems when the Type N Adapter Brackets are NOT
factory installed in the rack. If the Type N Adapter Brackets are factory installed in the rack,
skip this chapter and continue with the next chapter.

The 9500 MPR Type N adapter bracket transitions MPT Access QMA power
connector to Type N connector. For non-protected radio hops, one cable is required.
For protected radio hops, two cables are required.

Nokia provides expert Installation Services for installations that have different
requirements from the recommended configuration as outlined in this manual.
Contact Nokia for more information.

20.3 Prerequisite
Rack installation must be completed. See Rack installation.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 377


Type N adapter bracket installation Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

20.4 Recommended tools


Type N adapter bracket

• Type N Adapter Bracket


• Jumper Cable (1 each for non protected, 2 each for protected)
• Rack Screws Nokia PN: 330-2882-030, Qty 2
• #2 Phillips Head Screwdriver and a small Flat Blade Screwdriver

20.5 Procedure

Warning: To ensure continuity and avoid short circuits, all RJ45, Coaxial,
Ethernet, Optical Fiber cables / connector connections made in the field must be
verified and checked with Cable tester.

1. Position the Type N adapter bracket according to site documentation, typically


one rack increment below the MSS-4/MSS-8 shelf.

2. Secure the bracket by using two rack screws.

3. Route the Jumper cables from the MPT Access card to the Type N adapter
bracket. See Figure 310.

Figure 310 Type N jumper cable detail

The procedure is complete.

378 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Demarcation panel/DDF installation

21 Demarcation panel/DDF installation

21.1 Purpose
This chapter describes how to physically mount and cable:

• DS1 RJ-45 demarcation panel


• DS1 37 pin D demarcation panel
• DS3 (BNC) demarcation panel
• DS3 hybrid splitter

21.2 General

21.2.1 Demarcation panels for the ANSI market

Note: This chapter is only required for applications which include P2E3DS3 or P32E1DS1
modules or MSS-1 shelf and are configured with DS1 or DS3 Demarcation Panel for
transition between the P2E3DS3 or P32E1DS1 module or MSS-1 shelf connectors to DS1/
DS3 cable interconnect. For applications without the DS1 or DS3 Demarcation Panels,
continue to the next chapter.

Note: This chapter is required for systems when the DS1 or DS3 Demarcation Panel is NOT
factory installed in the rack. If the DS1 or DS3 Demarcation Panel is factory installed in the
rack, skip this chapter and continue with the next chapter.

The DS1 RJ-45 demarcation panel converts the P32E1DS1 module SCSI
connectors to RJ-45 connectors. For non-protected DS1 configurations two cables
are required per P32E1DS1 module. For protected DS1 configurations four cables
are required per P32E1DS1 protection pair.

The DS1 37 pin D demarcation panel converts the P32E1DS1 module SCSI
connectors to 37-position D-Sub connectors. For non-protected DS1 configurations
two cables are required per P32E1DS1 module. For protected DS1 configurations
four cables are required per P32E1DS1 protection pair.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 379


Demarcation panel/DDF installation Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

The DS1 RJ-45 demarcation panel converts the MSS-1 shelf SCSI connectors to
RJ-45 connectors. For non-protected DS1 configurations one cable is required per
MSS-1 shelf. Each panel supports up to two MSS-1 shelf.

The DS1 37 pin D demarcation panel converts the MSS-1 shelf SCSI connectors to
37-position D-Sub connectors. For non-protected DS1 configurations one cable is
required per MSS-1 shelf. Each panel supports up to two MSS-1 shelf.

The DS3 BNC demarcation panel provides six pairs of BNC connectors for protected
DS3 interconnect. Main and protect DS3 connections are made using a hybrid
splitter to connect to the main and protect P2E3DS3 modules. Two hybrid splitters
are required for each protected DS3 line pair for P2E3DS3 modules. The DS3 hybrid
grooming panel requires one rack increment.

For more detailed information, refer to 9500 MPR-A MSS and Interconnect Drawing,
found in 9500 MPR-A Engineering Support Documentation.

Nokia provides expert Installation Services for installations that have different
requirements from the recommended configuration as outlined in this manual.
Contact Nokia for more information.

21.2.2 DDFs for the ETSI market


The demarcation panels available are:

Figure 311 Protection Panel 32E1 SCSI 68 - 1.0/2.3 75 ohm (Front/Rear) (3DB16104AAAA)

380 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Demarcation panel/DDF installation

Figure 312 Protection Panel RJ45 120 ohm (Front/Rear) (1AF15245ABAA)

Figure 313 Protection Panel 32E1 SCSI 68 - 1.6/5.6 75 ohm (Front) (1AF15243AAAA)

Figure 314 Protection Panel 32E1 BNC 75 ohm (Front) (1AF15244AAAA)

Figure 315 Connector support 1.6/5.6 75 ohm Panel 1U (3CC08061AAAA)

Figure 316 Connector support BNC 75 ohm Panel 1U (3CC08061ABAA)

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 381


Demarcation panel/DDF installation Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

Figure 317 Support 19 Inch modules 120 ohm Panel 3U (3CC07810AAAA)

Figure 318 E1 Protection SCSI 68/Sub-D 37 (Front/Rear) (3DB16102AAAA)

21.2.2.1 SCSI68 pin - FW cable

Figure 319 and Table 36 provide details about the SCSI68 pin FW cable.

Figure 319 SCSI 68 male connector

Table 36 SCSI 68 pins FW cable colors

Pair No. Signal Pin # Wire color Signal Pin # Wire color

GND 1 35

382 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Demarcation panel/DDF installation

Table 36 SCSI 68 pins FW cable colors (Continued)

Pair No. Signal Pin # Wire color Signal Pin # Wire color

1 TTIP 2 White TRING 36 Blue

1 RTIP 3 White RRING 37 Blue

2 TTIP 4 White TRING 38 Orange

2 RTIP 5 White RRING 39 Orange

3 TTIP 6 White TRING 40 Green

3 RTIP 7 White RRING 41 Green

4 TTIP 8 White TRING 42 Brown

4 RTIP 9 White RRING 43 Brown

5 TTIP 10 White TRING 44 Grey

5 RTIP 11 White RRING 45 Grey

6 TTIP 12 Yellow TRING 46 Blue

6 RTIP 13 Yellow RRING 47 Blue

7 TTIP 14 Yellow TRING 48 Orange

7 RTIP 15 Yellow RRING 49 Orange

8 TTIP 16 Yellow TRING 50 Green

8 RTIP 17 Yellow RRING 51 Green

9 TTIP 18 Yellow TRING 52 Brown

9 RTIP 19 Yellow RRING 53 Brown

10 TTIP 20 Yellow TRING 54 Grey

10 RTIP 21 Yellow RRING 55 Grey

11 TTIP 22 Violet TRING 56 Blue

11 RTIP 23 Violet RRING 57 Blue

12 TTIP 24 Violet TRING 58 Orange

12 RTIP 25 Violet RRING 59 Orange

13 TTIP 26 Violet TRING 60 Green

13 RTIP 27 Violet RRING 61 Green

14 TTIP 28 Violet TRING 62 Brown

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 383


Demarcation panel/DDF installation Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

Table 36 SCSI 68 pins FW cable colors (Continued)

Pair No. Signal Pin # Wire color Signal Pin # Wire color

14 RTIP 29 Violet RRING 63 Brown

15 TTIP 30 Violet TRING 64 Grey

15 RTIP 31 Violet RRING 65 Grey

16 TTIP 32 Black TRING 66 Blue

16 RTIP 33 Black RRING 67 Blue

GND 34 68

21.2.2.2 SUB D 37 pin - FW cable

Figure 320 Sub D 37 pin - FW cable

384 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Demarcation panel/DDF installation

Table 37 SUB D 37 pin - FW cable

M1 Pair N° QUAD N° Wire color M1 Pair N° QUAD N° Wire color


IN IN IN IN

2 1 1 Blue 12 1 1 Blue

21 White 30 White

3 2 Violet 13 2 Violet

22 Turquoise 31 Turquoise

4 3 2 Orange 14 3 2 Orange

23 White 32 White

5 4 Violet 15 4 Violet

24 Turquoise 33 Turquoise

6 5 3 Green 16 5 3 Green

25 White 34 White

7 6 Violet 17 6 Violet

26 Turquoise 35 Turquoise

8 7 4 Brown 18 7 4 Brown

27 White 36 White

9 8 Violet 19 8 Violet

28 Turquoise 37 Turquoise

21.3 Prerequisite
MSS-1/4/8 Shelf Installation must be completed. See:

• MSS-1 shelf installation


• MSS-4/8 and MPT-HL/HLC shelf installation
• Power interfaces installation

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 385


Demarcation panel/DDF installation Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

21.4 Recommended tools


• Phillips screwdriver
• Set of standard open-ended wrenches

See the 9500 MPR Product Information Manual for part numbers.

21.4.1 DS1 RJ-45 demarcation panel


• DS1 RJ-45 demarcation panel Qty 1 per P32E1DS1 module or 1 per up to two
MSS-1 shelves
• 68 pin SCSI Cable, Nokia
− Non-Protected DS1 configuration, Qty 2 per P32E1DS1 module
− Protected DS1 configuration, Qty 4 per P32E1DS1 protection pair
− Non-Protected DS1 configuration, Qty 1 per MSS-1 shelf
• Rack screws, Qty 4, P/O Aluminum Rack Screw Kit

21.4.2 DS1 37 pin D demarcation panel


• DS1 37 Pin D Demarcation Panel, Qty 1 per P32E1DS1 module or 1 per up to
two MSS-1 shelves
• DS1 37 Pin D Demarcation Panel Mounting Bracket, Qty 1 per 37 Pin D
Demarcation Panel
• 68 pin SCSI Cable:
− Non-Protected DS1 configuration, Qty 2 per P32E1DS1 module
− Protected DS1 configuration, Qty 4 per P32E1DS1 protection pair
− Non-Protected DS1 configuration, Qty 1 per MSS-1 shelf
• Rack screws, Qty 4, P/O Aluminum Rack Screw Kit

21.4.3 DS3 hybrid grooming panel


• DS3 Hybrid Grooming demarcation panel, Qty 1 per six protected DS3 line pairs
for P2E3DS3 modules
• DS3 Hybrid Splitter, Qty 2 per protected DS3 Line pair for P2E3DS3 modules

386 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Demarcation panel/DDF installation

• Rack screws, Qty 4


− Aluminum Rack Screws, Nokia PN: 330-2882-030, Qty 4, P/O DS3 Hybrid
Grooming demarcation panel Kit
or
− Seismic Rack Screws, Qty 4, P/O Seismic Rack Screw Kit

21.5 Procedures
This section provides procedures to install the following:

• DS1 RJ-45 demarcation panel


• DS1 37 pin demarcation panel
• DS3 hybrid grooming panel

21.5.1 DS1 RJ-45 demarcation panel

1. Position the DS1 RJ-45 demarcation panel according to site documentation,


typically two and one-half rack increment above the MSS-1/4/8 shelf.
See Figure 321.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 387


Demarcation panel/DDF installation Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

Figure 321 DS1 RJ-45 demarcation panel mounting detail

2. Secure the demarcation panel by using four rack screws.

Warning: Do not over tighten the cable mounting screws, this could cause them
to break off inside the connector standoffs. Tighten the screws to 2.4317 in lb.
(0.2026 ft lb.) ±10%.

3. Route, connect, and secure the SCSI to SCSI cable from the MSS-1/MSS-4/
MSS-8 shelf to the RJ-45 demarcation panel.

4. Run the SCSI cables under the radio to the back of the rack and up to the
demarcation panel. See Figure 322 and Figure 323 for an example of a finished
radio install.

388 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Demarcation panel/DDF installation

Figure 322 DS1 demarcation panel cable routing, front view

Figure 323 DS1 demarcation panel cable routing, rear view

The procedure is completed.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 389


Demarcation panel/DDF installation Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

21.5.2 DS1 37 pin demarcation panel

1. Mount the DS1 37 pin D demarcation panel to the mounting bracket. See
Figure 324.

Figure 324 DS1 37 pin D demarcation panel and rack mount bracket detail

2. Mount the DS1 37 pin D demarcation panel mounting bracket to the rack
according to site documentation, typically two rack increment above the MSS-4/
MSS-8 shelf. See Figure 325.

Figure 325 DS1 37 pin D demarcation panel mounting detail

3. Secure the demarcation panel by using four rack screws.

390 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Demarcation panel/DDF installation

Warning: Do not over tighten the cable mounting screws, this could cause them
to break off inside the connector standoffs. Tighten the screws to 2.4317 in lb.
(0.2026 ft lb.) ±10%.

4. Route, connect, and secure the SCSI to SCSI cables from the MSS-1/4/8 shelf
to the 37 pin D demarcation panel.

5. Run the SCSI cables under the radio to the back of the rack and up to the
demarcation panel. See Figure 322 and Figure 323 for an example of a finished
radio install.
The procedure is completed.

21.5.3 DS3 hybrid grooming panel

1. Position the DS3 Hybrid Grooming demarcation panel according to the site
documentation.

2. Secure the demarcation panel by using 4 rack screws.

3. Connect the hybrid splitter panel mount BNC connectors to the designated DS3
Line x (1 to 6) Output panel opening according to site documentation and secure
to the demarcation panel. See Figure 326.

4. Route and connect the hybrid splitter mini BNC connectors to the main and
protect P2E3DS3 modules Line (1 or 2) OUT connectors. See Figure 326 and
Figure 323.

5. Connect the hybrid splitter panel mount BNC connectors to the designated DS3
Line x (1 to 6) Input panel opening according to site documentation and secure
to the demarcation panel. See Figure 326.

6. Connect the mini BNC connectors to the main and protect P2E3DS3 modules
Line (1 or 2) IN connectors. See Figure 326 and Figure 323.

7. Label the DS3 Hybrid Grooming demarcation panel per local practices and
procedures.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 391


Demarcation panel/DDF installation Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

Warning: Do not overtighten the cable mounting screws, this could cause them
to break off inside the connector standoffs.

Figure 326 DS3 hybrid splitter interconnect detail

9500 DS3 Trib (Protected Pair)

MSS-8 Shelf
Main Side Spare Side
Mini BNC Connectors Mini BNC Connectors

BNC Panel Mount


Customer Connectors

Line 1 Line 1 Line 2 Line 2


Out In Out In

DS3 Line 1 DS3 Line 2 DS3 Line 3 DS3 Line 4 DS3 Line 5 DS3 Line 6
Output Intput Output Intput Output Intput Output Intput Output Intput Output Intput

No3000

Figure 327 P2E3DS3 mini-BNC connector detail

The procedure is completed.

392 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual MPT ODU installation

22 MPT ODU installation

22.1 Purpose
This chapter describes how to physically install MPT-HC/MC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-
HQAM/9558HC (MPT ODU), integrated and non-integrated antenna mounts,
antennas, and MPT ODU couplers including the following:

• Setting the polarization on the antenna, coupler and MPT ODU.


• Mounting the MPT ODU coupler to the antenna and non-integrated mount.
• Mounting the MPT ODU to the integrated antenna, coupler, and non-integrated
mount.

22.2 General

Note: This chapter is only required for applications which include MPT ODU installation. For
applications without MPT ODU installation, continue to the next chapter.

Warning: To Ensure continuity and avoid short circuits, all RJ45, Coaxial, Ethernet, Optical
Fiber. cables / connector connections made in the field must be verified and checked with
a Cable tester. Also, the weatherproofing must be checked.

Warning: All the cables (coax cable, Cat5e cable, fiber cable) must be secured to the tower
with the relevant UV ties raps.

See:

• The 9500 MPR Product Information Manual for product descriptions


• The 9500 MPR Technical Specifications for Split Mount Applications for
technical specifications
• The 9500 MPR Frequency Plan for MPT Outdoor Transceivers for part numbers

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 393


MPT ODU installation Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

22.2.1 Types of MPT ODU


The MPT ODU consists of one cabinet including the Ethernet interface + modem +
RF transceiver + diplexer of a channel or sub-band.

Two mechanical solutions are used:

• With an embedded diplexer for cost optimization

• With an external diplexer

22.2.2 Radio configurations


The MPT ODU is deployable in three hardware configurations to optimize radio
configuration growth scenarios.

RPS and XPIC functions are supported in two configurations, depending on the
transceiver:

• additional hardware modules —supported on MPT-HC/XP/9558HC


• integrated—supported on MPT-HC-HQAM/XP-HQAM

Hardware configurations, including their supported RPS and XPIC functions are as
follows:

• MPT ODU with no XPIC or RPS functions: supports 1+0 not protected radio
configuration only
• MPT ODU with 1+1 RPS: supports 1+0 not protected, 1+1 HSB, 1+1 SD, and
1+1 FD radio configurations
• MPT ODU with XPIC/RPS: supports 1+0 not protected, 1+1 HSB, 1+1 SD, 1+1
FD, 2x(1+0) XPIC, 4x(1+0) XPIC, and 2x(1+1) XPIC radio configurations

22.2.3 Accessories and cables for MPT connections


See the 9500 MPR Product Information Manual for part numbers.

394 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual MPT ODU installation

22.2.3.1 RPS cable restrictions for MPT-HC-HQAM/XP-HQAM

XPIC and RPS functions are embedded in HC-HQAM/XP-HQAM. An RTU license is


required to enable XPIC functions.The RPS cable is mandatory for channel spacings
40, 50, 56 and 60MHz.

The optical RPS 1 m cable between the MPTs is mandatory in the following cases:

• 2 x (1+1 HSB) XPIC split-mount configuration


• 2 x (1+1 SD) XPIC split-mount configuration
• 2+0 XPIC full-outdoor configuration (MPR-e)
• mixed E1 and Ethernet traffic. If jumbo frames (= 5000 bytes) are transported
with mixed TDM traffic, the maximum number of TDM to TDMs that can be
cross-connected in a specified radio direction in 1+1 configuration without RPS
module and tight cable is limited, as follows:
− in ETSI: 109 E1 in 40 MHz / 256QAM and 81 E1 in 56 MHz / 256QAM for
jumbo frame = 5000 bytes
− in ANSI for E1/DS1: 111 E1 in 40 MHz / 256QAM, 86 E1 in 50 MHz /
256QAM and 81 E1 in 60 MHz / 256QAM for jumbo frame = 5000 bytes
For MPT-HC-HQAM/XP-HQAM for 40, 50, 56 and 60MHz channel spacing, V-
RPS is not supported. The RPS cable must be used; consequently, there is no
impact on the maximum number of the supported E1.
• Packet Throughput Boost. In 1+1 configuration, the maximum throughput that
can be transmitted without RPS module is 440Mbps (applicable to MPT-MC,
HC, XP, HQAM). Consequently, Nokia recommends the use of the RPS module
with a tight cable for channel spacing equal or above 50MHz in a 1+1
configuration. For smaller channels, assuming 30% gain using PTB, the module
and tight cable is not normally used. Contact Nokia technical support for more
information.

22.2.4 1+1 RPS configuration


The 1+1 RPS is configurable using one of the following methods:

• Cabled 1+1 RPS: RPS cable required between main and spare MPT ODUs
• Virtual 1+1 RPS: No RPS cable required between main and spare MPT ODUs

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 395


MPT ODU installation Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

22.2.5 Labels affixed on the MPT ODU


a. The labels depicted in Figure 328 and Figure 329 and described in Table 38 is
affixed externally to all types of MPT ODU and MPT ODU TRANSCEIVER
boxes;
b. For MPT ODU with external diplexer, an additional label, depicted in Figure 330
and described in Table 39, is placed on the external diplexer assembly.

Figure 328 MPT-HC/MC/XP ODU label

Figure 329 Label on MPT-HC-HQAM/XP-HQAM transceiver boxes

9500 MPR TX Frequency SHIFTER Tx Sub


MPT HQAM
HQAM -28VDC -58VDC 1,5A 0,7A
MHZ band
SERIAL
No
14500- 420-475
0682 14724
1-1P 3DB20373BAAA01 123456789

A B
24488

Table 38 MPT ODU label details

SYMBOL OR WRITING MEANING

9500 MPR-A Equipment Acronym & Nokia Logo

CE European Community logo

! Not harmonized frequency logo

2002/96/EC WEEE (Waste Electrical and Electronic


Equipment) Logo

-28 V / -58 V 1,5 A / 0,7 A Power supply range and current range

Logistical Item (shown numbers as examples) Logistical Item for Customer

A Logistical Item for Customer, bar code 128

Serial n° (shown numbers as examples) Factory Serial number

396 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual MPT ODU installation

Table 38 MPT ODU label details (Continued)

SYMBOL OR WRITING MEANING

B Factory Serial number bar code 128

TX Frequency MHz (shown numbers as examples) Working frequency range

Shifter MHz (shown numbers as examples) Shifter

TX Sub-band (shown numbers as examples) TX Sub-band

Figure 330 Label affixed inside the MPT ODU external diplexer box

Table 39 Label affixed inside the MPT ODU external diplexer box

SYMBOL OR WRITING MEANING

9500 MPR-A Equipment Acronym & Nokia Logo

CE European Community logo

12345 (example) Notified body

! Not harmonized frequency logo

2002/96/EC WEEE (Waste Electrical and Electronic


Equipment) Logo

PN/ICS 3DB06775AAAA 01 (example) Factory Technical Code + ICS

A Factory Technical Code + ICS, bar code 128

Logistical Item 3DB06775AAXX (example) Logistical Item for Customer

B Logistical Item for Customer, bar code 128

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 397


MPT ODU installation Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

Table 39 Label affixed inside the MPT ODU external diplexer box (Continued)

SYMBOL OR WRITING MEANING

S/N CW 050609001 (example) Factory Serial number

C Factory Serial number bar code 128

D (shown numbers as examples) the field “Shifter MHz” indicates the possible frequency
bands that can be used with this external diplexer
assembly. The choice between different shifters is
performed by Craft Terminal;
for each “Shifter MHz”, the TX “LOW” and “HIGH” rows
indicate the frequency range assumed by transceiver
TX section, according to the TRANSCEIVER and
external diplexer boxes coupling.

22.3 Types of pole mounting installation kits


Two types of pole mounting installation kits are supported:

• Integrated antenna mount


• Pole mounting for remote ODU installation

22.3.1 Integrated antenna mount


The integrated antenna Pole Mounting kits are designed for quick mechanical
installation, and:

• are included inside the chosen antenna kit


• foresee “Fine Tuning” for the positioning of the Antenna

As shown in Figure 331, the integrated antenna Pole Mounting kits are supplied with
the frequency-specific nose adapter for mounting the frequency-specific MPT ODU
transceiver or RF Coupler.

In general, the nose adapter is:

• already mounted on the antenna for small antenna types


• supplied separately for large antenna types and must be mounted on the
antenna

398 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual MPT ODU installation

Figure 331 Example of integrated antenna pole mounting (with antenna and nose adapter)

22.3.2 Pole mounting for remote ODU installation


These kits are frequency independent, and provide only the mechanical support
function. The frequency specialization is obtained by mounting the frequency-
specific nose adapter.

Figure 332 Pole mounting for remote MPT ODU installation kit

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 399


MPT ODU installation Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

22.3.3 Types of nose adapters


If there are:

• integrated antenna configurations, the nose adapter is delivered inside the


chosen antenna kit; in this case the RF interface is used to attach the frequency-
specific MPT ODU transceiver or RF Coupler.
• Non Integrated Antenna configurations, the nose adapter is used to attach:
− on one side, the frequency-specific MPT ODU transceiver or RF Coupler
− on the other side, to attach the Twist Flex cable or waveguide toward the
antenna.

In these Non Integrated Antenna configurations, the nose adapter is delivered as an


individual item. The nose adapter must be mounted on the rack/pole mount during
the installation procedure.

The mounting accessories are delivered with the nose adapter.

22.3.4 Types of RF couplers, OMT and OMT-C


The following RF coupler types are supported for the MPT ODU:

• 6 to 11 GHz Couplers (MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM); see Figure 333


• 11 to 38 GHz Couplers (MPT-HC/HC-HQAM); see Figure 334
• 6 to 11 GHz OMT (MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM); see Figure 335
• 11 to 23 GHz OMT, 11 and 25 GHz V-shape (MPT-HC/HC-HQAM); see
Figure 336
• 38 GHz OMT (MPT-HC/HC-HQAM); see Figure 337
• U6 and L6 OMT-C (MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM); see Figure 338
• 11, 13, 15, 18, and 23 GHz OMT-C (MPT-HC 11, 13, 15, 18 and 23 GHz and
MPT-HC-HQAM 13, 15, 18 and 23 GHz); see Figure 339
• Termination/loads for coupler OMT/OMT-C (MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-
HQAM); see Figure 340

400 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual MPT ODU installation

Figure 333 MPT ODU RF coupler views: 6 to 11 GHz

Figure 334 MPT-HC/HC-HQAM RF coupler view: 11 to 38 GHz

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 401


MPT ODU installation Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

Figure 335 MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM OMT view: 6 to 11 GHz

Figure 336 MPT-HC/HC-HQAM OMT view: 11 to 23 GHz / 11 and 25 GHz V-


shape

Figure 337 MPT-HC/HC-HQAM OMT 38 GHz

402 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual MPT ODU installation

Figure 338 MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM integrated OMT-C view: U6 and L6 GHz

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 403


MPT ODU installation Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

Figure 339 MPT-HC (11, 13, 15, 18 and 23 GHz) and MPT-HC-HQAM (13, 15, 18 and 23 GHz) OMT-
C view

Figure 340 Loads for unused ports view

404 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual MPT ODU installation

22.4 Prerequisite
No prerequisite applies.

22.5 Recommended materials and tools


None required.

22.5.1 MPT ODU


See the 9500 MPR Product Information Manual for part numbers.

• External 1+1 RPS/XPIC Modules


• Non-Integrated antenna mounts
• MPT ODU Coupler, if needed
• MPT ODU OMT, if needed
• MPT ODU accessories
• Set of metric wrenches or metric socket set
• Set of metric Allen keys

See the 9500 MPR Frequency Plan for MPT Outdoor Transceivers for more
information about the following:

• MPT-HC/HC-HQAM with embedded diplexer


• MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/9558HC without external diplexer
• MPT-XP/XP-HQAM without external diplexer;
• external diplexer Box for MPT ODU without external diplexer
− Unprotected configuration, Qty 1
− Protected configuration, Qty 2
− 2x(1+0) XPIC configuration, Qty 2
− 4x(1+0) XPIC configuration, Qty 4
− 2x(1+1) XPIC configuration, Qty 4

Nokia provides expert Installation Services for installations that have different
requirements from the recommended configuration as outlined in this manual.
Contact Nokia for details.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 405


MPT ODU installation Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

22.6 Installation procedures


This section provides the procedures to install MPT ODUs in the following
configurations. Complex steps are provided as separate procedures in the
Supporting procedures section.

• To install a 1+0 MPT ODU (integrated antenna) - all frequencies


• To install a 1+1 MPT ODU (integrated antenna) - all frequencies
• To install a 1+1 MPT ODU (non integrated antenna) - all frequencies
• To install a 1+1 HSB XPIC MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM configuration
• To install a 2x(1+0) XPIC MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM configuration
using OMT
• To install a 2x(1+0) XPIC MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM configuration
using OMT-C
• To install a 4x(1+0) XPIC MPT-HC (11, 18, and 23 GHz) and MPT HC-HQAM
(18, and 23 GHz) configuration using OMT-C

22.6.1 To install a 1+0 MPT ODU (integrated antenna) - all


frequencies

1. For MPT ODU with external diplexer, set the coupling between the transceiver
and external diplexer boxes. See To set the coupling between transceiver and
external diplexer box for more information.

Note: XPIC or RPS module is not required for 1+0 configuration. For MPT-HC-
HQAM and MPT-XP-HQAM, the XPIC and RPS functions are integrated with the
transceivers. XPIC and RPS module installation is not required.

2. Install the XPIC or RPS module onto the MPT ODU, if required, according to site
documentation. See To install RPS and XPIC+RPS module for more
information.

3. Set the polarization on the MPT ODU. See How to set polarization on the MPT
ODU for more information.

406 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual MPT ODU installation

Note: Install the nose adapter onto the antenna depending on the antenna
configuration.

4. The nose adapter is already mounted on the antenna for small antenna types.
The nose adapter is supplied separately for large antenna types, and must be
mounted on the antenna.

5. Install the Antenna and Pole Mounting.


The pole mounting is delivered as “pole mounting”, “antenna”, and frequency-
specific “nose adapter” already assembled. The integrated antenna is mounted
on the pole front.
Antenna and pole mounting must be installed in accordance with the
manufacturer’s instructions.

6. Verify or set the polarization on the Antenna nose.


To change the polarization, follow the instructions supplied with each antenna.
Figure 341 shows an example of antenna polarization.

Note: The antennas are normally supplied with vertical polarization.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 407


MPT ODU installation Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

Figure 341 Example of antenna polarization (“1+0” MPT ODU integrated antenna)

Note: MPT-MC and MPT-HC-HQAM/XP-HQAM do not have the solar shield.

7. Remove the solar shield from the MPT ODU. Save the solar shield for
installation later in the procedure.

8. Silicon grease must be put on the O-ring on nose adapter when indicated in the
manufacturer's installation instructions. If grease for O-ring is not mentioned, it
must be avoided.

9. Remember to first set the correct polarization on the MPT-HC with embedded
diplexer prior to installation on the antenna. For MPT ODU with external diplexer
orient the MPT ODU according to the polarization.
Install the MPT ODU on the Antenna nose adapter. See To install an MPT ODU
onto antenna, coupler, or OMT for more information. See Figure 411.
REMINDER: The MPT ODU/antenna assembly requires no additional seal on
the SHF flanges; the two ends are smooth. The O-ring seal around the male
“nose” provides sealing.

408 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual MPT ODU installation

10. Ground the MPT ODU system. See MPT ODU system grounding for more
information.

11. Install cables between MPT ODU and MSS. See Cable connections from MPT
ODU to MSS, step 5 for more information.

12. Pre-point the antenna. See Notes about antenna alignment for more
information.

13. Install the solar shield onto MPT ODU.

14. Affix the EMF stickers.


The procedure is completed.

15. 1+0 MPT ODU installation (non integrated antenna) - all frequencies
For the MPT ODU with external diplexer, set the coupling between the
TRANSCEIVER and external diplexer boxes. See To set the coupling between
transceiver and external diplexer box for more information.

Note: XPIC or RPS module is not required for 1+0 configuration. For MPT-HC-
HQAM and MPT-XP-HQAM, the XPIC and RPS functions are integrated with the
transceivers. XPIC and RPS module installation is not required.

16. Install the XPIC or RPS module onto the MPT-HC/XP according to site
documentation. See To install RPS and XPIC+RPS module for more
information.

17. Set the polarization on the MPT ODU. See How to set polarization on the MPT
ODU for more information.

18. Install the Nose Adapter on the “Pole Mount for Remote ODU”.

19. Install the “Pole Mount for Remote ODU” according to site documentation.
Pole mount must be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
If the instructions are missing, fix the U-bolts with 34 N x m tightening torque.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 409


MPT ODU installation Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

Note: The pole mount can be installed on the Right or Left hand side of the pole depending
on the azimuth and on the configuration of the tower. See Figure 342.

Figure 342 Pole mount for remote MPT ODU installation

Note: The pole mount can be installed on the Right or Left hand side of the pole depending
on the azimuth and on the configuration of the tower. See Figure 342.

MPT-HC-HQAM/XP-HQAM do not have the solar shield.

Remove the solar shield from the MPT ODU. Save the solar shield for
installation later in the procedure.

20. Silicon grease must be put on the O-ring on nose adapter when indicated in the
manufacturer's installation instructions. If grease for O-ring is not mentioned, it
must be avoided.

21.

Note: Remember to first set the correct polarization on the MPT-HC/HC-HQAM


with embedded diplexer prior to installation on the antenna. For MPT ODU with
external diplexer orient the MPT ODU according to the polarization.

Install the MPT ODU on Pole Mount for Remote ODU. See To install an MPT
ODU onto antenna, coupler, or OMT for more information. See Figure 414.

410 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual MPT ODU installation

22.

Note: The installation of the antenna and its own pole mount, as well as the
antenna polarization check/change, must be done in accordance with the
manufacturer’s instructions.

Install the external Antenna with its own Pole Mount according to the site
documentation.

23. Connect the antenna side (flange) of the MPT ODU Pole Mount’s nose adapter
to the external antenna, using the Flextwist waveguide. See Flextwist
waveguide installation for more information.

24. Ground the MPT ODU system. See MPT ODU system grounding for more
information.

25. Install cables between MPT ODU and MSS-1/MSS-4/MSS-8. See Cable
connections from MPT ODU to MSS for more information.

26. Pre-point the antenna. See Notes about antenna alignment for more
information.

27. Install the solar shield onto each MPT ODU.

28. Affix the EMF stickers.


The procedure is completed.

22.6.2 To install a 1+1 MPT ODU (integrated antenna) - all


frequencies

1. For MPT ODU with external diplexer, set the coupling between the transceiver
and external diplexer boxes. See To set the coupling between transceiver and
external diplexer box for more information.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 411


MPT ODU installation Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

Note: For MPT-HC-HQAM and MPT-XP-HQAM, the XPIC and RPS functions
are integrated with the transceivers. XPIC and RPS module installation is not
required.

2. Install the XPIC or RPS module on the MPT-HC/XP as required, according to


the site documentation. See To install RPS and XPIC+RPS module for more
information.

3. Set the polarization on the MPT ODU. See How to set polarization on the MPT
ODU for more information.

4.

Note: The nose adapter is already mounted on the antenna for small antenna
types. The nose adapter is supplied separately for large antenna types, and must
be mounted on the antenna.

Install the nose adapter onto the antenna depending on the antenna
configuration.

5. Install the Antenna and Pole Mount.


This pole mount is delivered as “pole mount”, “antenna”, and frequency-specific
“nose adapter” already assembled. The integrated antenna is mounted on the
pole front.
The antenna and pole mount must be installed in accordance with the
manufacturer’s instructions.

6. Verify or set the polarization of the RF coupler. See To set polarization on the
RF coupler for detailed instructions.

7. Silicon grease must be put on the O-ring before inserting the RF coupler on the
antenna’s nose adapter when indicated in the manufacturer's installation
instructions. If grease for O-ring is not mentioned, it must be avoided.

8. Install the RF coupler on the antenna-radio interface. See To install an MPT


ODU onto antenna, coupler, or OMT for more information. See Figure 343.

412 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual MPT ODU installation

Figure 343 Example of an RF coupler on an integrated antenna (11-38 GHz)

Warning: Verify that the indication, engraved on the coupler, is directed toward the side
pole.

9.

Note: MPT-HC-HQAM/XP-HQAM do not have the solar shield.

Remove the solar shield from each MPT ODU. Save the solar shields for
installation later in the procedure.

10. Silicon grease must be put on the RF couplers O-ring on nose adapter when
indicated in the manufacturer's installation instructions. If grease for O-ring is not
mentioned, it must be avoided.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 413


MPT ODU installation Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

Note: Set the horizontal polarization on the MPT-HC with embedded diplexer
prior to installation on the antenna. For MPT ODU with external diplexer, orient
the MPT ODU according to the horizontal polarization.

11. Install the main and protection MPT ODU on the RF coupler. See To install an
MPT ODU onto antenna, coupler, or OMT for more information. See Figure 416.
Figure 344 shows the final result, and indicates the position of the MAIN and
PROTECTION MPT ODU.

Figure 344 View of MPT-HC 1+1 integrated antenna after installation (11-38 GHz)

12. Ground the MPT ODU system. See MPT ODU system grounding for more
information.

13. Install cables between MPT ODU and MSS-1/MSS-4/MSS-8. See Cable
connections from MPT ODU to MSS for more information.

414 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual MPT ODU installation

Note:

1+1 RPS cable is not required for virtual 1+1 RPS configuration.

Virtual 1+1 RPS configuration is not supported for MPT-HC-HQAM/XP-HQAMs


with modem profiles higher than 30 MHz. The 1+1 RPS cable is required.

14. Install 1+1 RPS cable between the main and protection MPT ODUs as required
according to site documentation. See To connect cable in 1+1 RPS
configuration for more information.

15. Pre-point the antenna. See Notes about antenna alignment for more
information.

16. Install the solar shield onto each MPT ODU.

17. Affix the EMF stickers.


The procedure is complete.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 415


MPT ODU installation Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

22.6.3 To install a 1+1 MPT ODU (non integrated antenna)


- all frequencies

1. For MPT ODU with external diplexer, set the coupling between the transceiver
and external diplexer boxes. See To set the coupling between transceiver and
external diplexer box for more information.

Note: For MPT-HC-HQAM and MPT-XP-HQAM, the XPIC and RPS functions
are integrated with the transceivers. XPIC and RPS module installation is not
required.

2. Install the XPIC or RPS module on the two MPT-HC/XPs as required, according
to site documentation. See To install loads for unused ports for more
information.

3. Set the polarization on the MPT ODU. See How to set polarization on the MPT
ODU for more information.

4. Install the Nose Adapter on the “Pole Mount for Remote ODU”.

5. Install the “Pole Mount for Remote ODU” according to site documentation.
Pole mount must be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
In case of missing instructions, fix the U-bolts with 34 N x m tightening torque.
The pole mount can be installed on the Right or Left hand side of the pole
depending on the azimuth and on the configuration of the tower. See Figure 342.

6. Verify or set the polarization of the RF coupler. See To set polarization on the
RF coupler for detailed instructions.

7. Silicon grease must be put on the O-ring before inserting the RF coupler on Pole
Mount when indicated in the manufacturer's installation instructions. If grease for
O-ring is not mentioned, it must be avoided.

8. Install the RF coupler on the Pole Mount for Remote ODU nose adapter. See To
install an MPT ODU onto antenna, coupler, or OMT for more information. See
Figure 418.

416 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual MPT ODU installation

Note: MPT-HC-HQAM/XP-HQAM do not have the solar shield.

9. If not previously instructed, remove the solar shield from each MPT ODU. Save
the solar shields for installation later in the procedure.

10. Silicon grease must be put on the O-ring on nose adapters when indicated in the
manufacturer's installation instructions. If grease for O-ring is not mentioned, it
must be avoided.

11. Remember to first set the horizontal polarization on the MPT-HC with embedded
diplexer prior to installation on the antenna. For MPT ODU with external diplexer
orient the MPT ODU according to the horizontal polarization.
Install the main and protect MPT ODU on the RF coupler. See To install an MPT
ODU onto antenna, coupler, or OMT for more information. See Figure 418.
Figure 345 shows the final result, and indicates the MAIN MPT ODU and the
PROTECTION MPT ODU.

Figure 345 Installation of MPT-HC 1+1 (11-38 GHz)

PROTECTION RF MAIN
HQAM coupler HQAM

25510

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 417


MPT ODU installation Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

Note: The installation of the antenna and pole mount, as well as the antenna
polarization check/change, must be done in accordance with the manufacturer’s
instructions.

12. Install the external Antenna using its own Pole Mount according to site
documentation.

13. Connect the antenna side (flange) of the MPT ODU Pole Mount’s nose adapter
to the external antenna, by means of the “Flextwist” waveguide. See Flextwist
waveguide installation for more information.

14. Ground the MPT ODU system. See MPT ODU system grounding for more
information.

15. Install cables between the two MPT ODU and MSS-1/MSS-4/MSS-8. See Cable
connections from MPT ODU to MSS for more information.

Note: 1+1 RPS cable is not required for virtual 1+1 RPS configuration.

Virtual 1+1 RPS configuration is not supported for MPT-HC-HQAM/XP-HQAMs


with modem profiles higher than 30 MHz. The 1+1 RPS cable is required.

16. Install 1+1 RPS cable between the main and protection MPT ODUs as required
according to site documentation. See To connect cable in 1+1 RPS
configuration for more information.

17. Pre-point the antenna. See Notes about antenna alignment for more
information.

18. Install the solar shield onto each MPT ODU.

19. Affix the EMF stickers.


The procedure is complete.

418 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual MPT ODU installation

22.6.4 To install a 1+1 HSB XPIC MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/


XP-HQAM configuration

1. For MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM with external diplexer, set the coupling


between the transceiver and external diplexer boxes. See To set the coupling
between transceiver and external diplexer box for more information.

Note: For MPT-HC-HQAM and MPT-XP-HQAM, the XPIC and RPS functions
are integrated with the transceivers. XPIC and RPS module installation is not
required.

2. Install the XPIC module onto the MPT-HC/XP. See To install RPS and
XPIC+RPS module for more information.

3. Set the polarization on the MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM. See How to set


polarization on the MPT ODU for more information.

4. Install the Nose Adapter on the horizontal “Pole Mount for Remote ODU”.

5. Install the horizontal “Pole Mount for Remote ODU” according to site
documentation.
Pole mount must be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
In case of missing instructions, fix the U-bolts with 34 N x m tightening torque.

Note: The pole mount can be installed on the Right or Left hand side of the pole depending
on the azimuth and on the configuration of the tower. See Figure 342.

6. Verify or set the polarization of the horizontal RF coupler. See To set polarization
on the RF coupler for detailed instructions.

Note: MPT-HC-HQAM/XP-HQAM do not have the solar shield.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 419


MPT ODU installation Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

7. Remove the solar shield from the two horizontal MPT-HC/XP. Save the solar
shields and screws for installation later in the procedure.

8. Silicon grease must be put on the O-ring before inserting the RF coupler on Pole
Mount for Remote ODU when indicated in the manufacturer's installation
instructions. If grease for O-ring is not mentioned, it must be avoided.

9. Remember to first set the correct polarization on the MPT-HC prior to installation
on the coupler.
Install the main and protect horizontal MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAMs on
the horizontal RF coupler. See To install an MPT ODU onto antenna, coupler, or
OMT for more information. See Figure 418.
Figure 346 shows the final result when installing an MPT-HC, and indicates the
main MPT-HC and the protection MPT-HC.

Figure 346 Installation of MPT-HC/HC-HQAM 1+1 (11-38 GHz)

PROTECTION RF MAIN
HQAM coupler HQAM

25510

10. Repeat steps 4 to 9 to install the vertical XPIC MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-


HQAM pair.

11. Install the co-channel Antenna using its own Pole Mount according to site
documentation.

420 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual MPT ODU installation

The installation of the antenna and pole mount must be done in accordance with
the manufacturer’s instructions.

12. Connect the antenna side (flange) of the HSB couplers to the co-channel
antenna, by means of the Flextwist waveguide. See Flextwist waveguide
installation for more information.
a. Between the horizontal HSB coupler to the co-channel antenna horizontal
port
b. Between the vertical HSB coupler to the co-channel antenna vertical port

13. Ground the MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM system. See MPT ODU system


grounding for more information.

14. Install cables between the four MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM and MSS-1/


MSS-4/MSS-8. See Cable connections from MPT ODU to MSS for more
information.
a. Between the main horizontal MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM and
MSS-1/MSS-4/MSS-8.
b. Between the protection horizontal MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM and
MSS-1/MSS-4/MSS-8.
c. Between the main vertical MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM and MSS-1/
MSS-4/MSS-8.
d. Between the protection vertical MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM and
MSS-1/MSS-4/MSS-8.

Note: 1+1 RPS cable is not required for virtual 1+1 RPS configuration.

15. Install 1+1 RPS cable between the main and protection MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/
XP-HQAMs as required according to site documentation. See To connect cable
in 1+1 RPS configuration for more information.
a. Between the main and protection horizontal MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-
HQAMs
b. Between the main and protection vertical MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-
HQAMs

16. Install XPIC cable between the horizontal and vertical MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/
XP-HQAMs. See To connect cable in XPIC configuration for more information.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 421


MPT ODU installation Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

a. Between the main horizontal and vertical MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-


HQAMs
b. Between the protection horizontal and vertical MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-
HQAMs

17. Pre-point the antenna. See Notes about antenna alignment for more
information.

18. Install the solar shield onto each MPT-HC/XPs.

19. Affix the EMF stickers.


The procedure is completed.

422 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual MPT ODU installation

22.6.5 To install a 2x(1+0) XPIC MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-


HQAM configuration using OMT

1. Prepare antenna for XPIC application


2x(1+0) XPIC MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM installation using the OMT is
foreseen with RFS AMPT integrated antennas only (2 to 6 ft).

Note: Former AWY antennas can be upgraded to receive the OMT. The upgrade kits
include assembling instructions.

Each OMT is provided (inside the packaging) with the antenna interface specific
to the frequency and with the detailed installation instructions. For 25 GHz
OMTs the antenna interface is already integrated in the OMT.
On SB and SC type antennas, it is necessary first to remove the radio interface,
if present. This is needed in single polarization.
For 11 GHz, there is a flat OMT option and a face-to-face OMT option (with
separate procedures for each).
OMT installation

2. For OMT installation there are two scenarios:


a. Upgrading an existing installation:
• For SB or SC type + pole mount, go to step 3.
• For SBX or SCX type + pole mount, go to step 6.
b. New installation: New antenna (SBX-AMPT or SCX-AMPT type) + pole
mounting:
• For 6 to 11* GHz OMT (for MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM - *11
GHz installed with flat OMT), go to step 9.
• For 11* to 23 GHz OMT (for MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP - *11 GHz
installed with face-to-face OMT), go to step 15.
• For 11 and 25 GHz V-shape, go to step 22.
• For 38 GHz OMT, go to step 26.

3. Upgrading an existing antenna (SB or SC type) + pole mount


Remove existing radio interface including the Feeder and Feeder plate. See
Figure 347.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 423


MPT ODU installation Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

4. Remove from the radio interface the Feeder and Feeder plate. See Figure 347.

Figure 347 Upgrade existing SB or SC type antenna

5. The Feeder and the feeder plate from the existing radio interface must be
reassembled on the new OMT interface. Keep the feeder and feeder plate and
proceed based on your configuration:
a. For 6 to 11* GHz OMT (for MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM - *11 GHz
installed with flat OMT), go to step 9.
b. For 11* to 23 GHz OMT (for MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP - *11 GHz installed
with face-to-face OMT), go to step 15.
c. For 11 and 25 GHz V-shape, go to step 22.
d. For 38 GHz OMT, go to step 26.

6. Existing antenna (SBX or SCX type) +pole mount


Remove existing radio interface. See Figure 348.

7. Remove the Feeder and Feeder plate from the radio interface. See Figure 348.

424 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual MPT ODU installation

Figure 348 Upgrade existing SBX or SCX type antenna

8. The Feeder and the feeder plate from the existing radio interface must be
reassembled on the new OMT interface. Keep the feeder and feeder plate and
proceed based on your configuration:
a. For 6 to 11* GHz OMT (for MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM - *11 GHz
installed with flat OMT), go to step 9.
b. For 11* to 23 GHz OMT (for MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP - *11 GHz installed
with face-to-face OMT), go to step 15.
c. For 11 and 25 GHz V-shape, go to step 22.
d. For 38 GHz OMT, go to step 26.
6 to 11* GHz OMT (for MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM - *11 GHz installed with flat
OMT)

9. Assemble (reassemble) the Feeder and the Feeder plate on the OMT antenna
interface. See Figure 349.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 425


MPT ODU installation Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

Figure 349 OMT antenna interface assembly detail (6 to 11 GHz)

10. Insert and screw down the OMT interface assembled into the Antenna and add
the fine tuning screw with nylon spacer and washer plus the special HEX spacer.
See Figure 350.

426 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual MPT ODU installation

Figure 350 Install OMT interface onto antenna w/fine tuning screw (6 to 11
GHz)

11. Silicon grease must be put on the O-ring before installing the OMT into the
receptacle when indicated in the manufacturer's installation instructions. If
grease for O-ring is not mentioned, it must be avoided. See Figure 351.

Figure 351 Apply silicone grease on O-ring before OMT installation

12. Place and fix the OMT to the Interface without tightening the screws. See
Figure 352.

13. Fix the fine tuning plate to the OMT body on the opposite side with respect to the
pole. See Figure 352.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 427


MPT ODU installation Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

Figure 352 OMT installation on the antenna

14. Proceed to MPT installation.


11* to 23 GHz OMT (for MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP - *11 GHz installed with face-to-face
OMT)

15. Assemble (reassemble) the Feeder and the Feeder plate on the OMT antenna
interface. See Figure 353.

428 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual MPT ODU installation

Figure 353 OMT antenna interface assembly detail (11 to 38 GHz)

16. Insert and screw down the OMT interface assembled into the Antenna and add
the steel angular tuning part. See Figure 354.

Figure 354 Install OMT interface onto antenna w/angular tuning part (11 to 38 GHz)

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 429


MPT ODU installation Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

17. Silicon grease must be put on the O-ring before installing the OMT into the
receptacle when indicated in the manufacturer's installation instructions. If
grease for O-ring is not mentioned, it must be avoided. See Figure 355.

Figure 355 Apply silicone grease on O-ring before OMT installation

18. Fix the fine tuning screw to the OMT body. See Figure 356.

430 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual MPT ODU installation

Figure 356 OMT fine tuning screw installation (11 to 23 GHz)

Fine tuning nut,


alignment notch

Fine tuning
screw

No3401

19. Take care to place the OMT with the engraved ARROW pointing towards the
pipe. See Figure 374.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 431


MPT ODU installation Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

Figure 357 OMT orientation detail (11 to 23 GHz)

20. Place and fix the OMT to the OMT Interface, avoiding tightening the screws. See
Figure 374.

21. Proceed to MPT installation.


11 and 25 GHz V-shape

Note: This procedure provides a summary of the steps.

Follow the instructions in the detailed instruction leaflet provided inside the
delivery box for correct installation.

22. Mount the MPT interfaces as shown in Figure 358.

432 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual MPT ODU installation

Figure 358 Mount the MPT interfaces

23. Perform one of the following to mount the basic feeder:


a. For new installations:
If the OMT and the antenna are provided separately, the basic feeder and
the tuning plate contained in the antenna package must be mounted on the
OMT antenna port using the screws and spacers. Follow the indications
provided in Figure 359.

Figure 359 Mount the basic feeder: new installation

If the antenna and the OMT are provided in the same package, the basic
feeder and the eventual tuning plate and spacers are in the package. Mount
them as per previous instructions.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 433


MPT ODU installation Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

b. For existing antennas, perform the following:


i. Remove the antenna flange, as shown in Figure 360.

Figure 360 Remove the antenna flange

ii. Dismount the basic feeder and the tuning plate (if present), by the
antenna flange, as shown in Figure 361.

Figure 361 Dismount the basic feeder and tuning plate (if present)

iii. Mount the basic feeder and the tuning plate in the OMT antenna port,
as shown in Figure 362.

434 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual MPT ODU installation

Figure 362 Mount the basic feeder and the tuning plate (if present)

24. Mount the OMT to the antenna using the four M5 screws, as shown in
Figure 363.

Figure 363 Mount the OMT to the antenna

Important: Always mount the OMT with the opening on the body towards the
bottom side. See Figure 364.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 435


MPT ODU installation Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

Figure 364 Mount the OMT with the opening toward the bottom

Note: On OMT V-shape, it is possible to mount 2 couplers and 4 ODU (except


on 1 ft antennas) to get the same functionality as an OMT-C. In this case, an OMT
reinforcement kit must be added:

•1AF30445AAAA for antennas 2 to 4 ft


•1AF30446AAAA for antennas 6 ft

25. Proceed to MPT installation.


38 GHz OMT

Note: This procedure provides a summary of the steps.

Follow the instructions in the detailed instruction leaflet provided inside the
delivery box for correct installation.

26. Mount the antenna interface on the antenna port of the OMT as shown in
Figure 365.

436 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual MPT ODU installation

Figure 365 Mount the antenna interface

27. Mount the two MPT interfaces as shown in Figure 366.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 437


MPT ODU installation Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

Figure 366 Mount the MPT interface

28. Perform one of the following to mount the basic feeder:


a. For new installations:
If the OMT and the antenna are provided separately, the basic feeder
contained in the antenna package must be mounted on the OMT antenna
port. Follow the indications provided in Figure 367.
Remove the protection tape on the basic feeder and on the OMT. Take care
with the O-ring present on the OMT port (see Figure 367 point 1). Mount the
basic feeder as indicated at point 2.
If the tuning plate is present in the package, it must be mounted as indicated
in point 2.

438 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual MPT ODU installation

Figure 367 Mount the basic feeder: new installation

b. For existing antennas, perform the following:


i. Remove the antenna flange, as shown in Figure 368.

Figure 368 Remove the antenna flange

ii. Dismount the basic feeder and the tuning plate (if present), by the
antenna flange, as shown in Figure 361.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 439


MPT ODU installation Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

Figure 369 Dismount the basic feeder and tuning plate (if present)

iii. Mount the basic feeder and the tuning plate (if it was present) in the
OMT antenna port, as shown in Figure 370.

Figure 370 Mount the basic feeder and the tuning plate (if present)

29. Mount the OMT to the antenna using the four M5 screws, as shown in
Figure 371.

440 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual MPT ODU installation

Figure 371 Mount the OMT to the antenna

MPT installation

30. Remove the solar shield from each MPT-HC/XP. Save the solar shields for
installation later in the procedure.

31. For MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM with external diplexer, set the coupling


between the transceiver and external diplexer boxes. See To set the coupling
between transceiver and external diplexer box for more information.

Note: For MPT-HC-HQAM and MPT-XP-HQAM, the XPIC and RPS functions
are integrated with the transceivers. XPIC and RPS module installation is not
required.

32. Install the XPIC module onto the MPT-HC/XP. See To install RPS and
XPIC+RPS module for more information.

33. Verify/Set horizontal polarization on the MPT-HC/HC-HQAM. See How to set


polarization on the MPT ODU for more information. See also Antenna alignment.

34. Silicon grease must be put on the OMT O-ring on the nose adapters, when
indicated in the manufacturer's installation instructions. If grease for O-ring is not
mentioned, it must be avoided. See Figure 372.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 441


MPT ODU installation Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

Figure 372 Apply silicone grease on O-ring before MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM


installation

35. Install the MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM transceivers on the RF OMT. See


Figure 373. See To install an MPT ODU onto antenna, coupler, or OMT for more
information.

Figure 373 MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM installation on OMT (6 to 11 GHz)

442 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual MPT ODU installation

36. If there is an unused port, install a load to match the unused port. See To install
loads for unused ports for more information.

37. Go to Fine tuning optimal polarization alignment between antennas, step 12.

22.6.6 To install a 2x(1+0) XPIC MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-


HQAM configuration using OMT-C

1. From the ground: check whether, in the tower, the mounting pipe is on the left or
on the right of the antenna axis. The OMT-C will have to be oriented so that its
noses further from the antenna are on the pipe side, for clearance.

2. Select action:
a. If you are installing an L6 or U6 GHz OMT-C (for MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/
XP-HQAM), go to step 3.
b. If you are installing an 11 to 23 GHz OMT-C (for MPT-MC/HC/HC-HQAM),
go to step 3.

Note: OMT-C is not supported with the 11 GHz version of MPT-HC-HQAM or


MPT-XP-HQAM. The 11 GHz OMT-C can only be used with an MPT-MC or
MPT-HC.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 443


MPT ODU installation Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

Figure 374 OMT installation on the antenna (11 to 23 GHz)

3. L6 GHz OMT-C polarization of the input receptacles


The OMT-C can be placed on the left side or the right side of the pipe. The
cables coming from the MPT must fall down and behind the OMT-C.
This condition leads to a special design for the internal wave guide and for the
lateral noses. Two parts make up the noses: the base is identical for both side
noses, the upper parts are different and they allow you to change the ODU
polarization, see Figure 375.

444 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual MPT ODU installation

Figure 375 L6 GHz lateral noses assembly with the pipe on the left

The OMT-C is delivered in the basic configuration “Pipe on the left”.


If the OMT-C frequency is L6, U6 or 7/8 GHz and the pipe is on the right, you
need to disassemble the upper part of the noses and invert them. Swap the left
side upper parts of the noses with the right ones and reassemble them. In doing
this, the engraved marking (H and V) in the upper parts have to correspond to
the same marking in the lower part, see Figure 376. Verify that you put the
gaskets back in place.

Figure 376 L6 GHz OMT-C lateral noses assembly with the pipe on the right

For the L6, U6 and 7/8 GHz OMT-C the use of a proper sway bar kit is required
to increase the stability of the overall mounting in the pole. The complete kit and
the installation instructions are contained in the OMT-C package, see
Figure 377. See Figure 378 for mounting information.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 445


MPT ODU installation Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

Figure 377 Sway bar kit

Figure 378 Sway bar kit mounting

After the OMT-C orientation has been determined (step 1) place the sway bar
bracket on the top of the OMT-C body. The sway bar must be placed over the
OMT-C body, so two different brackets for the OMT-C body sway bar fixation are
foreseen depending if the OMT-C is placed on the right or the left side of the
pole.
If the OMT-C is installed on a 6 feet antenna the sway bar must be screwed on
the angled part of the “on body” bracket. If the OMT-C is installed on a smaller
antenna the sway bar must be screwed to the horizontal part of the “on body”
bracket (see Figure 379).

446 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual MPT ODU installation

Figure 379 Sway bar positioning

Do not tighten the sway bar blocking screws until the procedure To perform fine
tuning for polarization alignment with OMT-C is competed.

4. Remove the solar shield from each MPT-HC/XP. Save the solar shields for
installation later in the procedure.

Note: MPT-HC-HQAM/XP-HQAM do not have the solar shield.

5. Install the OMT-C with the correct orientation: noses further from the antenna on
the pipe side.

6. For MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM with external diplexer, set the coupling


between the transceiver and external diplexer boxes. See To set the coupling
between transceiver and external diplexer box for more information.

Note: For MPT-HC-HQAM and MPT-XP-HQAM, the XPIC and RPS functions
are integrated with the transceivers. XPIC and RPS module installation is not
required.

7. Install the XPIC module onto the MPT-HC/XP. See To install RPS and
XPIC+RPS module for more information.

8. Verify/Set horizontal polarization on the MPT-HCs. See How to set polarization


on the MPT ODU for more information.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 447


MPT ODU installation Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

9. Silicon grease must be put on the OMT O-Rings on the nose adapters when
indicated in the manufacturer's installation instructions. If grease for O-ring is not
mentioned, it must be avoided. See Figure 380.

Figure 380 Apply silicone grease on O-ring before MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM


installation

10. Install the MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM transceivers on the RF OMT. See


Figure 381.

Figure 381 MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM installation on OMT (11 to 23 GHz)

448 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual MPT ODU installation

Hold the MPT so that the cables are on the bottom and opposite to the antenna
and perform one of the following:
a. For 6U, 6L and 7/8 GHz: if you completed step 3, you can mount the MPT
on the OMT-C nose, keeping the correct orientation of the cables, and the
waveguides of MPT and OMT-C noses should be perfectly aligned. The
orientation will need to be verified.

Note: When the cables are on the bottom right of the MPT (position
corresponding to V polarization), then the OMT-C nose is on the V mark (see
engraving on nose). When the cables are on the bottom left of the MPT (position
corresponding to H polarization), then the OMT-C nose is on the H mark.

b. For 11 to 23 GHz: the OMT-C noses cannot be turned but the MPT have a
polarization device with two positions. Check if the waveguides of the OMT-
C nose and the MPT are aligned or are misaligned by only 30°, if not turn
the polarization device in the other position.

Note: If the MPT have still their setting from factory, then it will be necessary to
turn the polarization device on one MPT only, on each side of the OMT-C.

See To install an MPT ODU onto antenna, coupler, or OMT for more information.

11. If there is an unused port, install a load to match the unused port. See To install
loads for unused ports for more information.

12. Fine tuning optimal polarization alignment between antennas


The OMT to interface fixation screws must be tightened after the OMT body is
in as horizontal a position as possible, with respect to the ground. Perform the
antenna pointing procedure. This involves finding the best antenna position to
maximize a homopolar received signal acting on the pole mount tuning screws.

13. After the antenna pointing procedure is complete, the fine tuning procedure can
start:
a. Switch on the cross polar receiver.
b. Slightly loosen the OMT to interface fixation screws.
• For 6 to 11 GHz: Monitor the received cross polar signal and adjust the
special HEX spacer of the fine tuning mechanism of the OMT till the
received signal power reaches its minimum (Power XP 30dB below the
homopolar received signal). See Figure 382.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 449


MPT ODU installation Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

• For 11 to 23 GHz: Monitor the received cross polar signal and adjust
the angular tuning screw of the fine tuning mechanism of the OMT till
the received signal power reaches its minimum (Power XP 30dB below
the homopolar received signal). See Figure 383.

Figure 382 Angular fine tuning mechanism adjustment (6 to 11 GHz)

Figure 383 Angular fine tuning mechanism adjustment (11 to 23 GHz)

Figure 384 shows the final result, and indicates the position of the
Horizontal and Vertical MPT-HC.

450 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual MPT ODU installation

Figure 384 View of MPT-HC 2+0 XPIC integrated antenna after installation (11-38 GHz)

• For 25 and 38 GHz: Monitor the received cross polar signal and
manually adjust the angular position of the OMT until the received
signal power reaches its minimum (Power XP 30dB below the
homopolar received signal). See Figure 385 for 25 GHz or Figure 386
for 38 GHz.

Figure 385 25 GHz polarization adjustment

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 451


MPT ODU installation Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

Figure 386 38 GHz polarization adjustment

14. Ground the MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM system. See MPT ODU system


grounding for more information.

15. Install cables between the two MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM and MSS-4/


MSS-8. See Cable connections from MPT ODU to MSS for more information.

16. Install XPIC cable between the horizontal and vertical MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/
XP-HQAMs. See To connect cable in XPIC configuration for more information.

17. Install the solar shield onto each MPT-HC/XP.

18. Affix the EMF stickers.


The procedure is completed.

22.6.7 To install a 4x(1+0) XPIC MPT-HC (11, 18, and 23


GHz) and MPT HC-HQAM (18, and 23 GHz)
configuration using OMT-C

Note: MPT-HC/XP-HQAM is not supported for this configuration.

452 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual MPT ODU installation

1. Prepare antenna for XPIC application. See Prepare antenna for XPIC
application for more information.

Note: For MPT-HC-HQAM and MPT-XP-HQAM, the XPIC and RPS functions
are integrated with the transceivers. XPIC and RPS module installation is not
required.

2. Install the XPIC module onto the four MPT-HC. See To install RPS and
XPIC+RPS module for more information.

3. Set the polarization on the MPT-HC/HC-HQAM. See How to set polarization on


the MPT ODU for more information.

4. Install the OMT-C coupler and Pole Mount according to site documentation.

5. Install the Antenna to the OMT-C coupler.


Antenna must be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

Note: MPT-HC-HQAM does not have the solar shield.

6. Remove the solar shield from the two horizontal MPT-HC. Save the solar shields
for installation later in the procedure.

7. Silicon grease must be put on the OMT-C coupler O-ring on nose adapters when
indicated in the manufacturer's installation instructions. If grease for O-ring is not
mentioned, it must be avoided.

8. Remember to set the correct polarization on the MPT-HC prior to installation on


the coupler.
Install MPT-HC/HC-HQAMs onto the OMT-C coupler. See To install an MPT
ODU onto antenna, coupler, or OMT for more information. See Figure 418.
a. Horizontal1 MPT-HC/HC-HQAM.
b. Horizontal2 MPT-HC/HC-HQAM.
c. Vertical1 MPT-HC/HC-HQAM.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 453


MPT ODU installation Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

d. Vertical2 MPT-HC/HC-HQAM.

9. Ground the MPT-HC/HC-HQAM system. See MPT ODU system grounding for
more information.

10. Install cables between the four MPT-HC/HC-HQAM and MSS-1/MSS-4/MSS-8.


See Cable connections from MPT ODU to MSS for more information.
a. Between the horizontal1 MPT-HC/HC-HQAM and MSS-1/MSS-4/MSS-8
b. Between the horizontal2 MPT-HC/HC-HQAM and MSS-1/MSS-4/MSS-8
c. Between the vertical1 MPT-HC/HC-HQAM and MSS-1/MSS-4/MSS-8
d. Between the vertical2 MPT-HC/HC-HQAM and MSS-1/MSS-4/MSS-8

11. Install XPIC cable between the horizontal and vertical MPT-HCs. See To
connect cable in XPIC configuration for more information.
a. Between horizontal1 and vertical1 MPT-HC/HC-HQAMs
b. Between horizontal2 and vertical2 MPT-HC/HC-HQAMs

12. If there is an unused port, install a load to match the unused port. See To install
loads for unused ports for more information.

13. Pre-point the antenna. See Notes about antenna alignment for more
information.

14. Fine-tune the polarization alignment. See To perform fine tuning for polarization
alignment with OMT-C for more information.

15. Install the solar shield onto each MPT-HC/HC-HQAMs.

16. Affix the EMF stickers.


The procedure is completed.

22.7 Supporting procedures


This section provides procedures that are common to MPT installation in specific
configurations. The following procedures are provided:

• To install loads for unused ports

454 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual MPT ODU installation

• To set the coupling between transceiver and external diplexer box


• To install RPS and XPIC+RPS module
• To set polarization on the RF coupler
• To install an MPT ODU onto antenna, coupler, or OMT
• To unmate and disconnect the electrical Ethernet cable from the MPT ODU
• To connect optical cable
• To connect power supply cable
• To install the MPT ODU Cable System
• To connect cable in 1+1 RPS configuration
• To connect cable in XPIC configuration
• Notes about antenna alignment
• To perform fine tuning for polarization alignment with OMT-C

22.7.1 To install loads for unused ports

1. In case of incomplete configurations using RF couplers, OMTs or OMT-Cs the


loading of unused ports is required. Use the correct load for the waveguide; see
the 9500 MPR Product Information Manual.
Insert the load in the receptacle of the unused port taking care to match the
waveguide orientation of the load to the one of the receptacle. Fasten it to the
Coupler (or OMT or OMT-C) body with the locking hooks that will be tightened
onto the corresponding fastening brackets on the coupler (or OMT or OMT-C).
See Figure 387.

Figure 387 Load for unused port installation

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 455


MPT ODU installation Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

2. Return to the appropriate procedure to resume installation tasks.


a. For 1+0 MPT ODU installation with integrated antenna, see To install a 1+0
MPT ODU (integrated antenna) - all frequencies.
b. For 1+1 MPT ODU installation with integrated antenna, see To install a 1+1
MPT ODU (integrated antenna) - all frequencies.
c. For 1+1 MPT ODU installation with non integrated antenna, see To install a
1+1 MPT ODU (non integrated antenna) - all frequencies.
d. For 2x(1+0) XPIC with OMT , see To install a 2x(1+0) XPIC MPT-HC/HC-
HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM configuration using OMT.
e. For 2x(1+0) XPIC with OMT-C, see To install a 2x(1+0) XPIC MPT-HC/HC-
HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM configuration using OMT-C.
f. For 4x(1+0) XPIC with OMT-C , see To install a 4x(1+0) XPIC MPT-HC (11,
18, and 23 GHz) and MPT HC-HQAM (18, and 23 GHz) configuration using
OMT-C.

22.7.2 To set the coupling between transceiver and


external diplexer box

1. The MPT ODU is delivered from the factory in one box (without the external
diplexer box attached). In addition, a conductive O-RING is supplied with each
MPT ODU w/external diplexer. The external diplexer box is delivered in another
box.
There are three mechanical solutions: one that uses a round shaped O-RING
gasket, and two that use an O-RING gasket that has a spine on one side. See
Figure 388 for a cross-section of the two gasket shapes.

Figure 388 MPT ODU O-RING gasket shapes - cross-section

Spine

Round gasket Gasket with spine


No2969

For MPT ODUs with the round O-RING gasket: This O-RING can be installed
without regard to orientation. See Figure 389 for an example of the round
O-RING.

456 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual MPT ODU installation

Figure 389 Round MPT ODU O-RING gasket

For MPT ODUs with the spine gasket: This O-RING MUST be installed with the
spine facing outwards so it will make contact with the external diplexer box. See
Figure 390 and Figure 391 for examples of the spine O-RING. Figure 392 shows
an example of the gasket installed on the ODU. If the red and black gasket is in
use, the black material must be on the inside.

Figure 390 Spine MPT ODU O-RING gasket (black)

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 457


MPT ODU installation Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

Figure 391 Spine MPT ODU O-RING gasket (red/black)

458 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual MPT ODU installation

Figure 392 Example of MPT ODU O-RING gasket installed on ODU

Warning: This gasket must never be removed.

The external diplexer box must be installed onto the MPT ODU in the field.

Note: Before you install the external diplexer box onto an MPT ODU, the corresponding
MPT ODU must be powered OFF. Power should not be applied until after installation of the
MPT ODU is complete.

2. Use the following procedure to install the external diplexer box onto the MPT
ODU:
a.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 459


MPT ODU installation Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

Note: MPT-HC-HQAM/XP-HQAM do not have the solar shield.

Remove the solar shield by unscrewing the 3 captive screws. Save the solar
shield for use later in the installation.
b. Place the MPT ODU, so the RF interfaces are facing up.
c. Install the O-RING gasket into the channel on the diplexer side of the MPT
ODU.
For MPT ODUs with the round O-RING gasket: This O-RING can be
installed without regard to orientation. For an example of the round O-RING
gasket installed onto the MPT ODU, see Figure 393.
For MPT ODUs with the spine gasket: This O-RING MUST be installed with
the spine facing outwards so it will make contact with the external diplexer
box. Orient the O-RING to match the channel pattern on the MPT ODU.
Verify that the spine on the O-RING is facing outward. For an example of
the spine O-RING gasket installed onto the MPT ODU, see Figure 394.

Note: Silicon grease must NEVER be applied to the conductive O-RING.

460 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual MPT ODU installation

Figure 393 Round MPT ODU O-RING gasket installed

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 461


MPT ODU installation Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

Figure 394 Spine MPT ODU O-RING gasket installed

d. Open the four locking hooks arranged on the four corners of the external
diplexer box.
e. Position the external diplexer box onto the MPT ODU. The MPT ODU is
keyed to guarantee proper orientation of the external diplexer box to the
MPT ODU. Orient the external diplexer box so the pin (Alignment key) on
the MPT ODU aligns with the hole on the external diplexer box. See
Figure 395. If the external diplexer box requires more than minimal force to
seat onto the MPT ODU, verify the location of the pin and the hole and rotate
the external diplexer box 180 degrees as required. Verify that the locking
hooks are not causing an interference. Then try to seat the external diplexer
box again.

462 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual MPT ODU installation

Figure 395 MPT ODU transceiver and external diplexer boxes coupling surfaces

Note: There is only one possible way to couple the external diplexer box and the
TRANSCEIVER box: the TRANSCEIVER box is keyed with a mistake-proofing pin, whose
position depends on the type of transceiver (low or high band) to ensure that the association
with the external diplexer box is always correct.

f. Secure the external diplexer box using the four hooks (B) onto the relative
brackets on the MPT ODU. Secure one corner hook first. Followed by the
hook on the opposite corner (180 degrees). Then secure a third hook and
finally the fourth hook. Never secure the hooks in a clock-wise or counter
clock-wise sequence.
g. Visually inspect the MPT ODU and external diplexer box junction and verify
that the external diplexer box is fully seated on all four sides of the MPT
ODU.

3. Return to the appropriate procedure to resume installation tasks.


a. For 1+0 MPT ODU installation with integrated antenna, see To install a 1+0
MPT ODU (integrated antenna) - all frequencies.
b. For 1+1 MPT ODU installation with integrated antenna, see To install a 1+1
MPT ODU (integrated antenna) - all frequencies.
c. For 1+1 MPT ODU installation with non integrated antenna, see To install a
1+1 MPT ODU (non integrated antenna) - all frequencies.
d. For 1+1 HSB XPIC with co-channel antenna, see To install a 1+1 HSB XPIC
MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM configuration.
e. For 2x(1+0) XPIC with OMT, see To install a 2x(1+0) XPIC MPT-HC/HC-
HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM configuration using OMT.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 463


MPT ODU installation Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

f. For 2x(1+0) XPIC with OMT-C, see To install a 2x(1+0) XPIC MPT-HC/HC-
HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM configuration using OMT-C.

22.7.3 To install RPS and XPIC+RPS module

1. The MPT-HC/XP is delivered from the factory in one box in the basic
configuration (without an external module). The external module (RPS or
XPIC+RPS) is delivered in another box.
The external module must be installed on the MPT-HC/XP in the field.

Note: Before you install an external module (RPS or XPIC+RPS module) on a MPT-HC/
XP, the corresponding MPT ODU must be powered OFF. Power should not be applied until
after the basic cover, RPS, or XPIC+RPS module has been properly secured.

2. Use the following procedure to install the RPS or XPIC+RPS module on the
MPT-HC/XP:
a. Remove the solar shield by unscrewing the 3 captive screws. Save the solar
shield for use later in the installation.
b. Unlock the 4 screws securing the basic cover with a screwdriver. See
Figure 396.
c. Remove the basic cover. See Figure 396.

Figure 396 MPT-HC/XP external module installation - cover removal

d. Remove the cap. See Figure 397.

464 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual MPT ODU installation

Figure 397 MPT-HC/XP: external module installation - cover removed

e. Withdraw the external module from the box (for RPS; see Figure 398 and
for XPIC+RPS; see Figure 399) and remove the cap.

Figure 398 MPT-HC/XP: RPS module installation - cap removal

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 465


MPT ODU installation Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

Figure 399 MPT-HC/XP: XPIC + RPS module installation - cap removal

Warning: Weatherproofing is guaranteed ONLY when the four screws are properly
secured.

f. Install the module on the MP-HC/XP. The MPT-HC/XP should be placed on


a table or similar structured surface. The four screws must be locked using
a screwdriver. Pay attention to the following aspects of the installation of the
external module to the MPT-HC/XP.
• The correct position of the screws, as shown in Figure 400. The slot of
the screw must be aligned with the indication on the MPT-HC/XP.
• The gasket must be properly inserted in the groove to insure IP67
protection.
• The screws must be secured in the following order; 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 as
shown in Figure 401.

466 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual MPT ODU installation

Figure 400 MPT-HC/XP: correct screw position

Figure 401 MPT-HC/XP: external module installed

g. Install the solar shield taking into account the polarization to be used.

3. How to set polarization on the MPT ODU


Verify MPT ODU polarization with site documentation.

4. Set polarization on what type as follows:


a. If MPT-HC/HC-HQAM with embedded diplexer, go to step 5.
b. If MPT ODU with external diplexer go to step 7.

5. MPT-HC/HC-HQAM with embedded diplexer

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 467


MPT ODU installation Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

Note: The polarization must be changed to match the antenna polarization and the coupler
nose waveguide.

Note: The polarization must be turned to horizontal when assembling the MPT-HC/HC-
HQAM on a 1+1 HSB coupler.

Note: A waterproofing tape is glued on the waveguide of the MPT-HC/HC-HQAM


and it must never be removed.

6. Set the polarization on the MPT-HC/HC-HQAM with internal diplexer, according


to site documentation. See Figure 403.
a. Remove the plastic protection cap from the MPT-HC/HC-HQAM.
b. Change the polarization of the MPT-HC/HC-HQAM, if required (default:
vertical polarization). To rotate the polarization use the Allen wrench.

468 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual MPT ODU installation

Figure 402 Embedded diplexer polarization detail, example showing MPT-HC

7. MPT ODU with external diplexer

Warning: A waterproofing tape is glued on the waveguide of the MPT ODU and it must
never be removed.

8. The MPT ODU with external diplexer has fixed polarization (vertical
polarization). To change the polarization, it is necessary to change the antenna
polarization and to install the MPT ODU 90° rotated. See Figure 403.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 469


MPT ODU installation Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

Figure 403 MPT ODU with external diplexer polarization detail

9. Return to the appropriate procedure to resume installation tasks.


a. For 1+0 MPT ODU installation with integrated antenna, see To install a 1+0
MPT ODU (integrated antenna) - all frequencies.
b. For 1+1 MPT ODU installation with integrated antenna, see To install a 1+1
MPT ODU (integrated antenna) - all frequencies.
c. For 1+1 MPT ODU installation with non integrated antenna, see To install a
1+1 MPT ODU (non integrated antenna) - all frequencies.
d. For 1+1 HSB XPIC with co-channel antenna, see To install a 1+1 HSB XPIC
MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM configuration.
e. For 2x(1+0) XPIC with OMT, see To install a 2x(1+0) XPIC MPT-HC/HC-
HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM configuration using OMT.
f. For 2x(1+0) XPIC with OMT-C, see To install a 2x(1+0) XPIC MPT-HC/HC-
HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM configuration using OMT-C.
g. For 4x(1+0) XPIC with OMT-C, see To install a 4x(1+0) XPIC MPT-HC (11,
18, and 23 GHz) and MPT HC-HQAM (18, and 23 GHz) configuration using
OMT-C.

22.7.4 To set polarization on the RF coupler

1. Set polarization on what type of RF coupler?


a. If RF coupler 6-11 GHz, go to step 2.
b. If RF coupler 11-38 GHz, go to step 5.

470 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual MPT ODU installation

2. RF coupler 6-11 GHz


Two 6-11 GHz RF coupler types are available.
For solution A coupler, go to step 3.
For solution B coupler, go to step 4.

3. RF coupler 6-11 GHz solution A


Verify or set the polarization of the 6-11 GHz RF coupler (solution A).

Warning: A waterproofing tape is glued on the waveguide of the RF Coupler and


it must never be removed.

a. Vertical Polarization to Horizontal Polarization. The point of reference is on


the position V (Vertical Polarization). To change the polarization, perform
the following operations:
1. Unscrew the three screws.
2. Rotate the thin disc to match position H to the point of reference “A”.
3. Tighten the screws.
b. Horizontal Polarization to Vertical Polarization. The point of reference is on
the position H (Horizontal Polarization). To change the polarization, perform
the following operations:
1. Unscrew the three screws.
2. Rotate the thin disc to match position V to the point of reference “A”.
3. Tighten the screws.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 471


MPT ODU installation Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

Figure 404 Coupler polarization change 6-11 GHz (solution A)

4. RF coupler 6-11 GHz solution B


Verify or set the polarization of the 6-11 GHz RF coupler (solution B).

472 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual MPT ODU installation

Figure 405 Coupler polarization change 6-11 GHz (solution B)

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 473


MPT ODU installation Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

Figure 406 Coupler polarization change 6-11 GHz (solution B), continued

Warning: A waterproofing tape is glued on the waveguide of the RF Coupler and


it must never be removed.

5. RF coupler 11-38 GHz


Verify or set the polarization of the 11-38 GHz RF coupler.
The axial adaptation between H polarization to V polarization (and vice versa) is
a mechanical/electrical adjustment. Every mechanical “STEP” is a 30°
adjustment.

474 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual MPT ODU installation

Figure 407 Coupler polarization change (11-38 GHz) - 1st step and 2nd step

6. The final result must be as shown in Figure 410 (example for V polarization): the
engraved polarization symbols (H or V) must coincide with the reference blind
hole.
Change polarization procedure
a. 1st Step = internal 30° rotate

Figure 408 Coupler polarization change (11-38 GHz) - 1st step execution

b. 2nd Step= cover + screws 60°(30°+ 30°) rotate

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 475


MPT ODU installation Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

Figure 409 Coupler polarization change (11-38 GHz) - 2nd step execution

c. The orientation of the antenna nose adapter is side-to-side, or 30° with


respect to the outside disk, which completes the 90° degree change of
polarization.

Figure 410 Coupler polarization change (11-38 GHz) - screw installation

476 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual MPT ODU installation

7. Return to the appropriate procedure to resume installation tasks.


a. For 1+0 MPT ODU installation with integrated antenna, see To install a 1+0
MPT ODU (integrated antenna) - all frequencies.
b. For 1+1 MPT ODU installation with integrated antenna, see To install a 1+1
MPT ODU (integrated antenna) - all frequencies.
c. For 1+1 MPT ODU installation with non integrated antenna, see To install a
1+1 MPT ODU (non integrated antenna) - all frequencies.
d. For 1+1 HSB XPIC with co-channel antenna, see To install a 1+1 HSB XPIC
MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM configuration.
e. For 2x(1+0) XPIC with OMT-C, see To install a 2x(1+0) XPIC MPT-HC/HC-
HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM configuration using OMT-C.

22.7.5 To install an MPT ODU onto antenna, coupler, or


OMT
1. Install the MPT ODU on the antenna, coupler, or pole mount for remote ODU
nose adapter.

Note: Remember to first set the correct polarization on the MPT-HC or coupler prior to
installation on the antenna or coupler.

i. Grasp the MPT ODU/coupler module by the handle.


ii. Open the four locking hooks arranged on the four walls of the MPT ODU
unit.
iii. Secure the MPT ODU module through the four hooks on the relative
brackets. Secure the two side hooks first followed by the top and bottom
hooks or vice-versa. Never secure the hooks in a clock-wise or counter
clock-wise sequence.
For an example of MPT-HC with embedded diplexer integrated antenna mount,
see Figure 411.
For an example of MPT ODU with external diplexer, vertical polarization,
integrated antenna mount, see Figure 412.
For an example of MPT ODU with external diplexer, horizontal polarization,
integrated antenna mount, see Figure 413.
For an example of MPT ODU mounted to Non-Integrated pole mount for remote
ODU, see Figure 414.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 477


MPT ODU installation Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

For an example of 1+1 MPT ODU (6-11 GHz) coupler mounted to an antenna,
see Figure 415.
For an example of MPT ODU mounted to a coupler (11-38 GHz) and antenna
(MPT-HC-HQAM shown), see Figure 416.
For an example of MPT ODU mounted to an OMT-C (11-38 GHz) and antenna,
see Figure 417.
For an example of a (11-38 GHz) coupler mounted to pole mount for remote
ODU, see Figure 418.

Figure 411 MPT-HC 1+0 installation for integrated antenna (embedded diplexer)

Figure 412 MPT ODU 1+0 installation for integrated antenna (external diplexer: vertical)

478 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual MPT ODU installation

Figure 413 MPT ODU 1+0 installation for integrated antenna (external diplexer: horizontal)

Figure 414 MPT ODU 1+0 installation for non-integrated antenna (6-38 GHz with pole mount P/
N 3DB 10137 AA)

Figure 415 Installing the RF coupler to the antenna (6-11 GHz)

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 479


MPT ODU installation Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

Figure 416 MPT ODUs installed on the RF coupler (11-38 GHz)

480 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual MPT ODU installation

Figure 417 MPT ODUs installed on OMT -C (11-38 GHz)

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 481


MPT ODU installation Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

Figure 418 11-38 GHz RF coupler installation (with pole mount P/N 3DB 10137 AA)

2. Flextwist waveguide installation


Installing the “Flextwist” waveguide (non-integrated antenna cases)
For information about the interface between the MPT ODU output flange and the
suggested antenna flange, see Table 40. The standard waveguide to be used
and the suggested flange for the external antenna is provided for each product.
A nose adapter of the relevant frequency must be inserted in the MPT to allow
the fastening of a flextwist; see section 22.3.3.

Table 40 MPT ODU output flanges with external antenna

Range(GHz) Adapter FLEXTWIST Suggested


nose flange antenna
flange

C.E.I. E.I.A.

6 UDR70 R70 WR137 PBR70 UDR70 PDR70

7-8 UBR84 R84 WR112 PBR84 UBR84 PBR84

11 UBR100 R100 WR90 PBR100 UBR100 PBR100

13 UBR120 R120 WR75 PBR120 UBR120 PBR120

15 UBR140 R140 WR62 PBR140 UBR140 PBR140

18-25 UBR220 R220 WR42 PBR220 UBR220 PBR220

482 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual MPT ODU installation

Table 40 MPT ODU output flanges with external antenna (Continued)

Range(GHz) Adapter FLEXTWIST Suggested


nose flange antenna
flange

38 UBR320 R320 WR28 PBR320 UBR320 PBR320

The long twistable flexible waveguide is supplied with gaskets and fasteners. On
one end, there is a smooth square or rectangular flange (antenna connection).
On the other end, there is a grooved square flange designed to accommodate
an O–ring seal (MPT ODU connection).

Table 41 6-38 GHz Flextwist waveguide

FLEXIBLE TWISTABLE WAVEGUIDE KIT

“Onduflex” springy crinkle washers


Stainless steel socket cap screws

Stainless steel socket cap screws

Stainless Z. flat washers


Freq. Band GHz

HM. Hex nuts


Length mm.
Nokia code

Waveguide

Flanges

1AF02951AB WR137 1000 6 PBR70 UDR70 8 8 8 8 8


(M4x25) (M4x12) (B4) (Z4) (HM4)

3CC08010AB WR112 1000 7,05– PBR84 UBR84 8 8 8 8 8


AB 10 (M4x25) (M4x12) (B4) (Z4) (HM4)

1AF02957AB WR90 1000 11 PBR100 UBR10 8 8 8 12 12


0 (M4x20) (M4x12) (B4) (Z4) (HM4)

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 483


MPT ODU installation Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

Table 41 6-38 GHz Flextwist waveguide (Continued)

FLEXIBLE TWISTABLE WAVEGUIDE KIT

3CC05751AC WR75 600 10 – PBR120 UBR12 8 8 8 12 12


AA 15,0 0 (M4x20) (M4x12) (B4) (Z4) (HM4)

3CC05750AC WR62 600 12,4 PBR140 UBR14 8 8 8 8 8


– 18 0 (M4x20) (M4x12) (B4) (Z4) (HM4)

3CC05749AC WR42 600 18 – PBR220 UBR22 8 8 8 8 8


26,5 0 (M3x20) (M3x12) (B3) (Z3) (HM3)

3DB00682AA WR28 600 26,5 - PBR320 UBR32 8 8 8 8 8


40 0 (M3x20) (M3x12) (B3) (Z3) (HM3)

Note: If the FLEX–TWIST is not provided by Nokia, the user must carefully select the type
of waveguide in order to limit the possible galvanic couples between ANTENNA/flex–twist
and flex–twist/MPT ODU contact surfaces that can induce rust. For this purpose please note
that the surfaces are:

•chromium-plated at MPT ODU output flange side


•tin-plated at flex-twist’s flange side

3. MPT ODU system grounding


Each MPT ODU transceiver must be individually grounded.

Note: Neither the RF coupler, nor the antenna(s), integrated or non-integrated, must be
grounded.

The grounding method depends on the type of MPT ODU:


a. For MPT-HC/XP/9558HC use MPT ODU Grounding Kit (P/N
3CC08166AAXX).
This kit has a cable (16mm2) that must be cut on site. One end of the cable
must be connected to the grounding connector on the MPT ODU
transceiver; the other end of the cable must be connected to the nearest
grounding plate.
Figure 419 shows the single-screw grounding connector position.

484 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual MPT ODU installation

Figure 419 MPT HC/XP/9558HC grounding connector position

b. A 16mm2 grounding cable is required, that must be cut on site. One end of
the cable must be connected to the grounding connector on the MPT ODU
transceiver; the other end of the cable must be connected to the nearest
grounding plate.
Figure 420 shows the double-screw grounding connector position.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 485


MPT ODU installation Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

Figure 420 MPT HC-HQAM/XP-HQAM grounding connector position

4. Connect all grounding cables to the nearest grounding plate. See Figure 421.

Figure 421 Grounding plate

5. Cable connections from MPT ODU to MSS

Warning: To ensure continuity and avoid short circuits, all RJ45, Coaxial, Ethernet, Optical
Fiber. cables / connector connections made in the field must be verified and checked with
Cable tester.

All the cables (coax cable, Cat5e cable, fiber cable) must be secured to the tower with the
relevant UV ties raps.

486 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual MPT ODU installation

6. Cable connections to the MPT ODU depend on the system configuration. See
Figure 422 for the MPT ODU cable connections available. Cable connections to
the MPT ODU are as follows:
− RJ45/R2CT Cat5e cable: Electrical Ethernet Data and/or Power
− SFP, LC/Q-XCO: Optical Ethernet Data
− SFP, LC/Q-XCO: 1+1 RPS Interconnect
− Cat7e: XPIC Interconnect

Figure 422 MPT ODU cable connection detail

7. Terminate RJ-45 and R2CT connectors


Terminate and connect RJ45/R2CT connector to MPT ODU.
To terminate the Cat5e cable to the MPT ODU, the Short kit plug R2CT must be
used.
The kit is made up of 10 items as shown in Figure 423 and Figure 424.

Figure 423 Short kit plug R2CT

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 487


MPT ODU installation Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

Figure 424 Short kit plug R2CT itemized

8. Mating sequence instructions


Terminate and connect the electrical Ethernet cable to the MPT ODU as follows:

Note: The boot provided with the RJ-45 connector must not be used together with the
R2CT.

488 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual MPT ODU installation

Figure 425 R2CT mating sequence, steps 1 to 3

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 489


MPT ODU installation Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

Figure 426 R2CT mating sequence, steps 4 to 6

490 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual MPT ODU installation

Figure 427 R2CT mating sequence, steps 7 to 10

Figure 428 R2CT mating sequence, steps 11 to 12

9. Return to the appropriate procedure to resume installation tasks.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 491


MPT ODU installation Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

a. For 1+0 MPT ODU installation with integrated antenna, see To install a 1+0
MPT ODU (integrated antenna) - all frequencies.
b. For 1+1 MPT ODU installation with integrated antenna, see To install a 1+1
MPT ODU (integrated antenna) - all frequencies.
c. For 1+1 MPT ODU installation with non integrated antenna, see To install a
1+1 MPT ODU (non integrated antenna) - all frequencies.
d. For 1+1 HSB XPIC with co-channel antenna, see To install a 1+1 HSB XPIC
MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM configuration.
e. For 2x(1+0) XPIC with OMT, see To install a 2x(1+0) XPIC MPT-HC/HC-
HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM configuration using OMT.
f. For 2x(1+0) XPIC with OMT-C, see To install a 2x(1+0) XPIC MPT-HC/HC-
HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM configuration using OMT-C.
g. For 4x(1+0) XPIC with OMT-C, see To install a 4x(1+0) XPIC MPT-HC (11,
18, and 23 GHz) and MPT HC-HQAM (18, and 23 GHz) configuration using
OMT-C.

22.7.6 To unmate and disconnect the electrical Ethernet


cable from the MPT ODU

1. To unmate and disconnect the electrical Ethernet cable from the MPT ODU,
follow the procedure outlined in Figure 429.

492 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual MPT ODU installation

Figure 429 R2CT unmating sequence, steps 1 to 4

Figure 430 R2CT unmating sequence, steps 5 to 6

22.7.7 To connect optical cable

1. An optical cable must be used, if the PFoE solution has not been implemented.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 493


MPT ODU installation Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

The optical cable is shown in Figure 431. The cable is a pre assembled cable
available in different lengths. See the 9500 MPR Product Information Manual.

Figure 431 LC/Q-XCO to LC fiber cord

2. To pull-up the optical cable take a cord and insert it in the slot of the cable cap.
Make a knot on the cord and pull-up the cable.

22.7.8 To connect power supply cable


To connect power supply cable

1. The power supply cable is electrical Ethernet or coaxial cable, which is used only
if the optical cable is used to transport the Ethernet traffic.

22.7.9 To install the MPT ODU Cable System

1. See Route and terminate cables between MSS and MPT ODU for detailed
instruction to install the MPT ODU cable system.

22.7.10 To connect cable in 1+1 RPS configuration

Note: 1+1 RPS cable is not required for virtual 1+1 RPS configuration.

Virtual 1+1 RPS configuration is not supported for MPT-HC-HQAM/XP-HQAMs with modem
profiles higher than 30 MHz. The 1+1 RPS cable is required. See the 9500 MPR Product
Information Manual.

First the SFP must be inserted in the MPT. The SFP is not included in the MPT.

494 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual MPT ODU installation

1. In cabled 1+1 RPS configuration, the two MPT ODU must be interconnected by
using a pre-assembled jumper, as shown in Figure 432. The jumper is available
in different lengths, as listed in the 9500 MPR Product Information Manual.

2. Install SFPs onto the MPT ODU RPS connector to both MPT ODU 1+1 RPS
Interconnect connectors. SFPs are available in two types, with and without bail
latch.

3. Connect the RPS Q-XCO to Q-XCO to both MPT ODU 1+1 RPS Interconnect
connectors.

Figure 432 RPS Q-XCO to Q-XCO optical jumper

Note: If a physical cable is used to interconnect the two MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM


the “Physical cable” check box in the Protection tab-panel must be checked (see the
9500 MPR WebEML User Manual).

4. Return to the appropriate procedure to resume installation tasks.


a. For 1+1 MPT ODU installation with integrated antenna, see To install a 1+1
MPT ODU (integrated antenna) - all frequencies.
b. For 1+1 MPT ODU installation with non integrated antenna, see To install a
1+1 MPT ODU (non integrated antenna) - all frequencies.
c. For 1+1 HSB XPIC with co-channel antenna, see To install a 1+1 HSB XPIC
MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM configuration.

22.7.11 To connect cable in XPIC configuration

1. For the XPIC configuration, the horizontal and vertical MPT ODUs must be
interconnected by using a pre-assembled Cat7 cable. The jumper is available in
different lengths, as listed in the 9500 MPR Product Information Manual.
Figure 433 and Figure 434 show the connector positions for the XPIC cable.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 495


MPT ODU installation Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

Figure 435 and Figure 436 show the XPIC cable connection to MPTs.

Figure 433 XPIC connector position (with external XPIC module on MPT-HC/XP)

Figure 434 XPIC connector position (with embedded XPIC on MPT-HC-HQAM/XP-HQAM)

496 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual MPT ODU installation

Figure 435 XPIC cable placement for MPT-HC/XP

Figure 436 XPIC cable placement for MPT-HC-HQAMs for 11 to 23 GHz

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 497


MPT ODU installation Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

2. Figure 437 and Figure 438 show XPIC connection with 1 m cable
(3CC52186AAAAor 3CC52186CAAA).

Figure 437 XPIC cable interconnection on MPT-HC/XP and MPT-HC-HQAM/XP-HQAM for 6 up


to 11GHz

498 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual MPT ODU installation

Figure 438 XPIC cable interconnection on MPT-HC/XP and MPT-HC-HQAM/XP-HQAM in case of


OMT-C for 6 up to 23GHz

Before connecting the cable to the to the XPIC ports on the ODUs, pass the
cable between the lower ODU and the OMT or OMT-C body, passing it around
the nose connection. This prevents the cable from being moved by wind.
Avoid bending the cable over its minimum bending radius (35 mm).

3. Return to the appropriate procedure to resume installation tasks.


a. For 1+1 HSB XPIC with co-channel antenna, see To install a 1+1 HSB XPIC
MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM configuration.
b. For 2x(1+0) XPIC with OMT, see To install a 2x(1+0) XPIC MPT-HC/HC-
HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM configuration using OMT.
c. For 2x(1+0) XPIC with OMT-C, see To install a 2x(1+0) XPIC MPT-HC/HC-
HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM configuration using OMT-C.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 499


MPT ODU installation Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

d. For 4x(1+0) XPIC with OMT-C coupler, see To install a 4x(1+0) XPIC
MPT-HC (11, 18, and 23 GHz) and MPT HC-HQAM (18, and 23 GHz)
configuration using OMT-C.

22.7.12 Notes about antenna alignment

Note: Ensure antennas are aligned on the main beam, and not a side lobe. For more
information, see Antenna alignment, Locating the main beam and Tracking path error.
Ensure that the ATPC is turned off during the alignment procedure.

1. Align the antenna at the local End. For more information to align the antenna,
see Antenna alignment.

2. Align the antenna at the Far End of the link. For more information to align the
antenna, see Antenna alignment.

3. Compare actual RSLs to the expected RSLs from the link installation data sheet.
Repeat steps 1 and 2 until the actual RSLs are within tolerance of the expected
RSLs and both antennas are aligned to the main beam.

4. Return to the appropriate procedure to resume installation tasks.


a. For 1+0 MPT ODU installation with integrated antenna, see To install a 1+0
MPT ODU (integrated antenna) - all frequencies.
b. For 1+1 MPT ODU installation with integrated antenna, see To install a 1+1
MPT ODU (integrated antenna) - all frequencies.
c. For 1+1 MPT ODU installation with non integrated antenna, see To install a
1+1 MPT ODU (non integrated antenna) - all frequencies.
d. For 1+1 HSB XPIC with co-channel antenna, see To install a 1+1 HSB XPIC
MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM configuration.
e. For 2x(1+0) XPIC with OMT-C, see To install a 2x(1+0) XPIC MPT-HC/HC-
HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM configuration using OMT-C.
f. For 4x(1+0) XPIC with OMT-C coupler, see To install a 4x(1+0) XPIC
MPT-HC (11, 18, and 23 GHz) and MPT HC-HQAM (18, and 23 GHz)
configuration using OMT-C.

500 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual MPT ODU installation

22.7.13 To perform fine tuning for polarization alignment


with OMT-C

1. The fixation screws between OMT-C and antenna interface must be tightened
once the OMT-C body is in precise vertical position with respect to the ground
(use a spirit level for the purpose). Then, the sequence in Notes about antenna
alignment must be performed. It consists of finding the best antenna position to
maximize the homo-polar received signal, acting on the pole mount tuning
screws. See also Antenna alignment.
After the antenna alignment procedure is completed, you need to apply the fine
tuning procedure to one of the facing antennas to align the polarizations. Use
the receiver on the polarization opposite to the transmitter one on the facing
antenna.

2. Switch on the cross-polar receiver.

3. Slightly loosen the fixation screws between OMT-C and antenna interface.

4. Monitor the received cross polar signal and act on the fine tuning mechanism of
the OMT-C till the received power reaches its minimum (power XP 30dB below
the homopolar received signal).

5. Tighten the OMT-C fixing screws; see Figure 439. If you have installed an L6
OMT-C, tighten the sway bar blocking screws, see Figure 379.

Figure 439 OMT-C fixing screws

6. Return to the appropriate procedure to resume installation tasks.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 501


MPT ODU installation Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

a. For 2x(1+0) XPIC with OMT-C, see To install a 2x(1+0) XPIC MPT-HC/HC-
HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM configuration using OMT-C.
b. For 4x(1+0) XPIC with OMT-C, see To install a 4x(1+0) XPIC MPT-HC (11,
18, and 23 GHz) and MPT HC-HQAM (18, and 23 GHz) configuration using
OMT-C.

502 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Route and terminate cables between MSS and
MPT ODU

23 Route and terminate cables between MSS


and MPT ODU

23.1 Purpose
This chapter describes:

• options to interconnect an MSS shelf to an MPT ODU(MPT ODU).


• Ethernet port configuration options and the interconnection(s) required to
support them

The chapter also provides a list of materials and procedures to route and connect a
MPT ODU to:

• MPT Access, EAS, and Core cards on the MSS-1, MSS-O, and MSS-4/MSS-8
shelves
• external site power sources, such as the Power Injector Card, Power Injector
Box, MPT Power Unit, MPT Extended Power Unit, and direct connection to site
power

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 503


Route and terminate cables between MSS and Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual
MPT ODU

23.2 General

Note: This chapter is only required for applications which include MPT ODU installation and
is referred to in MPT ODU installation at the appropriate point during MPT ODU installation.

Unless otherwise stated in this chapter, EAS implies both P8ETH and EASv2. When a
section is applicable only to P8ETH or EASv2, these terms will be used.

Unless otherwise stated in this chapter, Core implies both Core-E and CorEvo. When a
section is applicable only to Core-E or CorEvo, these terms will be used.

The MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/9558HC operates on -48 VDC (-28 to -58 VDC) input


power.

The MPT-XP/XP-HQAM operates on -48 VDC (-41 to -57.6 VDC) input power.

See MPT ODU installation for detailed instructions on how to terminate the Cat5e
cable and R2CT connectors.

Nokia provides expert Installation Services for installations that have different
requirements from the recommended configuration as outlined in this manual.
Contact Nokia for more information.

23.2.1 Radio port options


The MPT ODUs can be connected to the following MSS shelf/card types:

• MSS-4/MSS-8 shelf
− MPT Access card
The MPT Access card supports up to two MPT ODU radio ports. It provides
two electrical Ethernet ports supporting the PFoE solution, plus two optical
Ethernet ports and two QMA power connectors
− Core card
The Core card provides four electrical Ethernet ports which support up to
four MPT ODU radios, and two optical Ethernet ports which support up to
two MPT ODU radios. On a Core-E card the two optical ports that can
support MPTs are ports 5 and 6. On a CorEvo card, MPTs are supported on
optical ports 7 and 8. All Core radio ports require an external power source.
− P8ETH card

504 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Route and terminate cables between MSS and
MPT ODU

The P8ETH card provides four optical Ethernet ports which support up to
four MPT ODU radios. All P8ETH radio ports require an external power
source.
− EASv2 card
The EASv2 card provides four electrical Ethernet ports supporting the PFoE
solution, plus four optical Ethernet ports which support up to four MPT ODU
radios. All optical Ethernet radio ports require an external power source.
• MSS-1 shelf

Warning: Possibility of equipment damage. MSS1/MSS-O output connectors for supplying


power to MPT family ODU units (port 1 and 2) are NOT to be considered as ordinary Power
Over Ethernet connectors as they can supply up to 2 A. For this reason only the dedicated
cable (ALU code 1AC016760006) can be connected to these ports. WARNING DO NOT
CONNECT ORDINARY POE CABLES TO THESE PORTS.

Note: The above Warning applies to MPT radio applications where the Ethernet port
provides power to an MPT ODU unit. In these applications the 1AC016760006 cable MUST
be used.

In applications where the port does NOT provide power to the MPT ODU, such
as when an external power device is used to provide power to an MPT ODU or
when the Ethernet port is used strictly for data traffic, an appropriate Ethernet
cable may be used.
The MSS-1 shelf provides four electrical Ethernet ports which support up to four
MPT ODU radios. MSS-1 shelf ports 1 and 2 support the PFoE solution. MSS-1
shelf radio ports 3 and 4 require an external power source. MSS-1 shelf also
provides two optical Ethernet ports which support up to two MPT ODU radios.All
MSS-1 shelf optical radio ports require an external power source.
• MSS-O
The MSS-O provides two electrical Ethernet ports supporting the PFoE solution,
one electrical Ethernet port without PFoE support, and one optical Ethernet port.
The electrical ports support up to three MPT-HC or MPT-HC-HQAM/XP-HQAM
radios.

23.2.2 Cable system options


For all MPT ODU applications connected to the Core-E card ports 1 to 6, CorEvo
ports 1 to 4 and 7 and 8, EAS card ports 5 to 8, MSS-1 shelf Ethernet ports 3 to 6, or
MSS-O port 3 require power from one of the following external sources:

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 505


Route and terminate cables between MSS and Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual
MPT ODU

• Power Injector Box


When the MPT-HC/MC/HC-HQAM/9558HC ODU is connected using an
electrical Ethernet port without PFoE support, the Power Injector Box can be
used to provide a PFoE interconnection for up to two radios.
When the MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/9558HC ODU is connected using an optical
Ethernet port, the Power Injector Box can be used to provide site power. In
applications where the cable run length is 100 m or less, Fiber with Cat5e site
power interconnection can be used. In application where the cable run length is
greater than 100 m and up to 300 m, Fiber with LMR-400 site power
interconnection must be used.
• Power Injector Card
When the MPT-HC/MC/HC-HQAM/9558HC ODU is connected using an
electrical Ethernet port without PFoE support, and a MSS-4/8 shelf slot is
available, the Power Injector Card can be used to provide a PFoE
interconnection for up to two radios.
When the MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/9558HC ODU is connected using an optical
Ethernet port, the Power Injector Card can be used to provide site power. In
applications where the cable run length is 100 m or less, Fiber with Cat5e site
power interconnection can be used. In application where the cable run length is
greater than 100 m and up to 300 m, Fiber with LMR-400 site power
interconnection must be used.
• MPT Power Unit
When the MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/9558HC ODU is connected using an optical
Ethernet port, the MPT Power Unit provides site power for up to four MPT-HC/
HC-HQAM/9558HC ODU radios. The MPT Power Unit supports applications
with cable run lengths is up to 300 m. Fiber with LMR-400 site power
interconnection must be used. See the 9500 MPR Product Information Manual
for maximum allowed cable lengths for MPT Power Unit.
• MPT Extended Power Unit
When the MPT ODU is connected to an electrical Ethernet port without PFoE
support, the MPT Extended Power Unit can be used to provide a PFoE
interconnection to provide data and site power for up to two MPT ODU radios.
When the MPT ODU is connected to an optical Ethernet port, the MPT Extended
Power Unit can be used to provide site power for up to two MPT ODU radios. In
applications where the cable run length is 40 m or less, Fiber with Cat5e site
power interconnection can be used. In application where the cable run length is
greater than 40 m and up to 300 m, Fiber with LMR-400 site power
interconnection must be used.
The 9500 MPR Product Information Manual provides the maximum cable
lengths for use with the MPT Extended Power Unit. Use of an external lightning
arrestor reduces the cable length by 10 m.
• Direct connection to site power

506 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Route and terminate cables between MSS and
MPT ODU

When the MPT ODU is connected using an optical Ethernet port, a direct
connection to site power is an option to provide power to the MPT ODU radios,
except MPT-XP and MPT-XP-HQAM. Direct connection to site power consists
of a wall mount bracket, lightning arrestor, low pass filter (optional), and a Type
N to two wire adapter to connect to -48 V dc site power. Direct connection to site
power supports applications with cable run length up to 300 m. Fiber with
LMR-400 site power interconnection must be used.

For MPT-XP applications, the MPT-XP must be powered by the MPT Extended
Power Unit, or a step-up must be used to increase voltage and ensure that the
current is not too high. An MPT-XP-HQAM can also be powered by an MSS-O.

For cable lengths exceeding 40 m, the MPT Extended Power Unit is used only for
powering. Data is on fiber.

See the 9500 MPR Product Information Manual for information about maximum
cable lengths.

23.2.2.1 PFoE interconnection

Warning: Possibility of equipment damage. MSS1/MSS-O output connectors for supplying


power to MPT family ODU units (port 1 and 2) are NOT to be considered as ordinary Power
Over Ethernet connectors as they can supply up to 2 A. For this reason only the dedicated
cable (ALU code 1AC016760006) can be connected to these ports. WARNING DO NOT
CONNECT ORDINARY POE CABLES TO THESE PORTS.

Note: The above Warning applies to MPT radio applications where the Ethernet port
provides power to an MPT ODU unit. In these applications the 1AC016760006 cable MUST
be used.

In applications where the port does NOT provide power to the MPT ODU, such as
when an external power device is used to provide power to an MPT ODU or when
the Ethernet port is used strictly for data traffic, an appropriate Ethernet cable may
be used.

For MPT ODUs interfaced using a PFoE solution, a single Cat5e cable run and RJ45
connectors are used to support both data and site power interconnection between
the MSS PFoE port or an external power source PFoE port and the MPT ODU.

On the MPT side, the cable must be terminated with RJ45 and R2CT connectors. In
the case of MSS-O outdoor, the other end of the cable must be terminated with RJ45
and RFE connectors.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 507


Route and terminate cables between MSS and Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual
MPT ODU

23.2.2.2 Fiber with Cat5e site power interconnection

For MPT ODU applications using an optical Ethernet port and the cable run length is
100 m or less, a fiber optic cable is used to support the data interconnection between
the optical Ethernet port and the MPT ODU. Site power interconnection is provided
using Cat5e cable between the external power source and MPT ODU. RJ45
connectors interface the Cat5e cable to the site power source. The Cat5e cable is
routed to the MPT ODU where it is terminated with RJ45 and R2CT connectors and
connected to the MPT ODU.

23.2.2.3 Fiber with LMR-400 site power interconnection

For MPT ODU applications using an optical Ethernet port and the cable run length is
up to 300 m, a fiber optic cable is used to support the data interconnection between
the optical Ethernet port and the MPT ODU. Site power interconnection is provided
using LMR-400 cable between the MPT Access card or external power source and
MPT ODU. Type N connectors interface LMR-400 coaxial cable to the site power
source. The Coaxial cable is routed to the MPT ODU where a “Type N to free wire
adapter” is then terminated with a RJ-45 and R2CT connectors and connected to the
MPT ODU.

23.3 Recommended materials


See the 9500 MPR Product Information Manual for part numbers.

23.3.1 Cable system configuration


PFoE Interconnection: MPT ODU to Building entry or MSS-O Cat5E surge
suppressor

• Cat5e Cable, Outdoor rated:


− Cat5e Cable, Outdoor rated, or
− MPT ODU Cat5E, Outdoor rated, Cable Assemblies, length site specific
(Cable assembly has RJ-45 connectors on both ends and includes R2CT to
terminate at the MPT ODU
• MPT ODU cable assembly, 25m
• MPT ODU cable assembly, 50m

508 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Route and terminate cables between MSS and
MPT ODU

• MPT ODU cable assembly, 75m


• MPT ODU cable assembly, 100m
• Cat5e Cable ground kit
• UV rated tie wraps (GR-487/950 or equivalent)

PFoE Interconnection: Building Entry or MSS-O Cat5E surge suppressor to


MSS or Power Source

• Cat5e Cable, Outdoor rated, Qty Site specific

Fiber with Cat5e site power cable Interconnection

• LC-LC fiber optic cable assemblies, Qty 1


• 1000Base-Sx SFP, Qty 2
• Cat5e Cable, Outdoor rated, Qty Site specific
• Cat5e Cable ground kit, Qty Site specific
• UV rated tie wraps (GR-487/950 or equivalent)

Fiber with LMR-400 site power cable Interconnection

• LC-LC fiber optic cable assemblies, Qty 1


• 1000Base-Sx SFP, Qty 2
• Times Microwave Systems LMR-400 cable, Qty Site specific
• LMR-400 Cable grounds, Qty Site specific
• UV rated tie wraps (GR-487/950 or equivalent)

23.3.2 MPT ODU connections

23.3.2.1 PFoE Interconnection

Note: These items are required when building MPT ODU cable assembly using raw Cat5E
cable. If using MPT ODU cable assembly, these items are included with the cable assembly.

• RJ45 connector, outdoor rated, Qty 1


• R2CT connector, Qty 1

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 509


Route and terminate cables between MSS and Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual
MPT ODU

23.3.2.2 Fiber with Cat5e power cable

• RJ45 connector, outdoor rated, Qty 1


• R2CT connector, Qty 1

23.3.2.3 Fiber with LMR-400 power cable

• Type N Male Connectors, Qty 1


• Adapter Cable, Type N to free wire, 1 m, Qty 1
• RJ45 connector, outdoor rated, Qty 1
• R2CT connector, Qty 1

23.3.2.4 Components for Telecordia GR-1089 lightning compliance


(optional)

23.3.2.4.1 Components required with Cat5e cable

The following components are required in applications using Cat5e cable where
compliance to Telecordia GR-1089 lightning requirements is mandated.

• Cat5e Surge Suppressor kit, Qty 1


• RJ45 connector, outdoor rated, Qty 2

23.3.2.4.2 Components required with LMR-400 power cable

The following components are required in applications with LMR-400 power cable
where compliance to Telecordia GR-1089 lightning requirements is mandated.

• Lightning Arrestor W/Ground Cable, Qty 1


• Type N Male Connectors, Qty 1
• Type N Female Connectors, Qty 1

510 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Route and terminate cables between MSS and
MPT ODU

23.3.3 Building Entry or MSS-O


The following can be installed at the building entry or MSS-O:

• PFoE Interconnection
• Fiber with Cat5e power cable
• Fiber with Cat5e power cable
• Fiber with LMR-400 power cable

23.3.3.1 PFoE Interconnection

• Cat5e Surge Suppressor kit, Qty 1


• RJ45 connector, outdoor rated, Qty 2

Note: When using MPT ODU cable assembly 3CC52199AA/AD change quantity of RJ-45
connector from 2 to 1.

23.3.3.2 Fiber with Cat5e power cable

• Cat5e Surge Suppressor kit, Qty 1


• RJ45 connector, outdoor rated, Qty 2

23.3.3.3 Fiber with LMR-400 power cable

• Wall Mount Support bracket, Qty Site specific


• Lightning Arrestor W/Ground Cable, Qty 1
• Type N Male Connectors, Qty 1
• Type N Female Connectors, Qty 1

23.3.4 MSS-O/1/4/8
Table 42 describes the components required for connection to an MSS.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 511


Route and terminate cables between MSS and Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual
MPT ODU

Table 42 Components required for MPT ODU connection to MSS

MPT ODU installation Components required

MPT-HC/HC-HQAM connected to • RJ45 connector, outdoor rated, Qty 1


MSS-4/8 MPT Access PFoE port 1 or 2,
EASv2 port 1 to 4, MSS-1 MSS/CORE
port 1 or 2, or MSS-O port 1 or 2, cable
length up to 100 m

MPT-HC/HC-HQAM connected to • Type N Male Connectors, Qty 1


MSS-4/8 MPT Access optical port 3 or • Adapter Cable, Type N to QMA, Qty 1 (ANSI market
4, cable length up to 300 m only)

MPT-HC/HC-HQAM connected to • RJ45 connector, outdoor rated, Qty 1


MSS-4/8 Core-E port 1 to 4, MSS-1 • External power source, select one of the following:
MSS/CORE port 3 or 4, or MSS-O port − Power Injector Card
3, cable length up to 100 m
− Power Injector Box
− MPT Extended Power Unit
• External power source to MSS interconnect, select one
of the following:
− Cat5e indoor rated cable assemblies with RJ-45
connectors on both ends
− For custom built cable assemblies: Cat5e cable,
Qty 2, and RJ-45 connector (outdoor rated)
− For custom built cable assemblies: Cat5e cable and
RJ-45 connector, Qty 2 (indoor rated)

MPT-HC/HC-HQAM connected to • RJ45 connector, outdoor rated, Qty 1


MSS-4/8 Core-E port 5 or 6, EAS port 5 • External power source, select one of the following:
to 8, and MSS-1 MSS/CORE port 5 or 6, − Power Injector Card
cable length up to 100 m
− Power Injector Box
− MPT Power Unit
− MPT Extended Power Unit

MPT-HC/HC-HQAM connected to • Type N Male Connectors, Qty 1


MSS-4/8 Core-E port 5 or 6, EAS port 5 • External power source, select one of the following:
to 8, MSS-1 MSS/CORE port 5 or 6, or − Power Injector Card
MSS-O port 3, cable length up to 300 m
− Power Injector Box
− MPT Extended Power Unit
• For connection to MPT Power Unit or MPT Extended
Power Unit
− N Type Male Connectors, Qty 1
• For connection to DC Injector Box or DC Injector Card
− Type N Male Connectors, Qty 1
− Type N to RJ45 connector, Qty 1

512 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Route and terminate cables between MSS and
MPT ODU

Table 42 Components required for MPT ODU connection to MSS (Continued)

MPT ODU installation Components required

MPT-XP/XP-HQAM connected to MPT • RJ45 connector, outdoor rated, Qty 1


Access ports 1 and 2, Core-E ports 1 to • MPT Extended Power Unit
4, EASv2 ports 1 to 4, MSS-1 unit ports • External power source to MSS interconnect, select one
1 through 4, cable length up to 40 m of the following:
For MSS-O: − Cat5e indoor rated cable assemblies with RJ-45
• if one MPT-XP/MPT-XP-HQAM connectors on both ends
then cable length ≤ 100 m − For custom built cable assemblies: Cat5e cable and
• if two MPT-XP/MPT-XP-HQAM RJ-45 connector (outdoor rated):
then cable length ≤ 70 m • Cat5e Cable, Outdoor rated, Qty Site specific
• RJ45 connector, outdoor rated, Qty 2
− For custom built cable assemblies: Cat5e cable and
RJ-45 connector (indoor rated):
• Cat5e Cable, Indoor rated, Qty Site specific:
(1AC016760003 is not approved for PFoE
interconnect! Only use for connecting Ethernet
port to external power supply!)
• RJ-45 Cat5e connector kit, indoor rated, Qty 2

MPT-XP/XP-HQAM connected to MPT • N Type Male Connectors, Qty 1


Access, Core-E, EAS, or MSS-1 • MPT Extended Power Unit
through optical ports, cable length up to
300 m

MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/9558HC • Wall Mount Support bracket (supports up to 4 MPT-HC/


connected to Core-E, EAS, MSS-1, or HC-HQAM/9558HC Transceivers)
MSS-O shelf using direct connection to • Lightning Arrestor W/Ground Cable, Qty 1
office power, Cable length up to 300 m • Type N BNC to 2-Wire Adapter, Qty 1
• N Type Male Connectors, Qty 1
• N Type Female Connectors, Qty 1

23.3.5 Cable assemblies


See the 9500 MPR Product Information Manual for part numbers.

23.4 Recommended tools


• Standard field tool kit

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 513


Route and terminate cables between MSS and Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual
MPT ODU

• PPC compression tool kit


• Hirose crimping tool (RJ-45)

23.5 Prerequisite
Complete MSS-1/4/8 shelf installation, Power Injector Card, Power Injector Box,
MPT Power Unit, MPT Extended Power Unit, and source for direct connection to site
power as applicable per site documentation. Reference:

• MSS-1 shelf installation


• MSS-4/8 and MPT-HL/HLC shelf installation
• Power interfaces installation

Complete MPT ODU physical installation portion of MPT ODU installation.

Complete MSS-O installation, if applicable.

All power must be turned OFF.

23.6 Procedure
This section provides procedures for the following:

Note: To verify continuity and avoid short circuit, all cable/connector connections made in
the field must be verified with a Cable tester.

• MPT Access, EASv2, MSS-1, or MSS-O shelf electrical (PFoE) Ethernet ports 1
or 2 to MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/ 9558HC installation
• MPT access card optical Ethernet ports 3 or 4 to MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/9558HC
installation
• Core-E or MSS-1 unit port 3 or 4 or MSS-O port 3 electrical Ethernet port to
MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/9558HC installation
• Core-E, EAS, or MSS-1 unit optical Ethernet port to MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/
9558HC installation
• MPT Access, Core-E, EASv2, MSS-1, or MSS-O shelf electrical Ethernet port to
MPT-XP/XP-HQAM installation

514 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Route and terminate cables between MSS and
MPT ODU

• MPT Access, Core-E, EAS, or MSS-1 shelf optical Ethernet port to MPT-XP/XP-
HQAM installation
• Electrical data connection to MSS-O
• Optical data connection to MSS-O
• Direct connection of site power to MPT ODU installation

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 515


Route and terminate cables between MSS and Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual
MPT ODU

23.6.1 MPT Access, EASv2, MSS-1, or MSS-O shelf


electrical (PFoE) Ethernet ports 1 or 2 to MPT-HC/
HC-HQAM/ 9558HC installation

1. Route outdoor rated Cat5e cable from MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/9558HC to Cat5e


surge suppressor, and then to MPT Access or EASv2 card or MSS-1 unit port 1
or 2. Refer to MPT Ethernet/power cable system installation and Lightning surge
suppressor installation (ANSI market) for general guidelines to install cable from
MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/9558HC to MPT Access card or MSS-1 unit.
i. MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/9558HC end:
Terminate Cat5e cable with RJ45 and R2CT connector.
ii. Connect RJ45/R2CT connector to MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/9558HC DC+Data
connector.
iii. (optional) Install lightning surge suppressor at the MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/
9558HC end for GR-1089 lightning compliance. Refer to Lightning surge
suppressor installation (ANSI market) for detailed instruction to install surge
suppressor.
iv. Building entry:
(Optional) Install surge suppressor at the building entry. Refer to Lightning
surge suppressor installation (ANSI market) for detailed instruction to install
surge suppressor.
v. Route and terminate the yellow/green ground wire to station ground
according to site documentation.
vi. Terminate MPT facing end of the Cat5e cable with RJ45.
vii. Connect RJ45 connector to surge suppressor.
viii. Terminate MSS facing end of the Cat5e cable with RJ45.
ix. Connect RJ45 connector to surge suppressor.
x. MSS-1/4/8 end:
Terminate Cat5e cable with RJ45.
xi. Connect RJ45 to MPT Access, EASv2 or MSS-1 unit port 1 or 2 DC+Data
connector.

2. Install Cat5e cable system grounds. For detailed instructions on cable system
grounds, refer to MPT ODU electrical Ethernet and power cable system
grounding.

516 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Route and terminate cables between MSS and
MPT ODU

3. Weatherproof Ethernet cable system ground connection and surge


suppressors. For detailed instructions on weatherproofing, refer to
Weatherproofing outside cable connections.

23.6.2 MPT access card optical Ethernet ports 3 or 4 to


MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/9558HC installation

1. Route LC-LC fiber optic cable from MPT Access card port 3 or 4 to MPT-HC/HC-
HQAM/9558HC. Refer to MPT Ethernet/power cable system installation for
general guidelines to install MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/9558HC LC-LC fiber optic
cable.

2. Install SFP into MPT ODU and connect LC connector.

3. Install SFP into MPT Access card port 3 or 4 and connect LC connector.

4. Route LMR-400 from MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/9558HC to LMR-400 surge


suppressor, and then to MPT Access card QMA connector 1 or 2. Refer to MPT
Ethernet/power cable system installation for general guidelines to install
MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/9558HC power cable.
a. MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/9558HC end:
Terminate LMR-400 coaxial cable with Type N male connector.
b. Terminate free wire adapter with RJ45 and R2CT connector.
c. Connect Type N to free wire Adapter to the LMR-400 cable Type N
connector or when required to the surge suppressor and also connect the
free wire adapter to the surge suppressor.
Or
(optional) Install lightning surge suppressor at the MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/
9558HC end for GR-1089 lightning compliance. Refer to Lightning surge
suppressor installation (ANSI market) for detailed instruction to install surge
suppressor.
d. Weatherproof the Type N coaxial connection. For detailed instructions on
weatherproofing, refer to Weatherproofing outside cable connections.
e. Connect RJ45/R2CT connector to MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/9558HC DC +Data
connector.
f. Building entry:

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 517


Route and terminate cables between MSS and Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual
MPT ODU

Install surge suppressor onto Wall Mount Support bracket at the building
entry. Refer to Lightning surge suppressor installation (ANSI market) for
detailed instruction to install surge suppressor.
g. Route and terminate the yellow/green ground wire to station ground
according to site documentation.
h. Terminate MPT facing end of the LMR-400 cable with Type N male
connector.
i. Connect Type N connector to surge suppressor.
j. Terminate MSS facing end of the LMR-400 cable with Type N female
connector.
k. Connect Type N connector to surge suppressor.
l. MPT Access card:
Terminate LMR-400 coaxial cable with Type N male connector.
m. Connect to Type N to QMA adapter cable.
n. Connect QMA connector to MPT Access QMA DC connector 1 or 2.

5. Install power cable system grounds. For detailed instructions on cable system
grounds, refer to MPT ODU electrical Ethernet and power cable system
grounding.

6. Weatherproof power cable system ground connection and surge suppressor.


For detailed instructions on weatherproofing, refer to Weatherproofing outside
cable connections.

23.6.3 Core-E or MSS-1 unit port 3 or 4 or MSS-O port 3


electrical Ethernet port to MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/
9558HC installation

1. Route outdoor rated Cat5e cable from MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/9558HC to Cat5e


surge suppressor, and then to Power Injector Box/Card or MPT Extended Power
Unit. Refer to MPT Ethernet/power cable system installation for general
guidelines to install cable to the MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/9558HC.
i. MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/9558HC end:
Terminate Cat5e cable with RJ45 and R2CT connector.
ii. Connect RJ45/R2CT connector to MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/9558HC DC+Data
connector

518 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Route and terminate cables between MSS and
MPT ODU

iii. (optional) Install lightning surge suppressor at the MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/


9558HC end for GR-1089 lightning compliance. Refer to Lightning surge
suppressor installation (ANSI market) for detailed instruction to install surge
suppressor.
iv. Building entry:
Install surge suppressor at the building entry. Refer to Lightning surge
suppressor installation (ANSI market) for detailed instruction to install surge
suppressor.
v. Route and terminate the yellow/green ground wire to station ground
according to site documentation.
vi. Terminate MPT facing end of the Cat5e cable with RJ45.
vii. Connect RJ45 connector to surge suppressor.
viii. Terminate MSS facing end of the Cat5e cable with RJ45.
ix. Connect RJ45 connector to surge suppressor.
x. Power Injector Box/Card or MPT Extended Power Unit end:
Terminate Cat5e cable with RJ45.
xi. Connect RJ45 to Power Injector Box/Card or MPT Extended Power Unit
DC+Data connector.

2. Install Cat5e cable system grounds. For detailed instructions on cable system
grounds, refer to MPT ODU electrical Ethernet and power cable system
grounding.

3. Weatherproof Ethernet cable system ground connection and surge suppressor.


For detailed instructions on weatherproofing, refer to Weatherproofing outside
cable connections.

4. Route indoor rated Cat5e cable or cable assembly from Power Injector Box/Card
or MPT Extended Power Unit to Core-E port 1 to 4 or MSS-1 unit port 3 or 4
electrical Ethernet port.
i. Power Injector Box/Card or MPT Extended Power Unit end:
If custom cable installation, terminate Cat5e cable with RJ45 connector.
ii. Connect RJ45 connector to Power Injector Box/Card or MPT Extended
Power Unit data connector.
iii. Core-E port 1 to 4 or MSS-1 unit port 3 or 4 end:
If custom cable installation, terminate Cat5e cable with RJ45.
iv. Connect RJ45 to Core-E electrical Ethernet port 1 to 4 or MSS-1 unit port 3
or 4.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 519


Route and terminate cables between MSS and Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual
MPT ODU

23.6.4 Core-E, EAS, or MSS-1 unit optical Ethernet port to


MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/9558HC installation

1. Route LC-LC fiber optic cable from Core-E, EAS, or MSS-1 shelf optical port to
MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/9558HC. Refer to MPT Ethernet/power cable system
installation for general guidelines to install MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/9558HC power
cable.

2. Install SFP onto the MPT ODU. SFPs are available in two types, with and without
bail latch. Connect LC/Q-XCO connector on the MPT ODU.

3. Install SFP into Core-E, EAS, or MSS-1 shelf optical port and connect LC
connector.

4. What is the length of the cable run?


a. If 100 m or less, go to step 5.
b. If greater than 100 m and up to 300 m, go to step 8.

5. Route outdoor rated Cat5e cable from MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/9558HC to Cat5e


surge suppressor, and then to Power Injector Box/Card or MPT Extended Power
Unit. Refer to MPT Ethernet/power cable system installation for general
guidelines to install cable to the MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/9558HC.
i. MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/9558HC end:
Terminate Cat5e cable with RJ45 and R2CT connector.
ii. Connect RJ45/R2CT connector to MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/9558HC DC+Data
connector.
iii. (optional) Install lightning surge suppressor at the MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/
9558HC end for GR-1089 lightning compliance. Refer to Lightning surge
suppressor installation (ANSI market) for detailed instruction to install surge
suppressor.
iv. Building entry:
Install surge suppressor at the building entry. Refer to Lightning surge
suppressor installation (ANSI market) for detailed instruction to install surge
suppressor.
v. Route and terminate the yellow/green ground wire to station ground
according to site documentation.
vi. Terminate MPT facing end of the Cat5e cable with RJ45.
vii. Connect RJ45 connector to surge suppressor.

520 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Route and terminate cables between MSS and
MPT ODU

viii. Terminate Power Injector Box/Card or MPT Extended Power Unit facing
end of the Cat5e cable with RJ45.
ix. Connect RJ45 connector to surge suppressor.
x. Power Injector Box/Card or MPT Extended Power Unit end:
Terminate Cat5e cable with RJ45.
xi. Connect RJ45 to Power Injector Box/Card or MPT Extended Power Unit
DC+Data connector.

6. Install Cat5e cable system grounds. For detailed instructions on cable system
grounds, refer to MPT ODU electrical Ethernet and power cable system
grounding.

7. Weatherproof Ethernet cable system ground connection and surge suppressor.


For detailed instructions on weatherproofing, refer to Weatherproofing outside
cable connections.

8. Route LMR-400 from MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/9558HC to LMR-400 surge


suppressor, and then to Power Injector Box/Card, MPT Power Unit, or MPT
Extended Power Unit. Refer to MPT Ethernet/power cable system installation for
general guidelines to install MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/9558HC power cable.
i. MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/9558HC end:
Terminate LMR-400 coaxial cable with Type N male connector.
ii. Terminate free wire adapter with RJ45 connector and R2CT connector.
iii. Connect Type N to free wire Adapter to the LMR-400 cable Type N male
connector.
Or
(optional) Install lightning surge suppressor at the MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/
9558HC end for GR-1089 lightning compliance. Refer to Lightning surge
suppressor installation (ANSI market) for detailed instruction to install surge
suppressor.
iv. Weatherproof the coaxial connection. For detailed instructions on
weatherproofing, refer to Weatherproofing outside cable connections.
v. Connect RJ45/R2CT connector to MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/9558HC DC +Data
connector.
vi. Building entry:
Install surge suppressor onto Wall Mount Support bracket at the building
entry. Refer to Lightning surge suppressor installation (ANSI market) for
detailed instruction to install surge suppressor.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 521


Route and terminate cables between MSS and Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual
MPT ODU

vii. Route and terminate the yellow/green ground wire to station ground
according to site documentation.
viii. Terminate MPT facing end of the LMR-400 cable with Type N male
connector.
ix. Connect Type N connector to surge suppressor.
x. Terminate MSS facing end of the LMR-400 cable with Type N female
connector.
xi. Connect Type N connector to surge suppressor.
xii. For MPT Power Unit or MPT Extended Power Unit end:
Terminate LMR-400 coaxial cable with Type N male connector.
xiii. Connect Type N to MPT Power Unit or MPT Extended Power Unit Type N
connector.
xiv. For Power Injector Box/Card end:
Terminate LMR-400 coaxial cable with Type N male connector.
xv. Connect Type N to RJ45 adapter to Type N connector.
xvi. Connect RJ45 connector to Power Injector Box/Card DC+Data connector.

9. Install power cable system grounds. For detailed instructions on cable system
grounds, refer to MPT ODU electrical Ethernet and power cable system
grounding.

10. Weatherproof power cable system ground connection and surge suppressor.
For detailed instructions on weatherproofing, refer to Weatherproofing outside
cable connections.

23.6.5 MPT Access, Core-E, EASv2, MSS-1, or MSS-O shelf


electrical Ethernet port to MPT-XP/XP-HQAM
installation

1. Route outdoor rated Cat5e cable from MPT-XP/XP-HQAM to Cat5e surge


suppressor, and then to MPT Extended Power Unit. Refer to MPT Ethernet/
power cable system installation for general guidelines to install cable to the
MPT-XP/XP-HQAM.
i. MPT-XP/XP-HQAM end:
Terminate Cat5e cable with RJ45 and R2CT connector.

522 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Route and terminate cables between MSS and
MPT ODU

ii. Connect RJ45/R2CT connector to MPT-XP/XP-HQAM DC+Data


connector.
iii. (optional) Install lightning surge suppressor at the MPT-XP/XP-HQAM end
for GR-1089 lightning compliance. Refer to Lightning surge suppressor
installation (ANSI market) for detailed instruction to install surge
suppressor.
iv. Building entry:
Install surge suppressor at the building entry. Refer to Lightning surge
suppressor installation (ANSI market) for detailed instruction to install surge
suppressor.
v. Route and terminate the yellow/green ground wire to station ground
according to site documentation.
vi. Terminate MPT facing end of the Cat5e cable with RJ45.
vii. Connect RJ45 connector to surge suppressor.
viii. Terminate MPT Extended Power Unit facing end of the Cat5e cable with
RJ45.
ix. Connect RJ45 connector to surge suppressor.
x. MPT Extended Power Unit end:
Terminate Cat5e cable with RJ45.
xi. Connect RJ45 to MPT Extended Power Unit DC+Data connector.

2. Route indoor rated Cat5e cable or cable assembly from MPT Extended Power
Unit to MPT Access, Core-E, EASv2, or MSS-1 unit electrical Ethernet port.
i. MPT Extended Power Unit end:
If custom cable installation, terminate Cat5e cable with RJ45 connector.
ii. Connect RJ45 connector to MPT Extended Power Unit data connector.
iii. MSS-1/4/8 shelf end:
If custom cable installation, terminate Cat5e cable with RJ45.
iv. Connect RJ45 to MPT Access, Core-E, EASv2, or MSS-1 unit electrical
Ethernet port.

3. Install Cat5e cable system grounds. For detailed instructions on cable system
grounds, refer to MPT ODU electrical Ethernet and power cable system
grounding.

4. Weatherproof Ethernet cable system ground connections and surge


suppressor. For detailed instructions on weatherproofing, refer to
Weatherproofing outside cable connections.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 523


Route and terminate cables between MSS and Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual
MPT ODU

23.6.6 MPT Access, Core-E, EAS, or MSS-1 shelf optical


Ethernet port to MPT-XP/XP-HQAM installation

1. Route LC-LC fiber optic cable from MPT Access, Core-E, EAS, or MSS-1 shelf
optical port to MPT-XP/XP-HQAM. Refer to MPT Ethernet/power cable system
installation for general guidelines to install MPT-XP/XP-HQAM data cable.

2. Install SFP into MPT ODU and connect LC connector.

3. Install SFP into MPT Access, Core-E, EAS, or MSS-1 shelf optical port and
connect LC connector.

4. Route LMR-400 from MPT-XP/XP-HQAM to LMR-400 surge suppressor, and


then to MPT Extended Power Unit. Refer to MPT Ethernet/power cable system
installation for general guidelines to install MPT-XP power cable.
i. MPT-XP/XP-HQAM end:
Terminate LMR-400 coaxial cable with Type N male connector.
ii. Terminate free wire adapter with RJ45 connector and R2CT connector.
iii. Connect Type N to free wire Adapter to the LMR-400 cable Type N male
connector.
Or
(optional) Install lightning surge suppressor at the MPT-XP/XP-HQAM end
for GR-1089 lightning compliance. Refer to Lightning surge suppressor
installation (ANSI market) for detailed instruction to install surge
suppressor.
iv. Weatherproof the coaxial connection. For detailed instructions on
weatherproofing, refer to Weatherproofing outside cable connections.
v. Connect RJ45/R2CT connector to MPT-XP DC +Data connector.
vi. Building entry:
Install surge suppressor onto Wall Mount Support bracket at the building
entry. Refer to Lightning surge suppressor installation (ANSI market) for
detailed instruction to install surge suppressor.
vii. Route and terminate the yellow/green ground wire to station ground
according to site documentation.
viii. Terminate MPT facing end of the LMR-400 cable with Type N male
connector.
ix. Connect Type N connector to surge suppressor.

524 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Route and terminate cables between MSS and
MPT ODU

x. Terminate MSS facing end of the LMR-400 cable with Type N female
connector.
xi. Connect Type N connector to surge suppressor.
xii. MPT Extended Power Unit end:
Terminate LMR-400 coaxial cable with Type N male connector.
xiii. Connect Type N to MPT Extended Power Unit Type N connector.

5. Install power cable system grounds. For detailed instructions on cable system
grounds, refer to MPT ODU electrical Ethernet and power cable system
grounding.

6. Weatherproof power cable system ground connections and surge suppressor.


For detailed instructions on weatherproofing, refer to Weatherproofing outside
cable connections.

23.6.7 Electrical data connection to MSS-O

1. Electrical data connections are set up using Cat5E Ethernet cable for outdoor
applications. The Ethernet cable must be cut for a length depending on the
distance to be covered and terminated with an RJ45 plug on both sides. The
PFoE ports must be used for connection to one or two MPTs.
Use the RJ45 plug and the Hirose crimping tool for the cable termination.

2. Electrical PFoE ports must be used for the connection to one or two MPTs.
The electrical data connection to the MSS-O is protected and secured using a
connector enclosure: RFE connector housing (see Figure 440). The RFE
connector housing is mounted after the Ethernet cable is terminated with the
RJ45 connector. The installation procedure is detailed in a dedicated leaflet
present in the plastic bag containing the RFE.

Note: The optical cables for the MSS-O do not have the same fan-out length (part
of the fibers not protected by the external jacket) on their ends: the end to be put
inside the RFE (MSS-O side) is the one with the shortest fan-out

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 525


Route and terminate cables between MSS and Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual
MPT ODU

3. Route LMR-400 from wall mount support bracket to MPT ODU. Refer to MPT
Ethernet/power cable system installation for general guidelines to install MPT
ODU power cable.

23.6.8 Optical data connection to MSS-O


Optical data connections are set up using duplex optical cables pre-terminated with
LC/LC connectors. See the 9500 MPR Product Information Manual for the available
optical cables.

Optical and electrical data connections to the MSS-O are protected and secured
using a connector enclosure: RFE connector housing.

Figure 440 shows the cable and RFE connector.

Figure 440 RFE connector for optical data connections

Note: The optical cables for MSS-O do not have the same fan-out length (part of the
fibers not protected by the external jacket) on their ends: the end that have to be put
inside the RFE (MSS-O side) is the one with the shortest fan-out.

526 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual Route and terminate cables between MSS and
MPT ODU

23.6.9 Direct connection of site power to MPT ODU


installation

1. Route LC-LC fiber optic cable from MPT Access, Core-E, EAS, or MSS-1 shelf
optical port to MPT ODU. Refer to MPT Ethernet/power cable system installation
for general guidelines to install MPT ODU data cable.

2. Install SFP into MPT ODU and connect LC connector.

3. Install SFP into MPT Access, Core-E, EAS, or MSS-1 shelf optical port and
connect LC connector.

4. Mount the lightning arrestor onto the wall mount support bracket. See
Figure 441.

Figure 441 Direct power to MPT ODU, inside plant detail

5. Route and terminate the yellow/green ground wire to station ground according
to site documentation.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 527


Route and terminate cables between MSS and Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual
MPT ODU

6. Connect the low pass filter (optional) to the lightning arrestor.

7. Connect Type N BNC to 2-Wire Adapter to low pass filter (optional).

8. Connect the 2-wire adapter to PDU or station power according to site


documentation.
i. MPT ODU end:
Terminate LMR-400 coaxial cable with Type N male connector.
ii. Terminate free wire adapter with RJ45 connector and R2CT connector.
iii. Connect Type N to free wire Adapter to the LMR-400 cable Type N male
connector.
Or
(optional) Install lightning surge suppressor at the MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/
9558HC end for GR-1089 lightning compliance. Refer to Lightning surge
suppressor installation (ANSI market) for detailed instruction to install surge
suppressor.
iv. Weatherproof the coaxial connection. For detailed instructions on
weatherproofing, refer to Weatherproofing outside cable connections.
v. Connect RJ45/R2CT connector to MPT ODU DC+Data connector.
vi. Wall mount support bracket end:
Terminate LMR-400 coaxial cable with Type N male connector.
vii. Connect to the Lightning Arrestor.

9. Install power cable system grounds. For detailed instructions on cable system
grounds, refer to MPT ODU electrical Ethernet and power cable system
grounding.

10. Weatherproof power cable system ground connections and surge suppressor.
For detailed instructions on weatherproofing, refer to Weatherproofing outside
cable connections.

528 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual MPT Ethernet/power cable system installation

24 MPT Ethernet/power cable system


installation

24.1 Purpose
This chapter describes how to install Cat5e electrical Ethernet and coaxial power
cables for MPT ODU applications.

24.2 General

Note: This chapter is only required for applications which include one of the following:

•MPT- ODU Cat5e electrical Ethernet


•MPT- ODU optical Ethernet fiber
•MPT- ODU coaxial power cable.
For applications without one of the previously mentioned configurations, continue to the
next chapter.

Warning: To ensure continuity and avoid short circuits, all RJ45, Coaxial, Ethernet, Optical
Fiber. cables / connector connections made in the field must be verified and checked with
Cable tester.

Warning: All the cables (coax cable, Cat5e cable, fiber cable) must be secured to the tower
with the relevant UV ties raps.

Figure 442 shows typical MPT ODU power cable system installation including
antenna, ODU, MPT ODU power, lightening surge suppressors, and system cable
grounds.

LMR-400 is a low-loss RG-8 type used in the ANSI market. It has the following
specifications:

• Characteristic impedance: 50 ohms


• Center conductor: solid BCCAI, 2.74 mm (0.108 inch) diameter.

Issue 1 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA 529


MPT Ethernet/power cable system installation Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual

• Insulation: foam PE
• Shield: dual, aluminum foil and tinned copper braid
• Jacket: PE (black)
• Overall diameter: 10.3 mm (0.405 inch)
• Bend radius (install): 25.4 mm (1 inch)
• Nominal center conductor DC resistance: (1.39 ohms per 1000 ft. 305m, max
length 1000 ft. 305m)
• Nominal outer shield DC resistance: 1.65 ohms per 1000 ft. (305m)
• Nominal attenuation at 300 MHz: 2.2 dB per 100 ft. (30m)
• Operating temperature: -40 to +85°C

Figure 442 Typical tower coaxial/Ethernet cable detail

530 3DB 19285 AEAA TQZZA Issue 1


Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual MPT Ethernet/power cable system installation

When installing the connectors, always use the compression tool designed for the
compression connectors/cable being used. A recommended compression tool kit for
the connectors used with the coaxial cable is available from Nokia.

Warning: The performance of the radio may be affected if PPC connectors are not used
and the connectors are not installed using the correct PPC connector tool kit.

Take great care when removing the jacket to keep the outer conductor intact. A
scored outer conductor will weaken the cable and, for a solid outer cable, can cause
the outer conductor to break or crack when subsequently bent. Always use the cut-
off and strip tool specifically designed for the cable being used. Tighten Type N
connectors (male to female) by hand or with the special tool in the compression tool
kit. All outdoor connections must be made weatherproof. Refer to Weatherproofing.

When planning the route, the route chosen must provide physical protection for the
cable (protection against accidental damage). The cable must be positioned so that
there is unimpeded access to the tower and to services on the tower. Use a route
which minimizes potential for damage to the cable jacket and avoids excessive cable
re-bending.

When installing the cable, keep cable clear of sharp edges. Rod support kits or
similar must be used across unsupported sections of the cable run indoors and
outdoors.

Ensure the minimum bend radius for the cable is not exceeded.

Use one UV-resistant cable tie every 1m (3 ft.) or less, of cable.

Ensure the cable is grounded in accordance with the instructions provided in the